HomeMy WebLinkAboutTraffic Engineering Improvements
Augusta Richmond GA
DOCUMENT NAME:-tx-Q~c... ~\'eeX\~ \\Yl9'(OJayle{YT~
DOCUMENT TYPE: ClJf\~~Cl~~
YEAR: (rl
BOX NUMBER:00
FILE NUMBER: \ ~t:>
NUMBER OF PAGES: \ 0fE;:'
<I
II."
~
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
~
II
~,-."
..
II
II
I',.'
.
-:,i
I
~
II
III
i
I
~
II
I
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
IMPROVEMENTS 9 PHA,SE, I
. ,
SoRa 56 @ MARVIN GRIFFIN RDo9
-. . -
SoRo 56 @, APPLE VALLEY DR.,
SoR. 28 (WASHINGTON RD.)
@BOY scour RDo &
VARIOUS INTERSECTIONS
ALONG GORDON HWY
PROJEC:T NOo 57-8590-096
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Traffic Engineering Improvements, Phase I
S. R. 56 @ Marvin Griffin Road
S. R. 56 @ Apple Valley Drive
S. R. 28 (Washington Road) @ Boy Scout Road
Various Intersections Along Gordon Highway
Project Number: 57-8590-096
SECTrOB PAGES
Instruction to Bidders IB-1 thru IB-3
Georgia Prompt Pay Act PPA-1
Minority and Economically
Disadvantaged Business Support
Special Conditions
Supplementary Conditions
ME-1
SP-1
A-1 thru A-4
1 thru 33
SC-1 thru SC-2
P-1 thru P-2
M-1 thru M-7
G-1 thru G-5
TC-1 thru TC 23
TS-1 thru TS-113
1 thru 9
Agreement
General Conditions
Proposal
Luminaire Location Maps
General Notes
Traffic Control specifications
Traffic Signal Specifications
Plans
SECTION IB
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IB-01
GENERAL
All proposals must be presented in a sealed envelope,
addressed to the Owner. The proposal must be filed with the
Owner on or before the time stated in the invitation for bids.
Mailed proposals will be treated in every respect as though
filed in person and will be subject to the same requirements.
Proposals received subsequent to the time stated will
be returned unopened. ~rior to the time stated any proposal
may be withdrawn at the discretion of the bidder, but no
proposal may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after
bids have been opened, pending the execution of contract with
the successful bidder.
IB-02
EXAMINATION OF WORK
Each bidder shall, by careful examination, satisfy
himself as to the nature and location of the work, the
conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity
of the facilities needed preliminary to and during the
prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and
all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the
cost thereof under the contract. No oral agreement or
conversation with any off icer, agent, or employee of the Owner,
either before or after the execution of the contract, shall
affect or modify any of the terms or obligations therein.
IB-03
ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS
No interpretation of the meaning of plans,
specifications or other prebid documents will be made to any
bidder orally.
Every request for such interpretation should be in
writing addressed to the Director of Public Works, 1815 Marvin
Griffin Road, Augusta, Georgia 30906, and to be given
consideration must be received at least five days prior to the
date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such
interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in
the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if
issued, will be sent by certified mail with return receipt
requested to all prospective bidders (at the respective
addresses furnished for such purposes), not later than three
days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure
of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation
shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his bid
as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the
Contract Documents.
IB-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IB-04
PREPARATION OF BIDS
Bids shall be submitted on the forms provided and
must be signed by the bidder or his authorized representative.
Any corrections to entries made on bid forms should be
initialed by the person signing the bid.
Bidders must quote on all items appearing on the bid
forms, unless specific directions in the advertisement, on the
bid form, or in the special specifications allow for partial
bids. Failure to quote on all items may disqualify the bid.
When quotations on all items are not required, bidders shall
insert the words "no bid" where appropriate.
Alternative bids will not be considered unless
specifically called for.
Telegraphic bids will not be considered.
Modif ications to bids already submitted will be allowed if
submitted by telegraph prior to the time fixed in the
Invitation for Bids. Modifications shall be ~ubmitted as such,
and shall not reveal the total amount of either the original or
revised bids.
Bids by wholly owned proprietorships or partnerships
will be signed by all owners. Bids of corporations will be
signed by an officer of the firm and his signature attested by
the secretary thereof who will affix the corporate seal to the
proposal.
NOTE: A 10% Bid Bond is required in All cases.
IB-05 BASIS OF AWARD
The, bids will be compared on the basis of unit
prices, as extended, whicn will include and, cover the
furnishing of all material and the performance of all labor
requisite or proper, and completing of all the work called for
under the accompanying contract, and in the manner set forth
and described in the specifications.
Where estimated quantities are included in certain
items of the proposal, they are for the purpose of comparing
bids. ' While they are believed to be close approximations, they.
are not guaranteed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
to check all items of, construction. In case of error in
extension of' prices in 'a proposal, unit bid prices shall
govern.
IB-2
IB-3
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IB-06
BIDDER'S OUALIFICATIONS
No proposal will be received from any bidder unless
he can present satisfactory evidence that he is skilled in work
of a similar nature to that covered by the contract and has
sufficient assets to meet all obligations to be incurred in
carrying out the work. He shall submit with his proposal,
sealed in a separate envelope, a FINANCIAL EXPERIENCE AND
EQUIPMENT STATEMENT, giving reliable information as to working
capital available, plant equipment, and his experience and
general qualifications. The Owner may make such investigations
as are deemed necessary to determine the ability of the bidder
to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to him all
such additional information and data for this purpose as may be
requested. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if
the evidence submitted by the bidder or investigation of him
fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly
qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to
complete the work contemplated therein. Part of the evidence
required above shall consist of a list of the names and
addresses of not less than five (5) firms or corporations for
which the bidder has done similar work.
IB-07
PERFORMANCE BOND
At the time of entering into the contract, the
Contractor shall give bond to th2 Owner for the use of the
Owner and all persons doing work or furnishing skill, tools,
machinery or materials under or for the purpose of such
contract, conditional for the payment as they become due, of
all just claims for such work, tools, machinery, skill and
terms, for saving the Owner harmless from all cost and charges
that may accrue on account of the doing of the work specified,
and for compliance with the laws pertaining thereto. Said bond
shall be for the amount of the contract satisfactory to the
Owner and authorized by law to do business in the State of
Georgia.
Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each
copy thereof a certified and effectively dated copy of the
power of attorney.
IB-08
REJECTION OF BIDS
These proposals are asked for in good faith, and
awards will be made as soon as practicable, provided
satisfactory bids are received. The right is reserved, however
to waive any informalities in bidding, to reject any and all
proposals, or to accept a bid other than the lowest submitted
if such action is deemed to be in the best interest of the
Owner.
1
I
I
I
I,
,I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
";';1
GEORGIA ~YAY ACT
This contract is intended. by the parties to, and does, supersede
any and all provisions of the Georqia Prompt Pay Act, O. C. G. A.
section 13-11-1, et seq. In the event any provision of this
Contract is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay
Act, the provision of this contract shall control.
:NOTICE
All references in this document, which includes all papers,
writinqs, drawinqs, plans or photoqraphs to be used in connection
with this document, to "Richmond County Board of Commissioners"
shall be deemed to mean "Auqusta-Richmond County Commission-
Council and all references to "Chairman" shall be deemed to mean
"Mayor" .
PPA-1
ME-l
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MINORITY AND BCONOMICALLY DISADVANTAGBD BUSINESS SUPPORT
It is the intent of the Augusta-Richmond County-
council to increase the involvement of qualified minority and
economically disadvantaged businesses in the contracted work
of County Government.
In an effort to support this intention, this
project is offered to all qualified firms. The bids will be
evaluated based on qualifications, price and construction
time. with all other items being considered equal, the
contract, if awarded will be awarded to a minori ty and
economically disadvantaged firm or a firm that has included
such firms as subcontractors on this project.
The bidders shall include with their bid a
statement of qualification for themselves and/or any
qualified subcontractors explaining why they should be
considered a minority or economically disadvantaged firm. If
the firm does not fall into this category, no information is
necessary.
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
TRAJ'FIC DlGIHBERIHG XXPROVEXEN'rS, PHASB I
S. R. 5' I Harvin Griffin Road
S. R. 56 , Apple valley Drive
S. R. 28 (Washington Road) , Boy Scout Road
Various Intersection. Along Gordon Highway
Project Humber: 57-85'0-0"
SPECIAL CONDITlQNS
SCOPE:
This proj ect consists of improvements tp the
appurtenances of the existing traffic signals at State
Route 56 at Marvin Griffin Road, State Route 56 at
Apple Valley Drive and State Route 28 (Washington Road)
at Boy Scout Road. It includes the removal of existing
timber or concrete strain poles; installation of new
concrete strain poles; removal/relocation and
installation of pull boxes and conduits;
removal/relocation of controller cabinet, including
pad; installation of loops and improvement of radii.
It also includes the removal of existing lumina ire
poles and bases at various locations along Gordon
Highway.
SEOUENCE OF OPERATIONS:
The Contractor shall not perform any work that will
slow or disrupt rush hour traffic flow. Rush hours are
between the hours of 7 a.m. to 9 a.m. and 4 p.m. and 6
p.m.
SP-l
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION A
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made on, the /...fL day of ()fA~ , 19!17- by and
between Auqusta-Richmond County Commission-Council
party of the first part, hereinafter called the OWNER, and
B/E Electrical Contractors. Incorporated
party of the second part, hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the
considerations hereinafter named, agree as follows:
ARTICLE I - SCOPE OF THE WORK
The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the
materials and all of the equipment and labor necessary, and to
perform all of the work shown on the plans and described in the
specifications for the project entitled:
Traffic Engineering Improvements, Phase I
S. R. 56 @ Marvin Griffin Road
S. R. 56 @ Apple Valley Drive
S. R. 28 (Washington Road @ Boy Scout Road
Various Intersections along Gordon Highway
Project Number: 57-8590-096
and in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the
Contract Documents as defined in the General and Special
Conditions hereto attached, which are hereby made a part of
this agreement.
-ARTICLE II - TIME OF COMPLETION - LIOUIDATED DAMAGES
The work to be performed under this Contract shall be
commenced within ~ calendar days after the date of written
notice by the Owner to the Contractor to proceed. All work
shall be completed within 100 calendar days with such
extensions of time as are provided for in the General
Conditions.
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning, rate of progress and the time for completion of the
work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this
contract. Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted
regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of
progress as will ensure full completion thereof within the time
specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for
completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time
for completion of the same, taking into consideration the
average climatic range and construction conditions prevailing
in this locality.
A-1
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NEGLECT, FAIL, OR REFUSE TO
COMPLETE THE WORK WITHIN THE TIME HEREIN SPECIFIED, then the
Contractor does hereby agree, as a part of the consideration
for the awarding of this contract, to pay the OWner the sum of
Five Hundred Dollars ($500), not as a penalty, but as
liquidated damages for such breach of contract as hereinafter
set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor
shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract
for completing the work.
The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and
between the Contractor and the Owner because of the
impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and
ascertaining the actual damages the OWner would, in such event,
sustain, and said amounts shall be retained from time to time
by the Owner from current periodical estimates.
It is further agreed that time is of the essence of
each and every portion of this Contract and the specifications
wherein a definite portion and certain length of time is fixed
for the additional time is allowed for the completion of an
work, the new time limit fixed by extension shall be the
essence of this contract.
ARTICLE III - PAYMENT
(a) The Contract Sum
The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for the
performance of the Contract the amount as stated in the
Proposal and Schedule of Items. No variations shall be made in
the amount except as set forth in the specifications attached
hereto.
(b) Proaress Payment
On no later than the fifth day every month, the
Contractor shall submit to the OWner's Engineer an estimate
covering the percentage of the total amount of the Contract
which has been completed from the start of the job up to and
including the last working day of the proceeding month,
together with such supporting evidence as may be required by
the Owner and/or the Engineer. This estimate shall include
only the quantities in place and at the unit prices as set
forth in the Bid Schedule.
On the vendor run following approval of the invoice
for payment, the Owner shall after deducting previous payments
made, pay to the Contractor 90% of the amount of the estimate
on units accepted in place. The 10% retained percentage may be
held by the Owner until the final completion and acceptance of
all work under the Contract.
A-2
ARTICLE IV - ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
(a) Upon receipt of written notice that the work is
ready for final inspection acceptance, the Engineer shall
within 10 days make such inspection, and when he finds the work
acceptable under the Contract and the Contract fully performed,
he will promptly issue a final certificate, over his own
signature, stating that the work required'by this Contract has
been completed and is accepted by him under the terms and
conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due the
Contractor, including the retained percentage, shall be paid to
the Contractor by the owner within 15 days ,after the date of
said final certificate.
(b) Before final payment is due, the Contractor
shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Engineer that all
payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with
work have been paid, except that in case of disputed
indebtedness of liens of evidence of payment of,-' all such
disputed amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment
has not already been guaranteed by surety bond.
(c) The making and acceptance of the final payment
shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner, other
than those arising from unsettled liens, from faulty work
appearing within 12 months after final payment, from
requirements of the specif ications, or from manufacturer's
guarantees. It shall also constitute a waiver of all claims by
the Contractor except those previously made and still
unsettled.
(d) If after the work has been substantially
completed, full completion thereof is materially delayed
through no fault of the Contractor, and the Engineer, so
certifies, the Owner shall upon certification of the Engineer,
and without terminating the, Contract, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the work fully completed and
accepted.
Each payment shall be made under the terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not
constitute a waiver of claims.
A-3
I
I
II
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,-
.~ _v
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed
this Agreement in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall
be deemed an original, in the year and day first mentioned
above. ,
This document approved as ...0
legal suffiCienc' and form.
.<:>
SEAL
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY
COMMISSION-COUNCIL
(owner)
By'
Richmond County Commission-Council
:~a~~~jOC
Title: _Pr &rdM~ " ._~--
Address:
6-1n~ (,.A Ci\~ 13
A-4
q, .
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
, ' '
GENERAL CONDITIONS
";:--' ~...;~
I
AEGIS SECURITY INSURAL'JCE COMPANY
~89 lN11lRSTA11I DIlIVll, P.O, Box 3153
HAR\lI9RIJ'RO, PA 17110
(717)657.9671. PAl(, (717)6S7.m40
:
-r .~.
Bond # BOO 000 356
PERFORMANCE BOND
Approved by The American Institute of Architects,
A.IA Document No, A 311 February 1970 Edition
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor)
B/E ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS, INCORPORATED, 6136 COLUMBIA ROAD, GROVETOWN, GA 30813
as Principal, hereinafter called Contractor, and, (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)
AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY
2589 Intenstate Drive
Harrisburg, PA 17110
as Surety, hereinafter caWed Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner)
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION-COUNCIL, ROOM 601, MUNICIPAL BLDG" AUGUSTA, GA
as Obligee, hereinafler called OWner, in the amount of
EIGHTY FOUR THOUSAND, NINE HUNDRED EIGHTY AND NO/100-----------------
Dollars ($ 84,980.00 ),
for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,
Contractor has by written agreement dated 19 entered into a contract with Owner for
TRAFFIC ENGINEERING IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE I, PROJECT NUMBER: 57-8590-096
In accordance with Drawings and Specifications prepared by (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Architect)
which contract is by reference made a part hereof, andis hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OaUGATION Is
such that. If Contractor shall promptly and rahtlfully perlonn said Contract,
tPlan thlsobllgslion shall be null and void: olPlarwiae It shall remain In lu"
force and effect,
The Surely hernbyv.a- notice of any alteration or extension of time '
made by the Owner.
~ Conlractcr tIIIlIlI bo,n declared by Owner 10 be In default
undOf the Contract, the OwnOf having performed Ownel's obligations
lhonlunder, the Sw8ly mrry promptly remedy the defaull. or shall promptly
1) ~ the Conlracf in BCCllI'lIance with Ita terms and conditions.
or
2) Oblain B IlId or bids for completing the Contract in accordance wllh
Its lerms and conditione, and upon defennina110n by Surllly of Ihe ~I
responsible bKlder, or, If lhe Owner elects, upon de/ermlnallon by the
Owner and lhe Surety jointly of the 10WI8lIt responsible bidder, arrange ror
II conlrecl between euch bidder and r make 8VBlill~~1
I.~
~ (Witness) ,
8-101 (10m)
progresses (even though Ihere should be a def'auh or a 5UCC81IlIion of
defaults lrIder the conlract or conlrac;11; or completion arranged under this
peragraph) sufficlen1 funds to pay (he coal of completion less the ba1ance
ci !he lXriract price; but not exeeeding, Including olher costs and damages
fOt' tMllch lhe Surety mrry be liable hereunder. the amount eel forth In the
fln;f paragraph hereof, Thelenn 'balaoc" of the contract price,. as U1l8d
In this paragraph, shall mean the lolal amount payable by Owner to
Contractor under the Conlract and any amendments thereto, 1_ the
amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor,
Iv"! au" under this bond must bo III8I"uted before the expiration of
l\f,o (2) _r:s from \he dale on """'ieh flnal payment under the Contract rails
due,
No rl9h' of eclJon shall accrue 011 Ihls bond 10 or for IIIe UM of any
person Dr aarpomllon other lhan Iho OvoInsr named herein or the hell$.
executors, administrators or s~ or the OWner ,
,')..,
. 19a,
.l.........""......
-
'.
-,
-
"'-,
/' '-
-;:' :.
(Title)
COMPANY.
-.C>. -(Sea\)>~
" "'" "<'.,/','-
#~~ ... .,
..... -- "? ~ . ,77.. .
~ -:
(Title) AT1G8~EY~IN-FACT
;~ ~ ~._'
-:. _4<:d" ~
\~:\~:: ':- .
1'", --<...." ","':"
"'''',",...;;:\:.~- '-
tJ,.~ ..[
- ,..~; -7J ..
::-- ~ "'" .~
.
AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY
2:l69IN'T11RSTA11I DRlVB, P,O, BOX3153
HARRISBIJIlO, PA 17110
(717)0.:57.9071' PAX,(717)65'1.a:w.o
,.
.
..
Bond # BOO 000 356
LASOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
The American Institute of Architects, AlA Document No. A 311 February 1970 Edition
THIS BOND IS ISSUED SfMULTANEOUSLYW/TH PERFORMANCE BOND IN FAVOR OF THE
OWNER CONDITIONED ON THE FULL AND FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Here Insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor)
BIE LECTRICAL CONTRACTORS, INCORPORATEO, 6136 COLUMBIA ROAD, GROVETOWN, GA 30813
86 Principal, hereinafter called Principal.... and, (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)
AeGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY
2589 Interstate Drive
Harrisburg, PA 17110
as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and flrm~ bound unto (Here Insert fun name and address or legal tille of CHmBf)
AUGUSTA-RICHMONO COUNTY COMMISSION-COUNCIL, ROOM 601, MUNICIPAL BLDG.,AUGUSTA,GA
88 Obligee, hereinafter called OWner, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined, in the amount of
EIGHTY FOUR THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED EIGHTY AND NOt100--------------------------------
(here insert a sum equal to at least one-half of the contract price) Dollam ($ 84,980.00 ),
for the payment whereof Principal and Su~ ,*,d themselves, their helm, executors, administrators, successom and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, .
Princi~a' has ~ written agreement dated 19 , entered into a contract with OWner for
iJ~~ofc!~n~e ~~O~~~ ~~~~~~~~~bi;~tf~~~~'(~~r~rn'i~fl~tN,~~~~ricr~d~~-g~~gallitle of ArcMect)
I
I
which contract Is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract,
NOW, THEREFORE, THe CONDITION OF THIS OBliGATION Is
'Buch Ihal, If Prlnclpel Bhall prompl!y make peyment 10 BlI claimants 8B
helelnaflar defined, for all labor and l11lIlerlalllll8lll)( IlI880nllbly required
for!Me/n !he ~ d!he CcnllBct, then thlll obIlg8flon wl/ be ~;
otherwise II ,hall remain In 'ull'orce and elfecl, subject, '-,ID the
following concIitlona:
1. A claimant Is defined lIS one having a direct contrect with the
PrIncIpeI or""",, a SubooIllrac*lr of the Princlpel for labor, material, Of belCh,
UB8d I)( I'llaBOnably required for use In lha parfonnance of lhe Conlract,
labor nI mBlerlIII baing CCIIIIlnJed ID include that part of water, gas, powar,
light, Mal, 011, 9alll>ll...., t..~ seMC8 or rental of aqulpmenl dlrec:tly
appllcable to lhe Contract,
2. Tha a- namad PrlncIpaI8IId SurBly hereby lolnlly imd _rally
agree with Itte OWner Ihal _ry claimant 118 herein defined, who has not
been paid In lull babe lhe Bllplratlon of a period d ninety (90) dlIys allllf
the dat.. on which _ In( of such claimant'" -..10: or labor _ done or
paofofmed, Of materials _re fuml8hed by Buch clalinant, may Bue on this
bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final judglMnt fOl'
BIICh Bllm Of Buma as may be IUIIIIy due claimant, and have 8Iluculion
Ihllraon, The OWner ahan not be liable for the poymenl of llIlY C08l1 Of
lIllp8fI_ of any euch llUN. , '
3, No aut! or IICficn shall be commenced hereundef by any claimant:
a) Unlesa cIBlrnanl,- DllIer than one having a direct contract with the
Prl nclpel, shall have given wrlt1en notice to any two of the following: lhe
Ptlnclpa!, !he OWner, or !he Suraly above nalll6d, within ninety (90) dlIyB
dayOf'.~1
~
lU h It, Q. ~Ji((---
~ (Witness)
O-JOl (10195)
after IUCh claimant did or performed the 11Ia1 of the WOlIl Of labcx, 01'
IumIshed lhe.... d!he maIIlrIala lor wlllch said claim Is made, slating with
subBtantisl accuracy lhe amount claimed and tha name of the party tD
whDm the materials _e lumlehed, or 'or ~ fhe work Of labor _s
done or pelformed. Such notice llhell be served by mall/ng lhe lIlIme by
~ maillll' CBrlIfled mal, poefage prepeld, I" an erweIope Bddr8888d
tot!le Principal, Owner or S\II'aly, III any place wtl8At an cIfIce Is regularly
malnfalned fM the lran88Cf/on of buslneA, or ~ In a/l)' manner In
which lagal procIIlI' may be S8MIII/n !he alme In which the afor8llllid
project k located. _ Ihat Buch t18lYlce need "01 be made by II public
otrlCllf '
b) Mer lhe expIralion of one (1) year followlng tile dale on which
P\'InclpaII oeolllld Wait on aald Contract, It being undel1ll00d, '- lhat
If any Ilmltallon embodied In Ihls bond Is prohlblted by any ,_ controlling
the COI1BlrUclIon hereof such Iimllalion shall be deemed to be amended so
as to be equal 10 the minimum perlod of Ihnltallon ",,""lllod by sUCh law,
c) 0Iher than In a elate coull of competent jurlsdlclion In and for the
COUtIly or otMr political subdivision 01 the sime In which lhe Court lor lhe
dlslrlct In ...tllch lha Preject. or lIny parl'herecl, la lIi\ualod, and' not
etaewhenI,
4, The amount of .hls bond ahall be reduced by and 10 !he ..xtent of
1IffI/ payment or psymenlB made In good fallh hefeunder, Inclusive of lhe
pgymenI by Sumty d mechanics' l!erlll ...tllch may be filed d rllCDf'd BglIlnsl
&Bid Impnwemenf, whether or not claim for the amount of such fill" be,
presenled under and aga/nlll !hls bone!. ", _: '.
,19.2!2-.
.
--
'..
/ '.
-:- ;~
"'-.
7:' -";;.
~~ ~.,.
::.~:....
\.~::~~ ~ --'."
f ~'~
.:~:!> .i. E:"
. .0 :ft:: ~
--....., ~ ~..,;......
..
,,,,"
" -,
i
~
Oi'
Power Certificate No. GA006
AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY does hereby make, constitute
and appoint
Marilyn A. Blome, Tyre M. Stone, Kim Ackerman
its true and lawful Attorney-in-Fact, to make, execute and deliver on its behalf surety bonds, undertaking and other instruments of
similar nature as follows:
$1 Million
This Power of Attorney is granted and sealed under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of
Directors of the Company on the 4th day of February, 1993,
"RESOLVED, That the President, any Vice President, the Secretary and any Assistant Secretary appointed for that purpose by the
officer in charge of surety operations shall each have authority to appoint individuals as Attorneys-in-Fact or under other
appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar
character issued by the Company in the course of its business, On any instrument making or evidencing such an appointment, the
signatures may be affixed by facsimile, On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the
Company, the seal or facsimile thereof may be imposed or fixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal
shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking,"
-l
I
en
"'0
o
~
m
JJ
z
C
r
r
)>
Z
o
<
o
o
"
z
c
~
co
m
JJ
(jj
Z
o
-l
Z
JJ
m
o
"RESOLVED, That the signature of each of the following officers; President, Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any
, Secretary or Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any
Certificate relating thereto, appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for the purpose
only of executing and attesting bonds and undertaking and other writings upon the Company and any such power required and
certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any
bond or undertaking to which it is attached,"
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY has caused its official seal to be hereunto affixed, and
these presents to be signed by its President this Jir.h. day of May ,1994,
AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
}
} s.s.: Harrisburg
}
County of Dau phin
On this 5th day of May 1994, before me personally came Martin G, Lane, Jr, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose
and say that he is President of AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY, the corporation described herein and which executed
the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation, that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such cOl"porate
seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order,
t~~~~(1l/U
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires July 19, 1997
I, the undersigned, Vice President of AEGIS SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY, a Pennsylvania corporation, DO HEREBY
CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked; and furthermore that
the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the said Power of Attorney, is now in force,
Sign'" and ,ealed .. 'he Ci'y of Hacri,hn<g, in ,he commonwez;;; ~n'Yl"nia, dated 'hi,
~LEEN ,FRITZ
VICE PRESIDENT
OF ADMINISTRATION
~ay qf;,. '.
-~ - - ". d .;
~, ... ~
,199
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
Article
Number Title
.,
DEFINITIONS" ".", " ' , , " "'" " ' , , , , " , , , '" " ,., " " , " ,., , , "
PRELIMINARY MATTERS""""",."",.""""""".".""
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
INTENT. A~~NDING AND RE USE....,.............. .. .. .. ......
A V AILABILlTY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDITIONS:
REFERENCE POINTS, . , , , , . . ' , , , , , , , ,. , . ,. ... .. ., , , . , . , . . , , , ' , . , , .
BONDS AND INSURANCE ,."".,."",.,.",."".,."""".",
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES""".",..."",.",.....,
OTHER WORK ",..,.",.""""".".""""",.,.""".,..""
OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES"""""""""""""".,."",
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
CHANGES IN THE WORK..",..,........",....
II CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE.."......,......,..,............,
12
CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME-. ' '" """ " " ,,', ,
13 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: TESTS AND
INSPECTIONS: CORRECTION. REMOV AL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK, ",., ""." ': " , , , " ." ,.,
14 PA YMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION "".'".,.,
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AN D TER~IIN A TION ......, '.........
16 ARB ITRA TION "'..",........,..,....................,,...........
17 MISCELLAN EOUS .." " ""., '" "" ",..,.." '" '" , " . " ,.". '"
3
Page
8
9
10
11
14
18
19
19
21
21
24
24
26
29
31
32
I
INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
I
Anici~ or Paragraph
Numb~r
Acceptance of Insurance ...,..;...................... 5.13
Access 10 the Work .................................. 13.2
Addenda--definition of (see definition of
Specifications) ..,..........,....,..................... \
, Agreemenl--definition of ,........,...................... I
All Risk !nsur:mce ..............".,.... , , . .. .. . .. . . ... 5.6
Amendment. Written ............................. 1. 3.1.\
Application for Payment--definition of ,..,.............' 1
Application for Payment. Final ...................... 14.\2
Application for Prcgress Payment ......,............. 14.2
Application for Progress Payment-review of .... 14,4-14.7
Arbitration ,..".........,............,................. \6
Authorized Variation in Work ......................... 9.5
A '.'ai\ability of Lands .................................. 4.\
A ward. Notice of --defined .............................. 1
Before Starting Construction .......,.,'.,......... :.5-2.7
Bid--definition of "."....,.....,,'..,'.'............... 1
Bonds and Insurance-in general ,.,...,................. 5
- Bonds-<iefinition of , .. , , .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . ... 1
Bonds. Delivery of ,.,............,......... ......: :.1. 5.\
Bonds. Performance and Other ......,............. .5, 1-5.:
Cash Allowances ,....,."........,................... 11.8
Change Order--definition of ":,."..",,.,.........,.... 1
Change Orders-w be executed ".",....,........... 10.4
Changes in the Work ,.",..,...........,............... 10
Claims. Waiver of.-,n Final Payment ",.,...'..,... 14.16
Clarifications and Interpretauons ,.",......,'...',..., 9,4
Cleaning "",,'.....,..,....,....',....'............, 6.1 i
CompletIon, , , , , ' , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . . ' , , , . , , ' , , , . ,. 14
ComoietJon.Suostantial """""""""..",., 14.8-14,9
Conference. Pre::onstructlon ".."""".",."..."" :.8
Connic:. Error. Dlscrepancy-Contractor
to Report ""......', '..,...................... :.5.3.3
Construction Machinery. Equipment. etc, ",.,..'..... 6.4
ContinUing Work ','"".,....."""..,'......,...... 6.29
Contract Documents-amending and
supplemenung ".,'.."" ,'"",.., _..,.,' _..... 3A-3.5
Contract Documents--<iefinition of .",...",..........,. I
Contract Documents-Intent"",.",.,.,."...... 3.1...3.3
Contract Documents-Reuse of """""..,..."..", 3,6
Contract Price. Change of ,..,'.."...."..,.,......,,'. 11
Contract Price--definition "",.."""",.."""""", I
Contract Time. Change oi "".......'""""....."." I:
Contract Time. Commencement of "",.,.....,.'..'" :.3
Contract Time--definiuon of ",..,.,..,.,.........."... I
Contractor--delinition of "".,.....,'..". _ . _ . . . , . . . . . " 1
Contractor May SlOP Work or Terminate",....."", 15.5
Contractor's Continuing Obligation,."............., 14.15
Contractor's Duty to Report Discrepancy
in Documents ",.",....,........,..,.,........ :.5. '3.:
Contractor's F<::e-Cost Plus ..' I1A.5.6. 11.5.1. 11.6-11.-:-
Contractor's Liability Insurance"".",...,....,....., 5.3
Contractor's Responsibilities--in general """....",... 6
Contractor's Warranty of TitJe ........................ 14.3
Contractors--other .....,.....................,....... . ., 7
Contractual Liability Insurance.......,................ 5.4
Coordinating Conu'actor--definition of ..............., '7 A
Coordination .....,....................,.............,. 7.4
Copies of Documents ,.........................,....,., :.:
COlTCction or Removal of Defective Work ........... \3.\\
COlTCction Period. One Year ........................ 13 .12
COlTCction. Removal or Acceptance of Defective
W ork-in general ...... _ .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. ... 13.11-13. 14
Cost-net decrease ................................. 11. 6.2
Cost of Work..................................., \1.4-11.5
Costs. Sut1plemental ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 11.4.5
I
I
I
I.
Day--definition of .....................,..........,...... 1
Defecrive--deiinition of ,...............,...,...."...... 1
Defecrive Work. Acceptance of ... .......,."....,... \3.13
Defecrive Work. Correction or Removal of ,....'.... 13.11 .
DefecriveWork-ingeneral ............... 13,14.7.14.1\
Defecrive Work. Rejecting..... .. .... .......... , ... .... 9.6
Definitions .,... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . , . . . , . . .. \
Delivery of Bonds ..................',..'.........,.... :.\
Determination for Unit Prices ...,......,............. 9.10
Disputes. Decisions by Engineer. .. .. ....... , .... 9.\1...9.12
Documents. Copies of ..............,.................. 2.:
Documents. Record .................................. 6.\9
Documents. Reuse ..,.......................,......... 3.6
Drawings-definition of ..............,..........,....... \
I
I
I
I
I
Easements '..".,..,......,.,...,.,.....".'...,...... 4.1
Effective date of Agreemenl--definition of , ' ,. , , .. , , , .. " 1
Emergencies "......".,......,....,'........"...". 6.::1
Engineer-<iefinition of ,.........,..........,.."......., I
Engmeer's Decisions ,........,."",.......,.." 9,10-9,\2
Engmeer's-Notice Work is Acceptable ".....,...., 14, \3
Engineer's Recommendation of Payment ...,., 14.4. 14.\3
Engineer's Responsibilities. Limitations
on ................. 6.6,9.11,9.13-9.16,18.2
Engineer's Status During ConstrUction-in general ,'..., 9
Equipment. Labor, Malerials and...."...,.,.,..., 6.3-6.6
Equivalent Materials and Equipment ,'....'",.,...',. 6.7
Explorations of physical conditions,. ,. ' ", , .. , , .,..., 4,:2
I
I
I
Fee, Contractor's-Costs Plus, ".... ................. 11.6
Field Order-<iefinition of ..,.....',.,.,..........,....., I
Field Order-issued by Engineer ................ 3.5.1. 9,5
Final Application for Payment,...................... 14.12
Final Inspection ...........,..................,...... 14.11
Final Payment and Acceptance ...................... 14.13
Final Payment. Recommendation of ,.......... 14.13-14.14
I
I
General Provisions "..,.......,................. 17,3...Ii,4
General Requiremenls-definition of.. ,..... ........... .. I
General Requiremenls-principal
references to ,..",.,.,......, 2.6. 4.4. 6.4. 6.0-6.7, 6.23
I
I
~
I
I
I
Giving Notice .................................. ,':,... 17.1
Guarantee of Work-by Contractor................... 13.1
I
lndemnification . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .... .... ... 6.30-6.32. 7.5
Inspection. Final .................................... 14.11
Inspection. Tests and ................................. 13.3
Insurance. Bonds and-in general ....................... 5
Insurance. Certificates of ........................... 2.7.5
lnsurance-compleled operations, , . . . , . . .... . , . . . . . . .. 5.3
Insurance. Contractor's Liability ,........,............ 5.3
Insurance. Contractual'Liability .....,................. 5.4
Insurance.Owner's Liability .......................... 5.5
Insurance. Property........,......,..,.........., 5.6-5.13
Insurance-Waiver of Rights ......................... 5,11
Intent of Contract Documents..,..., ,...,....... 3.3.9.14
Interpretations and Claritications ...................... 9.4
Investigations of physical conditions. .................. 4.2
1
I
I
I
Labor. Materials and Equipment ,...,....,........ 6.3-6.5
Laws and Regulations--detinition of ..................." 1
Laws and Regulations-general. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6.14
Liability Insurance-Contractor's ,.................... 5.3
Liability Insurance-Owner's ..,.......,..,.........., 5,5
Liens--detinitions of ..,............................. 14.2
Limitations on Engineer's
Responsibilities ..................... 6.6.9.11. 9,13...9.16
I
I
Materials and equipment-furnished by Contractor ,.., 6.3
Materials and equipment-not '
incorporated in Work .............................. 14.2
Materials or equipment-equivalent .....,.....",..... 6.7
Miscellaneous Provisions ...................".......... 17
Multi-prime contracts ...,............................... i
I
I
Notice. Giving of, .................................... 17.1
Notice of Acceptability of Project ...,............... 14.13
Notice of A ward-detinition of ,...........:............. 1
Notice to Proceed-detinition of ., , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . ., 1
Notice to Proceed-giving of ...........:......... H ... ~.J
I
I
"Or...Equal" Items..................................... 6. i
Other contractors ..,.,.,.......,............,.........., i
Other work ..., , . , , . . , . . . . . , , . . . . , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. i
Overtime Work-prohibition of . ...... ., . ,........ .. ... 6.3
Owner-detinition of ,.',.,....,......................... 1
Owner May Correct Defecri\'e Work.,..........,.... 13.14
Owner May Stop Work, , .......,.....,.........., .,. 13.10
Owner May Suspend Work. Terminate .......... 15.1-15A
Owner's Duty to Execute Change Orders .... ~. . . . . . ., 11.8
Owner's Liability Insurance ........................... 5.5
, Owner's Represeruative-Engineer to serve as ...,:,., 9,1
Owner's Responsibilities-in general .............,....,. 8
Owner's Separate Representative at site ..........,....' 9.3
I
I
I
Partial Utilization ".,..,...,.........,............. 14.10
Partial Utilization-definition of ..........,'.......,..... I
Partial U tilization-Propeny Insurance ,.............. 5,15
Patent Fees and Royalties ",........................, 6. I:!
Payments. Recommendation of ...."....' 14.4-14.7. 14.13
Payments to C0ntractor-in general ,.................'. 14
I
I
I
Payments to Con-tracto'r-when due ....,...... 14.4. 14.13
Payments to Contractor-withholding ,............... 14.7
Performance and other Bonds ..................... 5.1...5.2
Permits ....... . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6.13
Physical Conditions .,................................. 4.2
Physical Conditions-Engineer's review............. 4.2.4
Physical Conditions-<:xisting structures ...,......... 4.2.2
Physical Conditions-<:xplorations and reportS. .. . . .. 4.2,1
Physical Conditions-possible document change ..... 4.2.?
Physical Conditions-price and time adjustments '... 4.2.5
Physical Conditions-report of differing ..."........ 4,2.3
Physical Conditions-Underground Facilities.......... 4.3
Preconstruction Conference ,........,.,............... 2.8
Preliminary Matters ..........................,.......... :!
Premises. Use of .,.....,..,..................... 6.16-6.18
Price. Change of Contract .............................. II
Price-Contract-definition of ....,......,................ I
Progress Payment. Applications for. ,........,......., 14.2
Progress Payment-retainage .,.,..................... 14.2
Progress schedule .,.,........... 2.6.2.9,6.6.6.29. 15.2.6
Project-<iefinition of ...,................................ I
Project Representation-provision for ....,............ 9.3
Project Representative. Resident-<iefinition of ,........' 1
Project. Starting the ,..,..,.,........................,. ~.4
Propeny Insurance.................,............. 5.6-5.13
Propeny Insurance-Partial Utilization ....,.......... 5.15
Property Insurance-Receipt and Application
of Proceeds........,.......................... 5,12-5.13
Protection. Safety and........................... 6.20-6.21
Punch list ...............................,...,....... 14.11 '
Recommendation of Payment.................. 14.4. 14.13
Record Documents ....:.............................. 6.19
Reference Points,.....,............................... 4.4
Regulations. Laws and ...,.:....,.................... 6.14
Rejecting Defective Work .................,........... 9,6
Related Work at Site .............................. 7.1-7.3
Remedies Not Exclusive ............................. 17.4
Removal or Correction of Defective Work .....,.,... 13.1)
Resident Project Representative-definition of ........... 1
Resident Project Representative-provision for........ 9.3
Responsibilities. Contractor's-in general ............... 6
Responsibilities. Engineer's-in general ................. 9
Responsibilities. Owner's-in general,.,.......",.....,. 8
Retainage ..,......................................... 14,2
Reuse of Documents .................................. 3.5
Rights of Way ..................,...................... 4. I
Royalties. Patent Fees and ,.......................... 6.12
SafetyandProtection....... 6.20-6.21, 18.1-18.2
Samples ,...,.......... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . .. 6.13-6,28
Schedule of progress .,...... 2.6. 2.8...2.9. 6.6. 6.19. 15.2.6
Schedule of Shop Drawing
submissions...................... 2.6.2.8-2,9.6.13. 14.1
Schedule of values ...................... ~.6. 2.8...2.9. 14.1
Schedules. Finalizing. ,..... ....... ......... .......,. " 2.9
Shop Drawings and Samples. , . . . . . , . . . . . , . , . . . ., 6.23...6.28
Shop Drawings--detinition of .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . : . ... .. .. , .. 1
Shop Drawings. use to approve
substitutions ...................................... 6.7.3
5
Site. Visits to-by Engineer ........................... 9.2
Specifications-definition of .............,.......,....... 1
Staning Construction. Before... . . . . . .. . , . . . . ... . .. 2.5-2.8
Staning the Project ...................,................ 2.4
Stopping Work-by Contractor....................... 15.5
Stopping Work-by Owner.......... ...... .......... 13.10
Subcontractor~efinition of ............."........,..... I
Subcontractors--in general .....................,. 6.8-6.11
Subcontracts--required provisions ............5.11.1. 6.11
11.4.3
Substantial Completioo--<ertification of ........... '... 14.8
Substantial Comp1etio~efinition of . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. I
Substitute or "Or-Equal" Items _."................... 6.7
Subsurface Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . , . . ., 4.2-4.3
Supplemental costs ........"....................... 11.4.5
Supplementary Conditions-definition of .,.............. I
Supplementary Conditions-principal
references to .. 2.2.4.2.5.1. 5.3. 5,6-5.8. 6.3. 6.13. 6.23.
7.4.9,3
Supplementing Contract Documents ,....."....... 3.4-3.5
Supplier-definition of , . . , . . . . . , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . , , . . . . ., I
Supplier-principal references to ... 3.6,6.5.6.7-6.9.6,20.
6.24.9.13.9.16.11.8.13.4.14.12
Surety-<:onsent to payment.................. 14.12. 14.14
Surety-Engineer has no duty to ..................... 9.13
Surety-notice to ......,................,.. 10.1. 10.5. 15.2
Surety-qualification of ........................... 5.1-5.2
Suspending Work. by Owner ,........................ 15.1
Suspension of Work and Tennination--in general....... 15
Superintendent-Contractor"s ,........................ 6.2
Supervision and Superintendence. , . _ . . , . . . . , . . . . .. 6.] -6.2
Taxes-Payment by Contractor, .. .................... 6.15
Tennination-by Contractor,.,........,.......,...... 15.5
Tennination-by Owner,.""""..........."" 15.2-15.4
Tennmation. Suspension of Work and-in general ."... 15
Tests and Inspections ."",.,.,...........,....' 13.3-13.7
Time. Change of Contract ,..,...........,.,.........,.. 12
I
Time. Computation of ........,....................... 17.2
Time. Contract-definition of ..... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. I
I
U ncovering Work ...................,........... 13 .8-13 .9
Underground Facilities-definition of ................,... 1
Underground Facilities-not shown or indicated...., 4.3.2
Underground Facilities-protection of ........... 4.3.6.20
Underground Facilities-shown or indicated......... 4.3.1
Unit Price Work-definition of .......................... 1
Unit Price Work-general ................. 11.9, 14.1. 14.5
Unit Prices............................,..........., 11.3.1
Unit Prices. Detenninations for............... ........ 9.10
Use of Premises................................. 6.16-6.]8
Utility owners ,..,......,............... 6.13. 6.20. 7.2-7.3
I
I
I
1<
Values. Schedule of ......................... 2.6.2.9, 14.1
Variations in Work-Authorized..........,. 6.25.6.27,9.5
Visits to Site-by Engineer............................ 9.2
I
Waiver of C1aims-on Final Payment................ 14,16,
Waiver of Rights by insured parties............. 5.10. 6.11
Warranty and Guarantee-by Contractor..,.......... 13.1
Warranty of Title. Contractor's ..............,...,.... ]4.3
Work. Access to ,.................................... 13.2
Work-by others ........,.,.........,....,...........,.. 7
Work Continuing During Disputes .................... 6.29
Work. Cost of ................................... 11.4-11.5
Work--<iefinition of ..................................... 1
Work Directive Change-definition of ,......".......". 1
Work Directive Change-principal
references to ............................3.4.3,10.1...10.2
Work, Neglected by Contractor ...........,..,...... 13.14
Work. Stopping by Contractor,................ ....... 15.5
Work. Stopping by Owner... ............... , .... 15.1-15,4
Written Amendmenl-definition of "...,......,......." 1
Written Amendment-principal
references to ...,..,..".......... 3,4.1.10.1.11.2,12.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.. "i-.r
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE I-DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other
Contract Documents the following terms have the meanings
indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural
thereof:
Addenda-Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the
opening of Bids which clarify. correct or change the, bidding
documents or [he Contract Documents.
.4l/reeJ11('I/I- The wrillen agreement between OWN ER and
CONTR.-\CTOR covering the Work to be performed: other
Contract Documents are allached to [he Agreement and made
a part thereof as provided therein,
.4ppli('{uill/l J()r Panl1e/lt- The form accepted by ENGI-
.'JEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting
progress or tinal payments and which is to include such sup-
porting documentation as IS required by the Contract
Documents,
Bid-The offer or proposal of [he bidder submitted on the
prescribed form selling forth the prices for [he Work to be
performed,
BO/lds-Bid. performance and payment bonds and other
instruments of security,
Change Order-A document recommended by ENGINEER.
which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and autho-
rizes an addition. deletion or revision in the Work. or an
adjustment in the Contract Price or [he Contract Time. issued
on or after the Effecti\'e Date of the A.greement.
CUfl(raCf DIICI//IIeIlfS- The Agreement. Addenda I which per-
tain to the Contract Dllcuments!. CONTRACTOR's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-
Bid documentation submilled prior to the Notice of Award)
when allached as an exhibit to the Agreement. the Bonds.
these General Cllnditions. the Supplementary Conditions, the
Specifications and the Drawings as (he same are more spe-
cifically identified in the ,-\greement. (ogether with all amend-
ments. modifications and supplements issued pursuant to
paragraphs 3A and 3,5 \In or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement ,
Contract Pric('- The moneys payable by OWNER to CON-
TRACTOR under the Contract Documents as stated in the
Agreement (subject to (he provisions of paragraph 11,9, I in
the Case of Unit Price Work!.
CO/lt/'(/('r Ti/ll('- The number of days (computed as provided
in paragraph 1 i ,2) or the date stated in the Agreement for the
compktion of the Work,
CONTR,4CTOR- The person. firm or corpor.ilion with whom
OWN ER has entered into the Agreement.
defectil'e-An adjective which when modifying the word Work
refers to Work that is unsatisfactory. faulty or .I!eficient. or
does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not
meet the requirements of any inspection. reference standard.
test or approval referred to in the Contract Ddcuments. or
has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recommendation
of final payment I unless responsibility for the protection thereof
has been assumed by, OWNER at Substantial Completion in
accordance with paragraph 14,8 or 14,10\.
Drall'ings- The drawings which show (he character and scope
of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared
or approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in (he Con-
tract Documents,
Effectil'e Date IIf the Agreeme/lt- The date indicated in the
Agreement on which it becomes eifective. but if no such date
is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is
signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and
deliver,
E.VGINEER- The person. firm or corporal ion named as such
in the Agreement.
Field Order-A written order issued by ENGINEER which
orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with para-
graph 9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Contract
Price or the Contract Time.
Gener-al Requiremellfs-Sections of Division 1 of the Speci-
fications.
Lall's and Regulations: Lall's or Regulations-Laws. rules,
regulations. ordinances. codes and/or orders.
Norice of .4. II'ord- The written notice by OWNER to the
apparent successful bidder stating that upon compliance by
the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent
enumerated therein. within the time specified. OWNER will
sign and deliver the Agreement.
SOfiee (0 Proceed-A wrinen notice given by OWNER 10
CONTRACTOR (Wllh a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the dale
on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on
which CONTRACTOR shall start to ~erform CONTRAC-
TOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents.
OWNER-The public body or authority. corporation. asso...
ciation. firm or person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered
into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided,
Partial Utili:.micJ//-Placing a portion of the Work in service
for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose)
before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work.
Project-The total construction of which the Work, (0 be
provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole.
or apart as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Residellf Pr";t'('t RC'pre,H'l/fatil'e-The authorized rep'resen-
tative of E;.JGINEER who is assigned to the site or any part
thereof.
7
Shop Drawings-All drawings. diagrams, illustrations.
schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by
or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work
and all illustrations. brochures. standard schedules, perfor-
mance chans. instructions. diagrams and other information
prepared by a Supplier and submitted by CONTRACTOR to
illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work,
Specifications-Those portions of the Contract Documents
consisting of written technical descriptions of materia,ls.
equipment. const!'uction systems. standards and workman...
ship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details
applicable thereto.
Subcontractor-An individual. finn or corporation having li.
direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Sub-
contractor for the performance of a pan of the Work at the
site.
Substantial Completion- The Work (or a specified pan thereoO
has progressed to the point where. in the opinion of ENGI-
NEER as evidenced by ENGINEER's definitive certificate
of Substantial Completion. it is sufficiently complete. in
accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work
(or specified pan) can be utilized for the purposes for which
it is intended: or if there be no such certificate issued. when
final payment is due in accordance with paragraph 14.13. The
terms "substantialiy complete" and "substantially com...
pleted" as applied to any Work refer to Substantial Comple-
tion thereof.
Supplemenrary Conditions-The part of the Contract Docu-
ments which amends or supplements these General Condi-
tions.
Supplier-A manufacturer. fabricator. supplier, distributor.
materialman or vendor,
Underground Facilities-All pipelines. conduits. ducts. cables,
wires. manholes. vaults. tanks. tunnels or other such facilities
or attachments. and any encasements containing such"facil...
ities which have been installed underground to furnish any of
the following services or materials: electricity, gases. steam.
liquid petroleum products. telephone or other communica-
tions, cable television. sewage and drainage removal. traffic
or other control systems or water.
Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit
pnces,
Work-The entire completed construction or the various sep-
arately identifiable pans thereof required to be furnished
under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of per-
forming services. furnishing labor and furnishing and incor...
porating materials and equipment into the construction. all
as required by the Contract Documents.
Work Directive Change-A written directive to CONTRAC-
TOR. issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER.
I
ordering an addition. deletion or revision in the Work. or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under
whicn the Work is to be performed as provided in paragraph
4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.22, A Work
Directive Change may not change the Contract Price or the
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that
the change. directed or documented by a Work Directive
Change will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change
Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect. if
any. on the Contract. Price ,or Contract Time as provided in
paragraph 10...2,
I
I
I
I
Wrirren Amendment-A written amendment of the Contract
Documents. signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or ,
after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally deal-
ing with the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly
Work...related aspects of the Contract Documents.
I.
I
ARTICLE 2-PRELIMINARY MAITERS
I
Delivery' of Bonds:
:2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agree-
ments to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to
OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to
furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1.
I
Copies of Docum~lIlS:
2.2. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten
copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Con...
ditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably nec...
essary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will
be furnished. upon request. at the cost of reproduction.
I
I
I
Commencement of Contract Time: Notice to Proceed:
:!.3. The Contract Time will commence 10 run on the
thinieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement. or. if
a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the
Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any
time within thirty days after the Effective Dale of the Agree-
ment, In no event will the Contract Time commence to run
later than the seventy-fifth day after the day of Bid opening
or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
whichever date is earlier.
I
I
I
Suuring the Project:
2.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perfonn the Work on
the date when the Contract Time commences to run, but no
Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the
Contract Time commences to run.
I
I
Before Suuring Construction:
:2.5. Before undertaking each pan of the Work, CON-
TRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract
Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown
I
8
I
I
\, .~; l<! ,
I
thereon and all applicable tield measurements, CONTRAC-
TOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any
contlict. error or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may
discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarifi-
cation from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work
affected thereby: however. CONTRACTOR shall not be lia-
ble to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any
contlict. error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents.
unless CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
I
I
I
:::.6, Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agree-
ment (unless otherwise specified in the General Require-
mentsJ. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
I
review:
2,6.1, an estimated progress schedule indicating the
starting and completion dates of the various stages of the
Work:
I
I
:::,6,:::, a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing sub-
missions: and
I
:::,6,3, :l preliminary schedule of values for all of the
Work which will include quantities and prices of items
aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work
into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the
basis for progress payments during construction. Such
prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and
profit applicable to each item of Work which will be con-
firmed in writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of sub-
mISSIon,
I
I
:::.7, Before any Work at the site is started. CONTRAC-
TOR shall deliver to OWNER. with a copy to ENGINEER,
certificates I and other evidence ot insurance requested by
OWNER) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and
maintain in accordance wllh paragraphs ),3 and 5.4, and
OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR certificates land
other evidence of insurance requested by CONTRACTOR)
which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain in
accordance with paragraphs 5,6 and 5,7, ,
I
I
I
Preconsrrucrioll Conference:
:::,8, Within (wentv days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. but before CONTRACTOR stam the Work at
the site. a conference attended by CONTRACTOR. ENGI-
NEER and l)thc:rs as appropriate will be held to discuss the
schedules referred to in paragraph 2.6. to discuss procedures
for handling Shop Drawings and other submitlals and for
processing Applications for Payment. and to establish a working
understanding among the parties as to the Work,
I
I
I
Finali:.ing Schedules:
2.9, At least ten dBvs before submission of the: first Appli-
cation for Pa\ment a conference attended by CONTRAC-
TOR. ENGINEER and others as appropriate will be held to
finalize: the: ,..:hedules submitted in accordance: \\'ith para-
I
I
graph ::::6, The finalized progress schedule will be acceptable
te ENGINEER as providing an orderly progression of the
Work to completion within the Contract Time. but such
acceptance will neither impose on ENGINEER responsibility
for the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve CON-
TRACTOR from full responsibility therefor. The finalized
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions will be acceptable to
ENGINEER as pro~iding a workable arrangement for pro-
cessing the submissions. The finalized schedule ot values will
be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance,
ARTICLE 3-CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTE:--JT.
AMENDING. REUSE
I men!:
3.1, The Contract Documents comprise the entire agree-
ment between O\\'NER and CONTRACTOR concerning the
Work. The Contract Documents are complementary: what is
called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The
Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with
the law of the place of the Project.
3.~, It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe
a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be con-
structed in accordance with the Contract Documents, :\ny
Work. materiais or equipment that may reasonably be inferred
from the Contract Documents as being required to produce
the intended result will be supplied whether or not specifically
called for. When words which have a well...known technical
or trade meaning are used to describe Work. materials or
equipment such words shall be interpreted in accordance with
that meaning. Reference to standard specifications. manuals
or codes of any technical society, organization or association.
or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication. shall
mean the latest standard specification. manual. code or Laws
or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or, on
the Effective Dale of lhe Agreemen( if lhere were no Bidsl.
except as may be otherwise specifically stated. However. no
provision of any referenced standard specification. manual
or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference
in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the
duties and responsibilities of OWNER. CONTRACTOR or
ENGINEER, or any of their consuitants. agents or employ-
ees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. nor shall
, it be effective to <\ssign to ENGINEER. or any of ENGI-
NEER's consultants, agents or employees. any dUlY or
authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance
of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsi-
bility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9,15 or 9,16,
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents
,hall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 9,4,
3.3, If. during the performance of the Work. CONTRAC-
TOR tinds a conflict. error or discrepancy in the' Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall so report to ENGINEER
in writing at once and before proceeding with the Work atTected
thereby shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification
9
from ENGINEER: however, CONTRACTOR shall not be
liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any
conflict. error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents
unless CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof,
Amending and Suppumellling Contr<<t DocumenlS:
3.4. The Contract Documents may be amended to pro-
vide for additions. deletions and revisions in the Work ono
modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of
the following ways:
3.4.1. a formal Written Amendment.
3.4.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4).
or
3.4.3, a Work Directive Change (pursuant to para-
graph 10.1),
As indicated in paragraphs 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price and
Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order or a
Written Amendment.
3,5. In addition. the requirements of the Contract Docu-
ments may be supplemented. and minor vaiiations and devia-
tions in the Work may be authorized. in one or more of the
following ways:
3.5.1. a Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5).
3.5.2. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or
sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or
3.5,3, ENGINEER's written interpretation or clarifi-
cation (pursuant to paragraph 9,4).
Reuse of Documents:
3.6. Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or
Supplier or other person or organization performing or fur-
n~shing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract
with OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership
rights in any of the Drawings. Specifications or other docu...
ments (or copies of any thereoO prepared by or bearing the
seal of ENGINEER: and they shall not reuse any of them on
extensions of the Project or any other project without written
, consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written
verification or adaptation by ENGINEER,
ARTICLE 4-A Y AILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS: REFERENCE POINTS
A lIaiUzhility of Lilnds:
4. I. OWNER shall furnish. as indicated in the Contract
Documents. the lands upon which the Work is to be per-
formed. rights-of-way and easements for access thereto. and
I
, .
such other lands which are designated for the use of CON...
TRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or penna...
nent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid
for by OWNER. unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in
OWNER's furnishing these lands. rights-of-way or ease-
ments entitles CONTRACTOR to an extension of the Con...
tract Time. CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as
provided in Article 12. CONTRACTOR shalL provide for all
additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and
equipment.
I
I
I
I
Physical Conditions:
4.2.1. Explorations and Reports: Reference is made
to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions
at the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in prep...
aration of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may
rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in
such reports. but not upon nontechnical data. interpreta...
tions or opinions contained therein or for the completeness
thereof for CONTRACTOR's purposes, Except as indi...
cated in the immediately preceding sentence and in para-
graph 4.2.6. CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
with respect to subsurface conditions at the site.
I.
I
I.
I
4.2.2. Existing Structures: Reference is made to the
Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing
surface and subsurface structures (except Underground
Facilities referred to in paragraph 4.3) which are at or
contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGI...
NEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. CON...
TRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings. but not for the complete-
ness thereof for CONTRACTOR's purt'oses. Except as
indicated in .the immediately preceding sentence and in
paragraph 4.2.6. CONTRACTOR shall have full respon...
sibility with respect to physical,conditions in or re'lating
to such structures,
I
I
I
I
4.2.3, Report of Differing Conditions: If CONTRAC...
TOR believes that:
I
4.2.3.1. any technical data on which CONTRAC-
TOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraphs 4.2. I
and 4.2.2 is inaccurate. or
I
4.2.3.2. any physical condition uncovered or
revealed at the site differs materially from that indi-
cated. reflected or referred to in the Contract Docu...
ments.
I
CONTRACTOR shall. promptly after becoming aware
thereof and before performing any Work in connection
therewith (except in an emergency as permitted by para-
graph 6.22). notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing
about the inaccuracy or difference, '
I
1
10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4,2,4, ENGINEER's Rel'iell': ENGINEER will
promptly review the pertinent conditions. determine the
necessity of obtaining additional explorations or tests with
respect thereto and advise OWN ER in writing I with a copy
to CONTRACTOR> of ENGINEER's findings and con-
clusions,
4,2.5. Possible Docllment Chan,f!e: If ENGINEER
concludes that there is a material error in the Contract
Documents or that because of newly discovered condi-
[ions a change in the Contract Documents is required. a
Work Directive Change or a Change Order will be issued
as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the
consequences of the inaccuracy or difference,
4,2,6, Possible Price {/nd Till//' Adjll.HlI/ell1s: In each
such case, an increase or decrease in the Contract Price
or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time. or any
combination thereof. will be allowable to the extent that
they are anributable to any such inaccuracy or difference.
If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable [0 agree as to
the amount or length thereof. a claim may be made therefor
as provided in Articles II and 12,
Physical Condilions-Cnderground Facilities:
4,],1, Shown or Indicated: The information and data
shC'Nn or indicated in the Contmct Documents with respect
to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the
site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER
or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facil.
ities or by others, Unless it is otherwise expressly pro-
vided in the Supplementary Conditions:
4,],1,\, OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be
responsible for the accuracv or completeness of any
such information or data: and.
4,],1.2, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsi-
bility for reviewing and checking all such information
and data. for locating all Underground Facilities shown
or indicated in the Contract Documents, for coordina...
tion of the Work with the owners of such Underground
Facilities during construction. for the safety and pro-
tection thereof as provided in paragraph 6.20 and
repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.
the cost of all of which will be considered as having
been included in the Contract Price,
",],2, ,vtlt Sholl'/I or Indicated. If an Underground
Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the
site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents and which CONTRACTOR could nOI reason-
ably have been expected to be aware of. CONTRACTOR
shall. promptly after becoming aware thereof and before
performing any Work affected thereby (eXCepl in an emer-
gency as permitled hy paragraph 6,22>. identify the owner
of such Underground Facility and give written notice thereof
to that owner and III OWNER and ENGINEER, ENGI...
NEER will promptl~' review the Underground Facility to
determine the extent to which the Contract Documents
should be modified to refiect and document the conse.
quences of the existence of the Underground Facility, and
the Contract Documents will be amended or supplemented
to the extent necessary. During such time. CONTRAC.
TOR shall be responsible fnr lhe safety and protection of
such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 6,20,
CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Con.
tract Price or an extension of the Contract Time. or both.
to the extent that they are allributable to the existence of
any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents and which CONTRACTOR
could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of,
If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length
thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as
provided in Articles II and 12,
Reference Points:
4.4, OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to estab-
lish reference points for construction which in ENGIN EER' s
judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed
with the Work, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for lay-
ing out the Work (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements). shall protect and preserve the established
reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
without the prior written app"roval of OWNER, CONTRAC.
TOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference
point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of
necessary changes in grades or locations. and shall be respon-
sible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such ref.
erence points by professionally qualified personnel.
.-\RTICLE 5-BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance and Other Bonds:
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and pay-
ment Bonds. each in an amount at least equal 10 lhe COnlract
Price as security for the faithful pert'ormance and payment of
all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Docu-
ments, These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one
year after the date when final payment becomes due. except
as otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Con-
tract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such
other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Cmdi...
tions, All Bonds shall be in the forms prescribed by Law or
Regulation or by the Contract Documents and be executed
by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Com-
panies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sure-
ties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Com-
panies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit
Staff Bureau of Accounts. U.S. Treasury Department. All
Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a cenified
copy of the authority to act.
5.2, If the surety on any Bond furnished by CON~R.-\C-
TOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right
(0 do business is terminated in any state where any part of
II
the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements
of paragraph 5.1. CONTRACTOR shall within five days
thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety. both of which
must be acceptable to OWNER.
Contractor's Liability Insurance:
5.3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such
comprehensive general liability and other insurance as is
appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and
as will provide protection from claims set forth below which
may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's perfor-
mance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's
other obligations under the Contract Documents. whether it
is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR. by any
Subcontractor, by anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work. or by
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
5.3.1. Claims under workers' or workmen's compen-
sation. disability benefits and other similar employee ben-
efit acts:
5.3.:. Claims for damages because of bodily injulj'.
occupational sickness or disease. or death of CONTRAC-
TOR's employees:
5.3.3, Claims for damages because of bodily injulj',
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
CONTRACTOR's employees;
5,3.4, Claims for damages insured by personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained tal by any person
as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to
the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR. or
(bl by any other person for any other reason:
5,3,5, Claims for damages. other than to the Work
itself. because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop...
erty wherever located. including loss of use resulting
therefrom;
5.3.6. Claims arising out of operation of Laws or Reg-
ulations for damages because of bodily injury or death of
any person or for damage 10 property; and
5.3.7. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or
death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
The insurance required by this paragraph 5,3 shall include
the specific coverages and be written for not less than the
limits of liability and coverages provided in the Supplemen-
tary Conditions, or required by law. whichever is greater.
The comprehensive general liability insurance shall include
completed operations insurance. All of the policies of insur-
ance so required to be purChased and maintained (or the
certificates or other evidence thereoO shall contain a provi...
sion or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be
cancelled. materially changed or renewal refused until at least
I
thirty days' prior written notice has been given to OWNER
and ENGINEER by certified mail. All such insurance shall
remain in effect until final payment and at all times thereafter
when CONTRACTOR may be correcting. removing or
replacingdefecr;ve Work in accordance with paragraph 13.12.
In addition. CONTRACTOR shall maintain such completed
operations insurance for at least twO years after final payment
and furnish OWNER with evidence of continuation of such
insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.
I
I
I
ColW"GCtUlll Liability Insurance:
5.4. The comprehensive general liability insurance required
by paragraph 5.3 will include contractual liability insurance
applicable to CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraphs
6.30 and 6.31.
I
I.
Owner's Liability Insurance:
5.5. OWNER shall be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining OWNER's own liability insurance and, at
OWNER's option. may purchase and maintain such insur...
ance as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise
from operations under the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
Property Insurance:
5.6. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property
insurance upon the Work at the site to the full insurable value
thereof {subject to such deductible amounts as may be pro-
vided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws
and Regulationsl. This insurance shall include the interests
of OWNER. CONTRACTOR. Subcontractors. ENGINEER
and ENGINEER's consultants in the Work. all of whom shall
be listed as insureds or additional insured parties. shall insure
against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall
include "all risl.;" insurance for physical loss and damage
including thefL vandalism and malicious mischief. collapse
and water damage, and such other perils as may be provided
in the Supplementary Conditions. and shall include damages.
losses and expenses arising out of or resulting from any insured
loss or incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured
property (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionalsl. If
not covered under the .. all risk" insurance or otherwise pro-
vided in the Supplementary Conditions. CONTRACTOR shall
purchase and maintain similar property insurance on portions
of the Work stored on and off the site or in transit when such
portions of the Work are to be included in an Application for
Payment.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.7, OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and
machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may
be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and
Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER.
CONTRACTOR. Subcontractors. ENGINEER AND
ENGlNEER's consultants in the Work. all of whom shall be
listed as insured or additional insured parties.
I
I
12
I
I
.~~,;
I
5.8. All the policies of insurance (or the certificates or
other evidence thereot) required to be purchased and main-
tained by OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and
5.7 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage
afforded will not be cancelled or materially changed or renewal
refused until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been
given to CONTRACTOR by certified mail and will contain
waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph 5. J 1.2,
I
I
I
5.9, OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining any property insurance to protect the intefe;:sts
of CONTRACTOR. Subcontractors or others in the Work to
the extent of any deductible amounts that are provided in the
Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within the
deductible amount. will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Sub...
contractor or others suffering any such loss and if any of them
, wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such
amounts. each may purchase and maintain it at the purchas-
er's own expense,
I
I
I
5,10, If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other
special insurance be included in the property insurance pol-
icy. OWNER shall, if possible. include such insurance, and
the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appro-
priate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to com-
mencement of the Work at the site. OWNER shall in writing
advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance
has been procured by OWNER.
I
I
Waiver of Rights:
5,11.1. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights
against each other for all losses and damages caused by
any of the perils covered by the policies of insurance
provided in response to paragraphs 5,6 and 5, i and any
other propeny insurance applicable to the Work. and also
waive all such rights against the Subcontractors. ENGI-
NEER. ENGINEER's consultants and all other panies
named as insureds in such policies for losses and damages
so caused, .-\s required by paragraph 6,1 l. each subcon-
tract between CONTRACTOR and a Subcontractor will
contain similar waiver provisions by the Subcontractor in
favorofOWNER. CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER. ENGI-
N EER' s consultants and all other parties named as insureds,
None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that
any of the insured parties may have to the proceeds of
insurance held by OWNER as trustee or otherwise pay-
able under any policy so issued.
I
I
I
I
I
5,11.2, OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that any
policies provided in response to paragraphs 5,6 and 5,7
shall protect all of the parties insured and provide primary
coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils
co\'ered thereby, Accordingly. all such policies shall con-
tain prOVisions to the dTect that in the event 01 payment
01' any loss 0r damage the insurer will have n0 rights l11
reco\'ery against any 0f the parties named as insureds 0r
additional insureds, and if the insurers require separate
waiver forms to be signed by ENGINEER or ENGI-
NEER's Cllnsullant OWNER will obtain the same. and if
I
I
I
I
such waiver forms are required of any Subcontractor.
CONTRACTOR will obtain the same.
Receipt and Applicarion of Proceeds:
5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance
required by paragraphs 5,6 and 5.7 will be adjusted wi,th
OWNER' and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the
insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the require-
ments of any appli~able mortgage clause and of ,paragraph
5.13, OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money
so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such
agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other
special agreement is reached the damaged Work shall be
repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on
account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered
by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment.
5.13. OWNER as trustee shall have power to adjust and
settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within fifteen days after' the
occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If
such objection be made. OWNER as trustee shall make set...
tlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement
as the parties in interest may reach. If required in writing by
any party in interest. OWNER as trustee shall. upon the
occurrence of an insured loss. give bond for the proper per-
formance of such duties,
Acceptance of Insurance:
5.14. IrOWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded
by or other provisions of the insurance reqcired to be pur-
chased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance
with paragraphs 5,3 and 5.4 on the basis of its not complying
with the Contract Documents, OWNER shall notify CON-
TRACTOR in writing thereof within ten days of the date of
delivery of such certificates to OWNER in accordance with
paragraph 2,7, If CONTRACTOR has any objection to the
coverage afforded by or other provisions of the policies of
insurance required to be purchased and maintained by OWNER
in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 on the basis of
their not, complying with the Contract Documents, CON...
TRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing thereof within ten
days of the date of delivery of such certificates to CON-
TRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 2,7, OWNER and
CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such addi-
tional information in respect of insurance provided by each
as the other may reasonably request. Failure by OWNER or
CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of objection within
the time provided shall constitute acceptance of such insur-
ance purchased by the other as complying with the Contract
Documents,
Parrilli Utili:.Jltion-Properry Insurance:
5,15, If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a
portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Comple-
tion of all the Work. such use or occupancy may be accom-
plished in accordance with paragraph 14.10; provided that no
13
such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers
provIding the propeny insurance have acknowledged notice
thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage neces-
sitated thereby. The insurers providing the propeny insur-
ance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies,
but the propeny insurance shall not be cancelled or lapse on
account of any such panial use or occupancy.
ARTICLE &-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Supervision and Su~rinlendence:
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work
competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto
and applying such skills and expenise as may be necessary
to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Doc-
uments. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the
means. methods. techniques. sequences and procedures of
construction. but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible
for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a
specific means. method. technique, sequence or procedure
of construction which is indicated in and required by the
Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the
Contra;:t Documents.
6.:. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times
during its progress a competent resident superintendent. who
shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and
ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The
superintendent will be CONTRACTOR' s representative at
the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CON-
TRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent
shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR.
Labor. MaJerials and Equipment:
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent. suitably
qualified personnel to survey and layout the Work and per-
form construction as required by the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline
and order at the site. Except in connection with the safety or
protection of persons or the Work or propeny at the site or
adjacent thereto. and except as otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents. all Work at the site shall be performed
during regular working hours. and CONTRACTOR will not
permit ovenlme work or the performance of Work on Sat-
urday. Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's writ-
ten consent given after prior wntten notice to ENGINEER.
6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General Require-
ments. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume full respon-
sibility for all materials. equipment. labor. transportation,
construction equipment and machinery. tools. appliances.
fuel. power. light. heat. telephone. water. sanitary facilities.
temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals
necessary for the furnishing. performance. testing. stan-up
and completion of the Work.
I
6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality
and new. except as otherwise provided in the Contract Doc-
uments. If required by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall
furnish satisfactory evidence (including repons of required
tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
All materials and equipment shall be applied. installed. con-
nected. erected. used. cleaned and conditioned in accordance
with the instructions of the applicable Supplier except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: but no pro-
vision of any such instructions will be effective to assign to
ENGINEER. or any of ENGINEER's consultants. agents or
employees. any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or author-
ity to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of
paragraph 9.150r 9.16.
I
I
I
I
I.
AdjllSting Progress Schedule:
6.6. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph :.9) adjust-
ments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereon
of new developments: these win conform generally to the
progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply
with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable
thereto.
1
I
I
Substitutes or "Or-EqUDl" Items:
6.7.1. Whenever materials or equipment are specified
or described in the Contract Documents by using the name
of a proprietary item or the name of a panicular Supplier
the naming of the item is intended to establish the type.
function and quality required. Unless the name is followed
by words indicating that no substitution is permitted.
materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted
by ENGINEER if sufficient information is submitted by
CONTRACTOR to allow ENGINEER to determine that
the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal
to that named. The procedure for review by ENGINEER
will include the following as supplemented in the General
Requirements. Requests for review of substitute items of
material and equipment will not be accepted by ENGI-
NEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If CON-
TRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of
material or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall make writ-
ten application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof.
cenifying that the proposed substitute will perform ade-
quately the functions and achieve the results called for by
the general design. be similar and of equal substance to
that specified and be suited to the same use as that spec-
ified. The application will state that the evaluation and
acceptance of the proposed substitute will not prejudice
CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Comple-
tion on time. whether or not acceptance of the substitute
for use in the Work will require a change in any of the
Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other
direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to
. adapt the design to the proposed substitute and whether
or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection
with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
14
I
I
I
royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute from that
specified will be identified in the application and available
maintenance. repair and replacement service will be indi-
cated. The application will also contain an itemized esti-
mate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from
acceptance of such substitute. including costs of redesign
and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting
change. all of which shall be considered by ENGINEER
" in evaluating the proposed substitute. ENGINEER may
require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's
expense' additional data about the proposed substitute.
I
I
'1
6. i.:. If a specific means. method. technique. sequence
or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by
the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may t"urnish or
utilize a substitute means. method. sequence. technique
or procedure of construction acceptable to ENGINEER.
if CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to allow
ENGINEER to determine that the substitute proposed is
equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract
Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER
will be similar to that provided in paragraph 6.7.1 as applied
by ENGINEER and as may be supplemented in the Gen-
eral Requirements.
I
I
I
I
6.7.3. ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time
within which to evaluate each proposed substitute. ENGI-
NEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. and no
substitute will be ordered. installed or utilized without
ENGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be evi-
denced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop
Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to fur-
nish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance
guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER
and ENGINEER's consultants in eva:uating substitutions
proposed bv CONTRACTOR dnd in makinc chanees in
the 'Contrac't Documents occasioned therebY~ Whe;her or
not ENGINEER accepts a proposed substitute. CON-
TRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of
ENGINEER and ENGINEER's consultants for evaluat-
ing each proposed substitute.
I
I
I
I
I
Conceming Subcontractors. Suppliers and Others:
6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcon-
tractor. Supplier or other person or organization t including
those acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER as indi-
cated in paragraph 6.8.:). whether initially or as a substi-
tute. against whom OWNER or ENGINEER may hale
reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required
to employ any Subcontractor. Supplier or other person \)r
organization to furnish or perform any of the Wllrk against
whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objectil1n.
6.8.~. If the Supplementary Conditions require the
identity of certain Subcontractors. Suppliers lIr other per-
sons or organizations I including those who are to furnish
the prinCipal items ot" materials and equipment) to be sub-
mitted to OWNER in advance of the specified date pril1r
to the Efkctive Dat~ of the Agreement for acc~pwnce b\'
I
I
I
I
I
OWNER and ENGINEER and if CONTRACTOR has
. submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supple-
mentary Conditions. OWNER's or ENGINEER's accept-
ance (either in writing or by failing to make written objec-
tion thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objec.
tion in the bidding documents or the Contract Documents)
of any such Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or
organization so identified may be revoked on the basis of
reasonable objection after due investigation. in which case
CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute. the
Contract Price will be increased by the difference in the
cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed.
No acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any such
Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or organization
shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or ENGI-
NEER to reject Jef('('til'(' Work.
6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER
and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the Subcon-
tractors. Suppliers and other persons and organizations per-
forming or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or
indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRAC-
TOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omis-
sions. Nothing in the Contract" Documents shall create any
contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER
and any such Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or
organization. nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
OWNER or ENGINEER to payor to see to the payment of
any moneys due any such Subcontractor. Supplier or other
person or organization except as may otherwise be required
by Laws and Regulations.
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and
the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CON-
TRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or
Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any
specific trade.
6. II. .-\11 Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a.Sub-
contractor will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement
between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which spe-
cifically binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and
conditions of the 'Contract Documents for the benefit of
OWNER and ENGINEER and contains waiver provisions
as required by paragraph 5.11. CONTRACTOR shall pay
each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys
received by CONTRACTOR on account of losses under pol-
icies issued pursuant to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
Patent Fees and Royalties:
6.1:. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and roy-
alties and assume all costs incident to the use in the perfor-
mance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any
invention. design. process. product or device which is the
subject of patent rights or copyrights held tly others. If a
particular invention. design. process. product or device is
specified in [he Contract Documenls for use in the perfor-
mance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWN ER
15
or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights
calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others.
the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in
the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify
and hold harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and
against all claims. damages. losses and expenses (including
attorneys' fees and coun and arbitration costs) arising out of
any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to
the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the
incorporation in the Work of any invention. deSIgn. process.
product or device not specified in the Contract Documents.
and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged
infringement of such rights.
Permils:
6.13. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all con-
struction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CON-
TRACTOR. when necessary. in obtaining such permits and
licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges
and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work.
which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. or if there
are no Bids on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CON-
TRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for con-
nections to the Work. and OWNER shall pay all charges of
such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
LAws and Regulations:
6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and
comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to fur-
nishing and performance of the Work. Except where oth-
erwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regu-
lations. neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be respon-
iible for mOnitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with
any Laws or Regulations.
6.14.:. If CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifi-
cations or Drawings are at variance with any Laws or
Regulations. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER
prompt written notice thereof. and any necessary changes
will be authorized by one of the methods mdicated in
paragraph 3.4. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work
knowing or havmg reason to know that it is contrary to
such Laws or Regulations. and without such notice to
ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising
therefrom: however. it shall not be CONTRACTOR"s pn-
mary responsibility to make cenain that the Specifications
and Drawings are in accordance with such Laws and
Regulations.
Tazes:
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall payall sales. consumer. use
and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRAC-
TOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the
I
place of the Project which are applicable during the perfor-
mance of the Work.
I
Use of Premises:
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equip-
ment. the storage of materials and equipment and the oper-
ations of workers to the Project site and land and areas iden-
tified in and pem1itted by the Contract Documents and other
. land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations. rights-
of-way. permits and easements. and shall not unreasonably
encumber the premises with construction equipment or other
materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full
responsibility for any damage to any such land or area. or to
the owner or occupant thereof or of any land or areas contig-
uous thereto. resulting from the performance of the Work.
Should any claim be made against OWNER or ENGINEER
by any such owner or occupant because of the performance
of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle
with such other pany by agreement or otherwise resolve the
claim by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall. to the
fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations. indemnify
and hold OWNER and ENGINEER harmless from and against
all claims. damages. losses and expenses (including. but not
limited to. fees of engineers. architects. attorneys and other
professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising directly.
indirectly or consequentially out of any action. legal or equi-
table. brought by any such other pany against OWNER or
ENGINEER to the extent based on a claim arising out of
CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
I
1
I
I.
I
I
I
I
6.17. During the progress of the Work. CONTRACTOR
shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste
materials. rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work.
At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove
all waste materials. rubbish and debris from and about the
premises as well as all tools. appliances. construction equip-
ment and machinery. and surplus materials. and shall leave
the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. CON-
TRACTOR shall restore to original condition all propeny not
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any pan
of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger
the structure. nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any pan of
the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that
will endanger it.
I
I
Record DocumenlS:
I
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at
the site one record copy of all Drawings. Specifications.
Addenda. Written Amendments. Change Orders. Work
Directive Changes. Field Orders and written interpretations
and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.4) in good
order and annotated to show all changes made during con-
struction. These record documents together with all approved
samples and a counterpan of all approved Shop Drawings
will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon com-
I
I
16
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
.1
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
pletion of the Work. these record documents. samples and
Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER.
Safety and Protection:
6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating.
maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and pro-
grams in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall
take all necessary precautions for the safety of. and shall
provide the necessary protection to prevent damage. injury
or loss to:
6.20.1. all employees on the Work and other persons
and organizations who may be alTected thereby:
6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to
be incorporated therein. whether in storage on or off the
site: and
6,20.3. other propeny at the site or adjacent thereto.
inciuding trees. shrubs. lawns. walks. pavements. road-
ways. structures. utilities and Underground Facilities not
designated for removal. relocation or replacement in the
course of construction.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and
Regulations of any [lunlic body having jurisdiction for the
safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage.
injury or loss: and shall erect and maintain all necessary
safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of C nderground
Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the Work
may affect them. and shall cooperate with them in the' pro-
tection. removal. relocation and replacement of their prop-
erty. .-\11 damage. injury or loss to any property referred to
in paragraph 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused. directly or indirectl\'.
in whole or in part. by CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor.
Supplier or an\' other person or organization directly or indi-
rectl\ employed by any of them to pen'orm or furnish any of
the Work or anyone tor whose acts any of them may be liable.
shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss
attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to
the acts or omissions of OWN ER or ENG INEER or anyone
employed bv either of them or anyone tor whose acts either
of them may be liable. and not attributable. din:ctlv or indi-
rectl\'. in whole or in part. to the fault or negligence of CO~-
TRACTOR). CONTRACTOR's duties and respLlOsibilities
for the saft:t\. and protection of the Work shall cLlntinue until
such time as all the Work is completed and ENGI~EER has
issued a notice to OWN ER and CONTRACTOR in accord-
ance with paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except
as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substan-
tial Completion).
6.: I. CONTRACTOR shall designate a respL1nsible rep-
resentative at the site whose duty shall be the pre\'entil1n ,If
accidents. This person shall be CONTRACTOR's superin-
tendent unless otherwise designatedm writin~ by CO;\;-
TR.-\CTOR 10 OWN ER.
Emergencies:
6.:2. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of
persons or the Work or propeny at the site or adjacent thereto.
CONTRACTOR. without special instruction or authorization
from ENGINEER or OWNER. is obligated to act to prevent
threatened damage. injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes
that any significant changes in the Work or variations from
the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If ENGI-
NEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents
is required because of the action taken in response to an
emergency. a'Work Directive Change or Change Order will
be issued to document the consequences of the changes or
variations.
Shop Drawings and Samples:
6.23. After checking and verifying all field measurements
and after complying with applicable procedures specified in
the General Requirements. CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the
accepted schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see para-'
graph :.91. or for other appropriate action if so indicated in
the Supplementary Conditions. five copies lunless otherwise
specified in the General Requirements) of all Shop Drawings.
which will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsi-
bilities under the Contract Dm;uments wiih respect to the
review of the submission. All submissions will be identified
as ENGINEER may require. The data shown on the Shop
Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities. dimen-
sions. specified performance and design criteria. materials
and similar data to enable ENGINEER to review the infor-
mation as required.
6.24. CONTRACTOR shall also submit [0 ENGINEER
for review and approval with such promptness as [0 cause
no delay in Work. all samples required by the Contract Doc-
uments. All samples will have been checked by and accom-
panied by a specific written indication that CONTRACTOR
has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the
Contract Documents with respect to the review of the sub-
mission and will be identified clearly as [0 material. S4Pplier.
peninent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which
intended.
6.25.1. Before submission of each Shop Drawing or
sample CONTRACTOR shall have determined and veri-
fied all quantities. dimensions. specified performance cri-
teria. installation requirements. materials. catalog num-
bers and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed
or coordinated each Shop Drawing or sample with other
Shop Drawings and samples and with the requirements of
the Work and the Contract Documents.
6.25.2. Al the time Llf each submission. CONTRAC-
TOR shall give ENGINEER specific wrinen notice of each
variation that the Shop Drawings or samples may have
from the requiremenis ,If the C,1Otract Documents. and.
in addition. sh,11I cause a specific notation to be made on
17
each Shop Drawing submitted to ENGINEER for review
and approval of each such variation.
6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve with reason-
able promptness Shop Drawings and samples. but ENGI-
NEER's review and approval will be only for conformancc
with the design concept of thc Project and for compliancc
with the information given in the Contract Documents and
shall not cxtend to means. methods. techniques. sequenccs
or procedures of construction (except where a specific means. .
method. technique. sequencc or procedure of construction is
indicated in or required by the Contract Documents) or to
safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review
and approval of a separatc item as such will not indicate
approval of the assembly in which the item functions. CON-
TRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER.
and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new samples for review
and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention
in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for
by ENGINEER on previous submittals.
6.27. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop Draw-
ings or samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing
called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the
time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.2 and
ENGINEER has given written approval of each such varia-
tion by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or
accompanying the Shop Drawing or sample approval; nor
will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR
from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Draw-
ings or from responsibility for having complied with the pro-
visions of paragraph 6.25.1.
6.28. Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the
Specifications. any related Work performed prior to ENGI-
NEER's review and approval of the peninem submIssion will
be the sole expense ~nd responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
Continuing the Work:
6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere
to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements
with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pend-
ing resolution of any disputes or disagreements. except as
permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as CONTRACTOR and
OWNER may otherwise agree in writing.
I niUmnifualion:
6.30. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regu-
lations CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless
OWNER and ENGINEER and their consultants. agents and
employees from and against all claims. damages. losses and
expenses. direct. indirect or consequential (including but not
limited to fees and charges of engineers. architects. attorneys
and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) aris-
ing out of or resulting from the performance of the Work.
I
provided that any such claim. damage. loss or expense (al is
attributable to bodily injury. sickness. disease or dcath. or to
injury to or destruction of tangible propeny (other than the
Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom and
(b) is caused in whole or in pan by any negligent act or
omission of CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor. any person
or organization directly or indirectly employed by any ofthem
to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable. regardless oi whether or not
it is caused in pan by a pany indemnified hereunder or arises
by or is imposed by Law and Regulations rega,rdless of the
negligence of any such pany.
I
I
I
I
6.31. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGI-
NEER or any of thcir consultants. agents or employecs by
any employee of CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor. any
person or organization directly or indirectly employcd by any
of them to pcrfonn or furnish any of the Work or anyone for
whose acts any of them may be liable. the indemnification
obligation under paragraph 6.30 shall not be limited in any
way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages.
compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR
or any such Subcontractor or other person .or organization
under workers' or workmen's compensation acts. disability
benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
I.
I
I
I
6.32. The obligations of CONTRACTOR under para-
graph 6.30 shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER.
ENGINEER's consuJtants. agents or employees arising out
of the preparation or approval of maps. drawings. opinions.
reports. surveys. Change Orders. designs or specifications.
I
ARTICLE 7-OTHER WORK
I
Relilled Work aJ Sue:
7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the Proj-
ect at the site by OWNER's own forces. have other work
performed by utility owners or let other direct contracts therefor
which shall contain General Conditions similar to these. If
the fact that such other work is to be performed was not notcd
in the Contract Documents, wrinen notice thereof will be
given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other
work: and. if CONTRACTOR believes that such perfor-
mance will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or
requires additional time and the panies are unable to agree
as to the extent thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim
therefor as provided in Anicles 11 and 12.
I
I
I
I
7.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner and
other contractor who is a pany to such a direct contract (or
OWNER. if OWNER is performing the additional work with
OWNER's employees) proper and safe acccss to the site and
a reasonable opponunity for the introduction and storage of
materials and equipment and the execution of such work. and
shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs.
CONTRACTOR shall do aJl cutting, fining and patching of
the Work that may be required to make its several pans come
together properly and integrate with such other work. CON-
I
.1
I
18
I
1
I
I
I'
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
" ,". -:. .f:~'~
TRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting.
excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut
or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER
and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are
for :he benefit of such utility owners and other contractors
to the extent that. there are comparable provisions for the
benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between
OWN ER and such utility owners and other contractors.
7.3. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for
proper execution or results upon the work of any such other
contractor or utility owner (or OWNERl. CONTRACTOR
shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing
any delays. defects or deficiencies in such work that render
it unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and
results. CONTRACTOR's failure so to repon will constitute
an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integra-
lion with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or non-
apparent defects and deficiencies in the other work.
Coordination:
7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the perfor-
mance of other work on the Project al the sileo the person or
organization who will have authority and responsibility for
coordination of the activities among the various prime con-
tractors will be identified in the Supplementary Conditiuns.
and the specific matters to be covered by such authority and
responsibility will be itemized, and the extent of such author-
ity and responsibilities will be provided. in the Supplementary
Conditions. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions. neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall have any
authority or responsibility in respect of such coordination.
ARTICLE 8-0WNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.1. OWNER shall issue all communications to CON-
TRACTOR through ENGINEER.
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of ENGI-
NEER. OWNER shall appoint an engineer against whom
CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection. whose sta-
tus under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former
ENGINEER. Any dispute in connection with such appoinl-
ment shall be subject to arbitration.
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER
under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make pay-
ments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as
provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13.
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and
easements and providing engineering surveys to establish
reference points are set fonh in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Para-
graph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying and making avail-
able to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and
tests of subsurt'ace conditions at the site and in existing struc-
tures which have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing
the Drawings and Specifications.
8.5. OWNER's responsibilities in respect of purchasing
and maintaining liability and property insurance are set fonh
in paragraphs 5.5 through 5.8.
8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as
indicated in paragraph 10.4.
8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain
inspections. tests and approvals is set fonh in paragraph 13.4.
8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or
suspend Work. see paragraphs 13.10 and Ij.1. Paragraph 15.2
deals with OWNER's right to terminate services of CON-
TRACTOR under cenain circumstances.
ARTICLE 9-ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
Owner's Representative:
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative dur-
ing the construction period. The duties and responsibilities
and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's
representative during construction are set forth in the Con-
tract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of OWNER and ENGINEER.
Visits to Site:
9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals
appropriate [0 the various stages of construction [0 observe
the progress and quality of the executed Work and [0 deter-
mine. in general. if the Work is proceeding in accordance
with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required
to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check
the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's .:fforts
wiu be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree
of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the
Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site
observations as an experienced and qualified design profes-
sional. ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the prog-
ress' of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against
defects and deficiencies in the Work.
Project Representation:
9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree. ENGINEER
will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist
ENGINEER in observing the performance of the Work. The
duties. responsibilities and limitations of authority of any
such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be
asprovjded in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWN ER
designates another agent to represent OWNER at the site
who is not ENG1NEER's agent or employee. the duties.
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such lllher
person will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
19
CUuijicDZions and Inlerprr!Ultions:
9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness
such written clarifications or interpretations of the require-
ments of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings
or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary. ~hich
shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the
overall intent of the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR
believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies
an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time and the panies are unable to agree to the
amount or extent thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim
therefor as provided in Article 1] or Anicle 12.
Authorized Var.ations in Work:
9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the
Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which
do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of
the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a
Field Order and will be binding on OWNER. and also on
CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved
promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order
justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of
the Contract Time and the panies are unable to agree as to
the amount or extent thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a
claim therefor as provided in Anicie II or 12.
Rejecting Defective Work:
9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or
reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective. and
will also have authority to require special inspection ortesting
of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9. whether or not
the Work is fabricated. installed or completed.
Shop Drawings. CiuJnge Orders and Payments:
9. i. In connection with ENGINEER' s responsibilitv for
Shop Drawings and samples. see paragraphs 6.23 thr~ugh
6.29 inclusive. .
9.8. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities as
to Change Orders. see Anicles 10. 11 and 12. .
9.9. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities in
respect of Applications for Payment. etc.. see Anicle 14.
DetermifUJlions for U nil Prices:
9. ]0. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities
and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CON-
TRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR
EN G IN EER' s preliminary determinations on such matters
before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommen-
dation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGI-
N EER . s written decisions thereon will be final and binding
upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. unless. within ten days
after the date of any such decision. either OWNER or CON-
TRACTOR delivers to the other pany to the Agreement and
I
to ENGINEER written notice of intention to appeal from
such a decision.
I
Decisions on Disputes:
9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the
requirements of the ContraCt Documents and judge of the
acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims. disputes and
other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or the
interpretation of the require.ments of the Contract Documents
penaining to the perfprmance and furnishing of the Work and
claims under Anicles 11 and 12 in respect of changes in the
Contract Price or Contract Time will be referred initially to
ENGINEER in writing with a request for a formal decision
in accordance with this paragraph. which ENGINEER will
render in writing within a reasonable time. Written notice of
each such claim. dispute and other matter will be delivered
by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other pany to the
Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thiny days)
after the occurrence of the event giving rise thereto. and
written supponing data will be submitted to ENGINEER and
the other pany within sixty days after such occurrence unless
ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain
more accurate data in suppon of the claim.
I
I
I
I.
I
I
9.12. When functioning as interpreter and judge under
paragraphs 9.iO and 9.11. ENGINEER will not show par-
tiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable
in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in
good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by
ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 and 9.1] with respect
to any such claim. dispute or other matter (except any which
have been waived by the making or acceptance of final pay-
ment as provided in paragraph 14. ]6) will be a condition
precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR
of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under
the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect
of any such claim. dispute or other matter.
I
I
I
I
Limilluions on ENGINEER's ResponsibiJ.iJies:
9.13. Neither ENGINEER's authority to act under this
Anicle 9 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any
decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or
responsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR. any Sub-
contractor. any Supplier. or any other person or organization
performing any of the Work. orto any surety for any of them.
I
1
I
9.14. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as
ordered", "as directed". "as required". "as allowed". "as
approved" or terms of like effect or impon are used. or the
adjectives .. reasonable". "suitable". .. acceptable". .. proper"
or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or impon are
uscd to describe a requirement. direction. review or judgment
of ENGINEER as to the Work. it is intended that such
requirement. direction. review or judgment will be solely to
evaluate. the Work for compliance with the Contract Docu-
ments (unless there is a specific statement indicating other-
wise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be
I'
I
I
20
I
I
I
effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work
or any duty or authority to undenake responsibility contrary
to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
I
9.15. ENGINEER will not be responsible for CON-
TRACTOR's means. methods. techniques. sequences or pro-
cedures of construction. or the safety precautions and pro-
grams incident thereto. and ENGINEER will not be respon-
sible for CONTRACTOR's failure.to perform or furnish the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
9.16. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or
omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor. any
Supplier. or of any other person or organization performing
or furnishing any of the Work.
I
I
ARTICLE IO-CHANGES IN THE WORK
I
10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice
to any surety. OWNER may. at any time or from time to
time. order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work:
these will be authorized by a Written Amendment. a Change
Order. or a Work Directive Change. Upon receipt of any such
document. CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the
Work involved which will be performed under the applicable
conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise
specifically provided).
I
I
I
10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree
as to the extent. if any. of an increase or decrease in the
Contract Price or an extension or shonening of the Contract
Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Directive
Change. a claim may be made therefor as provided in Anicle
II or ..\rticle 1:.:.
I
I
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase:
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time
with respect to any Work performed that is not required by
the Contract Documents as amended. modified and supple-
mented as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5. except in the
case ot" an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.:2 and
except in the case of uncovering Work as provided in para-
graph 13.9.
I
1
lOA. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appro-
priate Change Orders lor Written Amendments) covering:
I
10A.I. changes in the Work which are ordered by
OWN ER pursuant to paragraph 10.1. are required because:
of acceptance of t.iej~('ril'e Work under paragraph 13. I;' llr
corre:cting "('f~cril'e Work under paragraph 13.14. or are:
agre:e:d 10 by the parties:
I
I
'IOA.2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time:
which are agreed to by Ihe parties: and
I
IOA.3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time
which embody the substance of any written decision ren-
. dered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 9.11:
provided that. in lieu 'of executing any such Change Order.
an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations. but during any such appeal. CON-
TRACTOR shall carryon the Work and adhere to the prog-
ress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.29.
. 10.5. If notice of any change atTecting the general scope
of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents
(including. but not limited to. Contract Price or Contract
Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given
to a suretv. the giving of any such notice will be CONTRAC-
TOR's re~ponsibility: and the amount of each applicable Bond
will be adjusted accordingly. '.
ARTICLE II-CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. The Contract Price constitutes the total compen-
sation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to CON-
TRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties. responsibil.
ities and obligations assigned to or undenaken by CON-
TRACTOR shall be at his expense without change in the
Contract Price.
11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change
Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an increase
or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written
notice delivered by the pany making the claim to the other
pany and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than
thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to
the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice
of the amount of the claim with supponing data shall be
delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless
ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascenain
more accurate data in suppon of the claim) and shall be
accompanied by claimant's written statement that the amount
claimed covers all known amounts (direct. indirect and con-
sequential) to which the claimant is entitled as a result of the
occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the
Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in accor-
dance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR
cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim
for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2.
11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order
or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract
Price shall be determined in one of the followil)g ways:
II :3.1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Documents. by applica-
tion of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved
(subject to the provisions of paragraphs 11.9.1. through
11.9.3. inclusive!.
21
11.3.2. By mutual -acceptance of a lump sum (which
may include an allowance for overhead and profit not
necessarily in accordancc with paragraph 11.6.2.1).
11.3.3. On the basis of the Cost of the Work (detcr-
mined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5) plus a
CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit (deter-
mined as provided in paragraphs 11.6 and 11.7).
Cost of the Work:
11.4. The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all
costs necessarily incurrcd and paid by CONTRACTOR in
the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwisc
may be agreed to in writing by OWNER. such costs shall be
in amounts no highcr than those prevailing in the locality of
the Project. shall include only the following items and shall
not include any of the costs'itemized in paragraph 11.5:
11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ
of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under
schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER
and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for employees not
employed full time on the Work shall be apponioned on
the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs
shall include. but not be limitcd to, salaries and wages
plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social
security contributions. unemployment. excise and payroll
taxes. workers' or workmen's compensation, health and
retirement benefits. bonuses. sick leave. vacation and hol-
iday pay applicable thereto. Such employees shall include
superintendents and foremen at the site. The expefJses of
performing Work after regular working hours. onSatur-
day. Sunday or legal holidays. shall be includcd in the
above to the extent authonzed by OWNER.
11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished
and incorporated in the Work. including costs of trans-
ponation and storage thereof. and Suppliers' field services
required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall
accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds
with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments. in
which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER.
All trade discounts. rebates and refunds and all returns
from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue
to OWNER. and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions
so that they may be obtained.
11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the
Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors.
If required by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall obtain
competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to CON-
TRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER who
will then determine. with the advice ofENGlNEER. which
bids will be accepted. If a subcontract provides that the
Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the
Work Plus a Fee. the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work
shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRAC-
TOR's Cost of the Work. All subcontracts shall be subject
I
.to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar
as applicable.
I
11.4.4. Costs of special consultants (including but not
limited to engineers. architects. testing laboratories. sur-
veyors. attorneys and accountants) employed for serviccs
specifically related to the Work.
I
11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following:
I
11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary transporta-
tion. travel and subsistence expenses of CONTRAC-
TOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties con-
nected with the Work.
1
I.
11.4.5.:. Cost. including transportation and main-
tenance. of all materials. supplies. equipment. machin-
ery. appliances. office and temporary facilities at the
site and hand tools not owned by the workers. which
are consumed in the performance of the Work. and cost
less market value of such items used but not consumed
which remain the propeny of CONTRACTOR.
I
I
11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction equipment and
machinery and the pans thereof whether rented from
CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental
agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of
ENGINEER. and the costS of transportation. loading.
unloading, installation. dismantling and removal
thereof-all in accordance with terms of said rental
agreements. The rental of any such equipment. machin-
ery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer
necessary for the Work.
I
I
I
11.4.5.4. Sales. consumer. use or similar taxes
related to the Work. and for which CONTRACTOR is
liable. imposed by Laws and Regulations.
I
11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than negli-
gence of CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor or any-
one directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
for whose acts any of them may be liable. and royalty
payments and' fees for permits and licenses.
I
I
11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related
expenses). not compensated by insurance or otherwise.
to the Work or otherwise sustained by CONTRACTOR
in connection with the performance and furnishing of
the Work (except losses and damages within the
deductible amounts of propeny insurance established
by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.9), pro-
vided they have resulted from causes other than the
negligence of CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor. or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them
or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such
losses shall include settlements made with the written
consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses.
damages and expenses shall be included in the Cost of
the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRAC-
TOR's Fee. If. however, any such loss or damage
I
I
I
I
22
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- :!
requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed
in charge thereof. CONTRACTOR shall be paid for
services a fee propurtionate to that stated in paragraph
11.6.:.
I J A.5. 7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary
facilities at the site.
11.~.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams. long
distance telephone calls. telephone service at the site.
expressage and similar pelly l.:ash items in connection
with the Work.
11.~.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds
and insurance required because of changes in the Work
and premiums for property insurance coverage within
the limits of the deductible amounts established by
OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.9.
11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of
the following:
11.5. I. Payroll costs and other compensation ol"CON-
TRACTOR's officers. executives. principals 101' panner-
ship and sole proprietorships). general managers. engi-
neers. architects. estimators. attorneys. auditors. accoun-
tants. purchasing and contracting agents. expeditors.
timekeepers. clerks and other personnel employed by
CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRAC-
TOR's principal or a brnnch office for general administra-
,tion of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed
upon schedule of job classifications referred to in para-
graph Il.~. I or specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4-
all of which are to be considered administrative costs
covered by the CONTRACTOR's Fee.
11.3.2. E.\penses ()!. CONTRACTOR's principal and
branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at the
site.
11.5.3. .-\ny part ofCONTRACTOR's capital e:xpense:s.
including inreres.t on CONTRACTOR'S capital employe:d
for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for
delinquent payments.
11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all
insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by
the Contract Docume:nts to purchase and maintain the:
same t except for the cost of premiums cove:red by sub.
paragraph II A.5.9 above).
11.5.5. Costs due: to the neglil!e:nl.:e of CONTRAC-
TOR. any Subcontra..:tor. or anyone directly or indirectl~
employed tiv any of i;,.:m or for whose acts any of them
may be liatlk ;r..;I'.idin~ but not limite:d to. the correction
of de/," ii,. ". 'mk. Jispos,d <,r materials or equipment
wrongly SlI, "! ,'. .: ""ak:ng good any damagt: to prop-
erty.
11.5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs ot
any kind and the costs of any item not specitically and
expressly induded in paragraph II A.
CONTRACTOR's Fee:
11.6. The CONTRACTOR's Fee allowed to CONTRAC-
TOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:
11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fixed fe:e: or if none can
be agreed upon.
11.6.2. a fee based on the following percentages of the
various portions of the Cost of the Work:
11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs IIA.I
and 11A.2. the CONTRACTOR's Fe:e shall be fifteen
percent:
11.6.2.2. for ccsts incurred under paragraph IIA.3.
the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be rove percent: and if
a subcontract is on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus
a Fee. the maximum allowable to CONTRACTOR on
account of overhead and profit of all Subcontractors
shall be fifteen percent:
11.6.2.3. no fee shall be payable on the basis of
costs itemized unuer paragraphs IIAA. 11.~.5 and 11.5:
11.6.2.4. the amount of credit to be allowed by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change which
results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of
the actual net decrease plus a deduction in CONTRAC-
TOR's Fee by all amount equal to ten percent of the
net decrease: and
11.6.2.5. when both additions and credits are
involved in anyone change. the adjustment in CON-
TRACTOR's Fee shall be computed on the basis of the
net change in accordance with paragraphs 11.6.2. I
throLlgh 11.6.2A. inclusive.
11.7. Whenever the cost of any Work is [0 be determined
pursuant to paragraph IIA or 11.5. CONTRACTOR will
submit in form acceptable: to ENGINEER an ilemize:d COSI
breakdown together with supporting data.
Cash Allowances:
11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract
Documents and shalll.:ause the Work so covered to be done
by such Subcontractors or Suppliers and for such sums within
the limit of the allowances as may be acceptable to ENGI-
NEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that:
11.8.1. The allo'wances include ihe cost to CON-
TRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of mate.
rials and equipment required by the allowances 10 be deliv-
ered at the site. and all applicable laxes: and
11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and
handling on the sileo lahor. installation costs. o"erhead.
profit and other expenses contemplated for lhe allowances
have been included in tht: Contract Price and not in the
23
allowances. No demand for additional payment on account
of any thereof will be valid.
Prior to final payment. an appropriate Change Order will be
issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual
amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered
by allowances. and the Contract Price shall be correspond-
ingly adjusted.
Unit Price Work:
11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that
all or pan of the Work is to be Unit Price Work. initially
the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit
Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established
unit prices for each separately identified item of U nit Price
Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indi-
cated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items
of Unit Price Work are riot guaranteed and are solely for
the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an
initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quan-
tities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in accor-
dance with Paragraph 9.10.
I I .9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to
cover CONTRACTOR' s overhead and profit for each sep-
arately identified item.
11.9.3, Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially
and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item
indicated in the Agreement and there is no corresponding
adjustment with respect to any other item of Work and if
CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has
incurred additional expense as a result thereof. CON-
TRACTOR may make a claim for an increase in the Con-
tract Price in accordance with Anicle II if the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase.
ARTICLE 12-CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
1:.1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change
Order ora Wntten Amendment. Any claim for an extension
. or shortening of the Contract Time shall be based on wriuen
notice delivered by the pany making the claim to the other
pany and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than
thiny days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to
the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice
of the extent of the claim with supponing data shall be deliv-
ered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless ENGI-
NEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more
accurate data in suppon of the claim) and shall be accom-
panied by the claimant's written statement that the adjust-
ment claimed is the entire adjustment to. which the claimant
has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence
of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time
I
shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with para-
graph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise
agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will
be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements
of this paragraph 12.1.
I
I
12.2. The ContraCt Time will be extended in an amount
equal to time lost due to delays beyond the control of CON-
TRACTOR if a claim is made therefor as provided in para-
graph 12.1: Such delays shall include. but not be limited to,
acts or neglect by OWNER or others performing additional
work as contemplated by Anicle 7. or to fires. floods. labor
disputes. epidemics. abnormal weather conditions or acts of
God.
I
I
I.
12.3. Ali time limits stated in the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Agreement. The provisions of this
Anicle 12 shall not exclude recovery for damages (including
but not limited to fees and charges of engineers. architects.
attorneys and other professionals and coun and arbitration
costs) for delay by either pany.
I
I
ARTICLE 13-W ARRANTY AND GUARANTEE;
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOV AL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
I
I
Warranty and GlIllTtUI.Ue:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to
OWNER and ENGINEER that all Work will be in accor-
dance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective.
Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to CONTRAC-
TOR. All defective Work. whether or not in place. may be
rejected. corrected or accepted as provided in this Anicle 13.
I
I
Access to Work:
13.2. ENGINEER and ENGINEER's representatives.
other representatives of OWNER. testing agencies and gov-
ernmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access
to the Work at reasonable times for their observation. inspecting
and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper and safe
conditions for such access.
I
I
I
Tests and Inspections:
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice
of readiness of the Work for all required inspections. tests or
approvals.
I
13.4. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction require any Work (or pan thereof) to specifically
be inspected. tested or approved. CONTRACTOR shall
assume full responsibility therefor. pay all costs in connection
therewith and furnish ENGINEER the required cenificates
of inspection. testing or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also
I
I
24
1
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,;...:,",,,
be 'responsible for and shall pay all costs in connection with
any inspection or testing required in connection with OWN-
ER's or ENGINEER's acceptance of a Supplier of materials
or equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work. or of
materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to "CON-
TRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
The cost of all inspections. tests and approvals in addition to
the above which are required by the Contract Documents
shall be paid by OWNER (unless otherwise specifiedl.
13.S. All inspections. tests or approvals other than those
required by Laws or Regulations of any public bod v having
jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations ac~eptabl~
to OWNER and CONTRACTOR lor by ENGI~EER if so
specified) .
13.6. If any Work lincluding the work of others) that is
to be inspected. tested or approved is covered without written
concurrence Of ENGINEER. it must. if requested by ENGI-
1'1 EER. be uncovered for observation. Such unco\'ering shall
be at CONTRACTOR' s expense unless CONTRACTOR has
given ENGINEER timely notice ofCONTRACTOR's inten-
tion to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted with
reasonable promptness in response 10 such notice.
13.7. Neither observations by ENGINEER nor inspec-
tions. tests or approvals by others shall relieve CONTRAC-
TOR from CONTRACTOR's obligations to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Uncovering Work:
\ 3 .8. If an\ Work is covered contrary to the wrinen request
of ENGINEER. it must. if requested by ENGl:--;EER. be
uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at
CONTR.-\CTOR's expense.
13.9. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable
that covered \Vork be observed by ENGINEER or inspected
or tested by others. CONTRACTOR. at ENGINEER's
request. shall uncover. expose or otherwise make available
for observation. inspection ~r testing as ENGI:--;EER may'
require. that portion of the Work in question. furnishing all
necessary labor. material and equipment. If it is found that
such \Vork is ,ietL'u;I'". CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct.
indirect and consequential costs of such uncovering. expo-
sure. observation. inspection and testing and of ~atisfaClOr\"
reconstruction. t including but not limited to fees :.1nd charges
of engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionalsl.
and OWN ER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in
the Contract Price. and. if lhe panies an: unable tl) agree :.1S
to the amuuntt hereof. ma~' make a claim therefor as provided
in .-\rticle II If. hll\\e\"er. sllch Work is nul fl'und to be
de/l'nit.". CO'.;TRACTOR ,hall be allowed an increase in
[he Cllnlral:l Price.:' ..,1 c\.ensiun of the Contra..:t Time. l'r
both. Jin:cth attrH'lIlablc 10 such uncovering. exposure.
obsen'ation. inspection. testing and reconstructil'n: and. if
lhe parties are unable (U <.Jgrec ,IS [0 the amount l.lr extent
.'. .~
thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim thereior as pro-
vided in Anicles II and 12.
Owner May Stop the Work:
13.10. If the Work is defecril'e. or CONTRACTOR fails
to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipme':lt. or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a
way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents. OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to s~op the
Work. or any ponion thereof. until the cause for ~uch order
has been eliminated; however. this right of OWNER to stop
the Work shall not iive rise to any duty on the pan of OWNER
to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or
any other pany.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.11. If required by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall
promptly. as directed. either correct all defecril'e Work.
whether or not fabricated. installed or completed. or. if the
Work has been rejected by ENGINEER. remove it from the
site and replace it with nondefecril'e Work. CONTRACTOR
shall bear all direct. indirec: and consequential costs of such
correction or removal (including but not limited to fees and
charges of engineers. architects. attorneys and other profes-
sionals) made necessary thereby.
One Year Correction Period:
13.12. If within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion or such longer period of time as may be pre-
scribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any appli-
cable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents
or: by any specific provision of the Contract Documents. any
Work is found to be defecril'e. CONTR.-\CTOR shall promptly.
without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's
written instructions. either correct such defecr;I'e Work. or.
if it has been rejected by OWNER. remove it from the site
and replace it with nondefecril'e Work. If CONTRACTOR
does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions.
or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of
loss or damage. OWNER may have the defecril'e Work cor-
rected or the rejected Work removed and replaced. and all
direct. indirect and consequential costs of such removal and
replacementlincluding but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionals) will
be paid by CONTRACTOR. In special circumstances where
a panicular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Substantial Completion of all (he Work. lhe correction
period for that ilem may start to run from an earlier dale if
so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13.13. If. instead of requiring correction or removal and
replacement of "(:fecril'(' Work. OWNER land. "prior to
ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment. also
. ENGIN EER) prefers to accept it. OWNER may do so. CON-
TRACTOR shall bear all Jirect. indirect and consequential
25
costs attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determi-
nation to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved
by ENGINEER as to reasonableness and to include but not
be limited to fees and charges of engineers. architects. anor-
neys and other professionals). If any such acceptance occurs
prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of tinal payment. a
Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revi-
sions in the ContraCt Documents with respect to the Work:
and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in
the Contract Price. and. if the panies are unable to agree'as
to the amount thereof. OWNER may make a claim therefor
as provided in Anicle 11. If the acceptance occurs after such
recommendation. an appropriate amount will be paid by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
OWNER May Cornet Defective Work:
13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time
after written notice of ENGINEER to proceed to correct and
to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected
Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with para-
graph 13.11. or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents. or if CON-
TRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the
Contract Documents. OWNER may. after-seven days' writ-
ten notice to CONTRACTOR. correct and remedy any such
deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this
paragraph OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. To the extent
necessary to complete corrective and remedial action. OWNER
may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or pan of the site. take
possession of all or pan of the Work. and suspend CON-
TRACTOR's services related thereto. take possession of
CONTRACTOR's tools. appliances. construction equipment
and machinery at the site and Incorporate in the Work all
matenals and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER
has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere.
CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER. OWNER's represen-
tatives. agents and employees such access to the site as may
be necessary to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and
remedies under this paragraph. All direct. indirect and con-
sequential costs of OWNER in exercising such rights and
remedies will be charged ~nst CONTRACTOR in an amount
approved as to reasonableness by ENGINEER. and a Change
Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in
the Contract Documents with respect to the Work: and
OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price. and. if the panies are unable to agree as to
the amount thereof. OWNER may make a claim therefor as
provided in Anicle 11. Such direct. indirect and consequen-
tial costs will include but not be limited to fees and charges
of engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionals.
all coun and arbitration costs and all costs of repair and
replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by
correction. removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR's
defecrive Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an
extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in per-
formance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER
of OWNER' s rights and remedies hereunder.
I
ARTICLE l4-PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
COMPLETION
I
I
Schedule of V Glues:
14.1. The schedule of values established as provided in
paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress paymentS
and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Pay-
ment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on
account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of
units completed.
I
I
AppliaJlion for Prognss Paymeru:
14.2. At least twenty days before each progress payment
is scheduled (but not more often than once a month). CON-
TRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Appli-
cation for Payment tilled out and signed by CONTRACTOR
covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application
and accompanied by such supponing documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested
on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in
the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at
another location agreed to in writing. the Application for
Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale. invoice
or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received'
the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens. charges.
security interests and encumbrances (which are hereinafter
in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens") and
evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by
appropriate propeny insurance and other arrangements to
protect OWNER's interest therein. all of which will be sat-
isfactory to OWNER. The amount of retainage with respect
to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.
I,
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR's Warranty ofTiJh:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title
to all Work. materials and equipment covered by any Appli-
cation for Payment. whether incorporated in the Project or
not. will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment
free and clear of all Liens.
I
I
Review of Appliallions for Prognss Payment:
14.4. ENGINEER will. within ten days after receipt of
each Application for Payment. either indicate in writing a
recommendation of payment and present the Application to
OWNER. or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indi-
cating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to rec-
ommend payment. In the latter case. CONTRACTOR may
make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Applica-
tion. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Pay-
ment with ENGINEER's recommendation. the amount rec-
ommended will (subject to the provisions of the last sentence
of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due will be paid by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR.
I
I
I
I
14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment
requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a
I
26
I
1
I
I
1
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
l . ~"'.
representation by ENGINEER to OWNER. based on ENGI-
NEER's on-site observations of the Work in progress as an
experienced and qualified design professional and on ENG1-
NEER's review of the Application for Payment and the
accompanying data and schedules that the Work has pro-
gressed to the point indicated: that. to the best of ENG1-
NEER's knowledge. information and belief. the quality of
the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents
I subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole
prior to or upon Substantial Completion. to the results of any
. subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents. to a
final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit
Price Work under paragraph 9.10. and to any other qualifi-
cations stated in the recommendation): and that CONTRAC-
TOR is entitled to payment of the amount recommended.
However. by recommending any such payment ENGINEER
will not thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaus-
tive or continuous on-site inspections have been made to
check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the
responsibilities specitically assigned to ENGINEER in the
Contract Documents or that there may not be other matters
or issues between the panies that might entitle CONTRAC-
TOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or OWNER to
withhold payment to CONTRACTOR.
14.6. ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment
will constitute an additional representation by ENGINEER
to OWNER that the conditions precedent to CONTRAC-
TOR's being entitled to final payment as set forth in paragraph
14.13 have been fulfilled.
14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole
or any part of any payment if. in ENGINEER's opinion. it
would be incorrect to make such representations to OWN ER.
ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such pay-
ment. or. because of subsequently discovered evidence or
the results of subsequent inspections or tests. nullify any such
payment previously recommended. to such extent as may be
necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to protect OWNER from
loss because:
14.7.1. the Work is defect;l'e. or completed Work has
been damage~ requiring correction or replacement.
14.7.:. the Contract Price has been reduced by Wril-
ten Amendment or Change Order.
14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct defi'c-
t;"e Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph
13.14. or
14.7.4. of ENG1NEER's actual knowledge of the
occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs
\5.::.1 through 15.::.9 inclusive.
OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount
recommended by ENGINEER because claims have been
made against OWNER on aCCOllnt ofCONTRACTOR's per-
formance or furnishing of the Work or Liens have oeen filed
in connection with the Work or there are other items entitling
.J.:~ "''''',
OWNER to a set-off against the amount recommended. but
.OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate wrillen notice
(with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such
action.
Substantial Completion:
14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work
ready for its intended use CONTRAliOR shall notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing tha( (he entire Work is
. substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by
CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGI-
NEER issue a cenificate of Substantial Completion. Within
a reasonable time thereafter. OWNER. CONTRACTOR and
ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to deter-
mine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not con-
sider the Work substantially complete. ENGINEER will notify
CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If
ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete.
ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative
certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date
of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the
cenificate a tentative list of items to be completed or cor.
rected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days
after receipt of the tentative cenificate during which to make
written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the
cenificate or attached list. If. after considering such objec-
tions. ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substan-
tially complete. ENGINEER will within fourteen days after
submission of the tentative cenificate to OWNER notify
CONTRACTOR in writing. stating the reasons therefor. If.
after consideration of OWNER's objections. ENGINEER
considers the Work substantially complete. ENGINEER will
within said fourteen days execute and deliver to OWN ER
and CONTRACTOR a definitive cenificate of Substantial
Completion I with a revised tentative list of items to be com-
pleted or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative
cenificate as EN G IN EER believes justified after consider-
ation of any objections from OWN ER. At the time of delivery
of the tentative cenificate of Substantial Completion ENGI-
NEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written
recommendation as to division of responsibilities' pending
final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with
respect to securit}'. operation. safety. maintenance. heat.
utilities. insurance and warranties. unless OWNER and
CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform
ENGINEER prior to ENGINEER's issuing the definitive
cenificate of Substantial Completion. ENG1NEER's afore-
said recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR until final payment.
14.9. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CON-
TRACTOR from .the Work after the date of Substantial Com-
pletion. but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable
access to complete or correct items on the tentative list.
P artwl U rili:.arion:
14.10. Use by OWNER of any finished pan of the Work.
which has specific~lIly been identified in the Contract Do.:u-
27
ments. or which OWNER. ENGINEER and CONTRAC-
TOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and useable
pan of the Work that can be used by OWNER without sig-
nificant interference with CONTRACTOR's performance of
the remainder of the Work. may be accomplished prior to
Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the follow-
mg:
14.10.1. OWNER at any time may request CON-
TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such
pan of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for
its intended use and substantially complete. If CON-
TRACTOR agrees. CONTRACTOR willcenifytoOWNER
and ENGINEER that said pan of the Work is substantially
complete and request ENGINEER to issue a cenificate of
Substantial Completion for that pan of the Work. CON-
TRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGI-
NEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such
pan of the Work ready for its intended use and substan-
tially complete and reque'st ENGINEER to issue a cenif-
icate of Substantial Completion for that pan of the Work.
Within a reasonable time after either such request. OWNER.
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspec-
tion of that pan of the Work to determine its s,atus of
completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that pan of
the Work to be substantially complete. ENGINEER will
notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the
reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that pan of the
Work to be substantially complete. the provisions of para-
graphs 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with respect to cenification
of Substantial Completion of that pan of the Work and the
division of responsibility in respect thereof and access
thereto.
14.10.:. OWNER may at any time request CON-
TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to take over
operation of any such pan of the Work although it is not
substantially complete. A copy of such request will be
sent to ENGINEER and within a reasonable time there-
after OWNER. CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall
make an inspection of that pan of the Work to determine
its status of completion and will prepare a list of the items
remaining to be completed or corrected thereon before
final payment. If CONTRACTOR does not object in writ-
ing to OWNER and ENGINEER that such pan of the
Work is not ready for separate operation by OWNER.
ENGINEER will finalize the list of items to be completed
or corrected and will deliver such list to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR together with a written recommendation
as to the division of responsibilities pending final payment
between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to
security. operation. safety. maintenance. utilities. insur-
ance. warranties and guarantees for that pan of the Work
which will become binding upon OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR at the time when OWNER takes over such
operation (unless they shall have otherwise agreed in writ-
ing and so informed ENGINEER). During such operation
and prior to Substantial Completion of such pan of the
Work. OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable
access to complete or correct items on said list and to
complete other related Work.
\
\
I
14. iO.3. No occupancy or separate operation of part
of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance with
the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of propeny
insurance.
I
I
F iIUIl I nspeClion:
14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the
entire Work or an agreed ponion thereof is complete. ENGI-
NEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all
particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately
take such measures as are necessary to remedy such defi-
ciencies.
I
I
I.
FiIUIl Appli&ation for Payment:
14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such cor-
rections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered all
maintenance and operating instructions. schedules. guaran-
tees. Bonds. cenificates of inspection. marked-up record
documents (as provided in paragraph 6.19\ and other docu-
ments-all as required by the Contract Documents. and after
ENGINEER has indicated that the Work is acceptable (sub-
ject to the provisions of paragraph 14.16). CONTRACTOR
may make application for final payment following the pro-
cedure for progress payments. The final Application for Pay-
ment shall be accompanied by all documentation called for
in the Contract Documents. together with complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all
Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In
lieu thereof and as approved by OWNER. CONTRACTOR
may furnish receipts or releases in full: an affidavit of CON-
TRACTOR that the releases and receipts include all labor.
servIces. material and equipment for which a Lien could be
filed. and that all payrolls. material and equipment bills. and
other indebtedness connected with the Work for which
OWNERorOWNER's propeny might in any way be respon-
sible. have been paid or otherwise satisfied: and consent of
the surety. if any. to final payment. If any Subcontractor or
Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipt in full. CON-
TRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfac-
tory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fi1UJl Payment and Acceptance:
14.13. If. on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of
the Work during construction and final inspection. and
ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment
and accompanying documentation--all as required by the
Contract Documents. ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work
has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled. ENGI-
NEER will. within ten days after receipt of the final Appli-
cation for Payment. indicate in writing ENGINEER's rec-
ommendation of payment and present the Application to
OWNER for payment. Thereupon ENGINEER will give
written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work
is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.16.
I
I
I
I
28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Otherwise. ENGINEER will return the Application to CON-
TRACTOR. indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to
recommend final payment. in which case CONTRACTOR
shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Appli-
cation. Thirty days after presentation to OWNER of the
Application and accompanying documentation. in appropri-
ate form and substance. and with ENGINEER's recommen-
dation and notice of acceptability. the amount recommended
by ENGIN EER will become due and will be paid by OWNER
to CONTRACTOR. .
14. J4. If. through no fault of CONTRACTOR. final com-
pletion of the Work is significantly delayed and if ENGI-
NEER so confirms. OWNER shall. upon receipt of CON-
TRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommen-
dation of ENGINEER. and without terminating the Agree-
ment. make payment of the balance due for that portion of
the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining
balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed
or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agree.
ment. and if Bonds have been furnished as required in para-
graph 5. I. the written consent of the surety to the payment
of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully com-
pleted and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR
to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such
payment shall be made under the terms and conditions gov-
erning final payment. except that it shall not constitute a
waiver of claims.
Contractor's Continuing ObligaJion:
14.15. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and com-
plete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress
or final payment bv ENGINEER. nor the issuance of a cer-
tificate of Substantial Completion. nor any payment by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents.
nor any use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by
OWNER. nor any act of acceptance by OWNER nor any
failure to do so. nor a'ny review and approval of a Shop
Drawing 6r sample submission. nor the issuance of a notice
of acceptability by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 14.13.
nor an\' correction of defectil'e Work by OWNER will con-
stitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the
Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obli-
gation to pert'orm the Work in accordance with the Contract
DOI:uments lexcept as provided in paragraph 14.161.
Wail'er of Claims:
14.16. The making and acceptance of final paymelll will
conslitute:
14.16.1. a waiver of all claims by OWNER against
CO~TRACTOR. excepl claims arising from unsettled
Liens. from dell'oil'" Work appearing after tinal inspec-
lilln pursuant 10 paragraph 14./1 or from failure III camp"
II'ith the Contract Documenrs or the terms of al1\ special
guarantc:es specified therein: however. ir will nllt consri-
lute a waiver hy OWN ER of any rights in rc:sp":Cl Ilf
.-:'t.
CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Con-
tract Documents: and
14.16.2. a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR
against OWNER other than those previously made in writ-
ing and still unsettled.
ARTICLE IS-SUSPENSION OF WORK .-\ND
TERMINATION
Owner May Suspend Work:
15.1. OWNER may. at any time and without cause, sus-
pend the Work or any ponion thereof for a period of not more
than ninety days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and
ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be
resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time. or both.
directly attributable to any suspension if CONTRACTOR
makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles )1
and 12.
Owner May TermiTUlle:
15.2. Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the
following events:
15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary case
under any chapter of. the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11. United
States Code). as now or hereafter in effect. or if CON-
TRACTOR takes any equivalent or similar action by filing
a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state
law in effect at such time relaling to the bankruptcy or
insolvency:
15.2.2. if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR
under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code as now or
hereafter in effect at the time' of filing. or if a petition is
filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief against
CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state law in
effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or insolvency.:
15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment
for the benefit of creditors:
15.2.4. if a trustee. receiver. custodian or agent of
CONTRACTOR is appointed under applicable law or under
contract. whose appointment or authority to take charge
of propeny of CONTRACTOR is for the purpose of
enforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose
of general administration of such propeny for the benefit
of CONTRACTOR's creditors:
15.2.5. if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an inabil-
ity to pay its debts generally as they become due:
15.2.6. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
29
(including. but not limited to. failure to supply sufficient
skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or
failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under
paragraph 2.9 as revised from time to time):
15.2.7. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regu-
lations of any public body having jurisdiction:
15.2.8. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of
ENGINEER: or
15.2.9. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any
substantial way any provisions of the Contract Docu-
ments:
OWNER may. after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety.
if there be one) seven days' written notice and to the extent
permitted by Laws and Regulations. terminate the services
of CONTRACTOR. exclude CONTRACTOR from the site
and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's
tools. appliances. construction equipment and machinery at
the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used
by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for
trespass or conversion). incorporate in the Work all materials
and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has
paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. and
finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such
case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any
funher payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid
balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct. indirect and
consequential costs of completing the Work (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers. architects. attor-
neys and other professionals and coun and arbitration costs)
such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such costs
exceed such unpaid balance. CONTRACTOR shall pay the
difference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by OWNER will
be approved as to reasonableness bv ENGINEER and incor-
porated in a Change Order. but when exercising any rights
or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required
to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
I
15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so
terminated by OWNER. the termination will not affect any
rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then
existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or
payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will
not release CONTRACTOR from liability.
I
I
15.4. Upon seven days' written notice to CONTRAC-
TOR and ENGINEER. OWNER may. without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy. elect to aban-
don the Work and terminate the Agreement. In such case.
CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work executed and any
expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses. which
will include. but not be limited to. direct. indirect and con-
sequential costs (including. but not limited to. fees and charges
of engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionals
and coun and arbitration costs).
I
I
I.
COnlrtlClOr May 5tDp Work or Terminale:
15.5. If. through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR. the
Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by
OWNER or under an order of coun or other public authority.
or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment
within thiny days after it is subinitted. or OWNER fails for
thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally deter-
mined to be due. then CONTRACTOR may. upon seven
days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER. terminate
the Agreement and recover from OWNER payment for all
Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable
termination expenses. In addition and in lieu of terminating
the Agreement. if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Appli-
cation for Payment or OWNER has failed to make any pay-
ment as aforesaid. CONTRACTOR may upon seven days'
written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work
until payment of all amounts then due. The provisions of this
paragraph shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the obligations
under paragraph 6.29 to carry on the Work in accordance
with the progress schedule and without delay during disputes
and disagreements with OWNER.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. [The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally.]
I
I
I
30
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 16--ARBITRATION
~..., ..'::1: ~ .
",f .....,.
16.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of, or relating to, the Contract Docu-
ments or the breach thereof shall be decided under Georgia Law in the
Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia.
(The remainde~ of this page was left blank intentionally.)
31
32
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
(This page was left blank intentionally.)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE l7-MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice:
17.1. Whenever any prOVISIon of the Contract Docu-
ments requires the giving of written notice. it will be deemed
to have been validly given if delivered in person to the indi-
vidual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the
corporation for whom it is intended. or if delivered at or sent
by registered or certified mail. postage prepaid. to the last
business address known to the giver of the notice.
Computation of Time:
17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the
Contract Documents by days. it will be computed to exclude
the first and include the last day of such period. If the last
day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or
on a day made a legal holiday by the Jaw of the applicable
jurisdiction. such day will be omitted from the computa-
tion.
17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured
from midnight to the next midnight shall constitute a day.
General:
17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury
or damage to person or propeny because of any error. omis-
sion or act of the other party or of any of the other pany' s
employees or agents or others for whose acts the other pany
is legally liable. claim will be made in writing to the other
party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such
injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 17.3 shall
not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the pro-
visions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these Gen-
eral Conditions and the rights and remedies available here-
under to the parties hereto. and. in panicular but without
limitation. the warranties. guarantees and obligations imposed
upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.30. 13.1. 13. I::!. 13.14.
14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to
OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder. are in addition to.
and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of. any
rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are
otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations. by
special waiTanty or guarantee or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents. and the provisions of this paragraph
will be as etTective as if repeated specifically in the Contract
Documents in connection with each particular duty. obliga-
tion. right and remedy to which they apply. All representa-
tions. warranties and guarantees made in the Contract Doc-
uments will survive final payment and termination or com-
pletion of the Agreement.
33
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1.1 OWNER'S LIABILITY & PROPERTY INSURANCE:
section 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 5.10 of the General
Conditions shall be amended as follows:
No additional liability or property insurance will be
purchased by Augusta-Richmond County for this project.
CUrrent insurance coverages will remain in effect for
the life of this Contract.
1.2 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY:
As indicated under section 5.3 of the General Conditions,
the Contractor's Liability Insurance shall be in an amount not
less than $200,000 for injuries, including accidental death, to
anyone person, and subject to the same limit for each person,
in an amount not less than $500,000 on account of one accident,
and Contractor's Property Damage Insurance in an amount not -
less than $100,000 for all property damage sustained by anyone
person in anyone accident; and a limit of liability of not
less than $200,000 for any such damage sustained by two or more
persons in anyone accident.
The Contractor shall either (1) require each of his
subcontractors to procure and to maintain during the life of
his subcontract, Subcontractor's Liability and Property Damage
Insurance of the type and in the same amounts as specified in
the preceding paragraph, or (2) insure the activities of his
subcontractors in his own policy.
1.3 SPECIAL HAZARDS:
The Contractor's and his Subcontractor's Liability and
property Damage Insurance shall provide adequate protection
against the following special hazards:
(a) Work within the right-of-ways of the Augusta-Richmond
County Road system.
(b) Work within easements granted by property owners in
connection with the construction of the project.
(c) Work in close proximity to existing water lines,
power lines, telephone lines, gas lines, other
utilities and private structures contiguous to the
job site.
SC-1
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4 TESTING LABORATORY:
All testing and' l'aboratory work ib'.;'connection therewith
shall. be performed by an independent firm and paid for by the
Contractor. Copies of all test reports shall be forwarded to
Augusta-Richmond County Public Works. There will be no
separate payment for this work.
1.5 SURVEYS:
The Contractor will provide surveying for construction
staking, horizontal control and vertical control as necessary.
1.6 PROGRESS PAYMENT:.
Section 14.2 of the General Conditions shall be amended as
follows:
The contractor may submit monthly estimate for work
completed and materials properly stored as approved
by the Engineer. When an estimate includes
materials stored, a bill of sale, invoice or other
documentation warranting that the OWner is receiving
the material free and clear of all liensl charges,
security interest and other encumbrances shall be
attached to the payment request.
1. 7 ENGINEER:
All references to "Engineer" shall be interpreted to mean
the Augusta-Richmond County Engineer, or his official designee.
1.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES: (References 4.3, 1.4, 3.2)
The Contractor shall coordinate .wi th all utility companies
through the "one call" method or other appropriate steps to
locate and avoid damage to all utilities that may affect or be
affected by the Contractor's work.
1.9 SAFETY : (Reference 6.20)
The Contractor shall use certified flagmen, barricades and
signs as necessary to notify the public, in particUlar those
persons. driving in the vicinity' of the project, of the
construction and its affect on traffic. .
SC-2
I ......
.......'t~
,It. .-,"
. ~ ~'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION P
PROPOSAL
.
03-~.~fl
Date:
Gentlemen:
In compliance with your invitation for bids dated
, 19~, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish
all labor,' equipment, .and materials, and to perform all work
for the installation of streets, and appurtenances referred
to herein as:
Traffic Engineering Improvements, Phase I
s. R. 56 @Marvin Griffin Road
s. R. 56 @ Apple Valley Drive
s. R. 28 (Washington Road) @ Boy Scout Road
Various Intersections .along Gordon High~ay
Project Number: 57-8590~096
in strict accordance with the Contract Docwnent:.s and in
consideration of the amounts shown on the Bid Schedule
attached hereto and totaling:
E~~~--br -itJ~rA -()ir\D--hll~~, ~jh~d-~
DOLLARS($~____)
.
The undersigned hereby agreestha 1:., upon ~ i t:.ten
acceptance of this bid, he will within 10 days of receipt of
such notice execute' a formal contract agreement with the
OWNER, and that he will provide the bond or guaram:ees
required by the Contract Documents.
The undersigned hereby agrees that, if awarded the
contract, he will commence the work within 10 calendar
. days after the date of written notice to proceed, and ~hat he
will complete the work within 100 calendar days.
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the
following addenda:
ND't'\L
.. "
Respectfull
. Submi t 1:. 20.
kJn,~
~j 6f\
(Name
By:
P-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Traffic Engineering Improvements, Phase I
Project Number: 57-8590-096
.
DETATT.ED ESTIMATE
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION
mrrT
gn PRICB
AMOUNT
llHn
610~6610 Remove Luminaire
52 41d;jJ.oP~ ~
Each
647-2001 Traffic Signal
System Modification
(site 1) Lump
1 d4 qQO. ~ ~()I qqD, c;9.
"
..
647-2002 Traffic Signal
System Modification
(site 2) Lump
1~~
647-2003
Traffic Signal
System Modification
(Site 3)
1
~ q/{) gg
s; q JD, CB
~~~~
Lump
TOTAL
\
ITEM NUMBER 610-6610, Remove lumina ire includes the removal of existing metal
luminaires, appurtenances and bases, filling remaining holes, compaction and
restoration of the areas where ,luminaires were removed. It also includes
transporting these items to the Urban District Electrical Department at 1708
Highland Avenue. This should be coordinated with Mr. Robert Andersoa,
Electrical Superintendent, phone (706)738-6419. Locations of the luminaires
are shown on maps contained in this document.
ITEM NUMBER 647-2001, Traffic Signal System Modification (Site 1) at state
Route 56 and Marvin Griffin Road includes the following: Removal of existing
timber or concrete strain poles; installation of new prestressed concrete
strain poles, Type IV; removal/relocation and installation of pull boxes and
conduits; and installation of loops.
ITEM NUMBER 647-2002, Traffic Signal System Modification"" (Site 2) ," 'state
Route 56 at Apple Valley Drive includes the following: Removal of existing
concrete strain poles; installation of new prestressed ~pncrete strain poles,
Type IV; remova~/relocation and installation of pull boxes and conduits;
installation of loops; removal of approximately 80 feet of existing concrete
curb and gutter; installation of approximately 110 yards of new base and
pavement system and 80 feet of new 6"X30" concrete curb and gutter.
,
ITEM NUMBER 647-2003, Traffic Signal system Modification (Site 3),
Route 2 B (Washington Road) at Boy Scout Road includes the removal
existing strain pole and installation of a new prestressed concrete
pole, Type IV. '
State
of an
strain
P-2
@
C)
~
~
~
::t
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
:+.
'1:'-
"
-y\1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
@
~
~
~
~
-
I
::t
~
~
-' .
::0
m.
3:'
'0
<
fTI
...... - . .
I\)
'1:J
o
r
,."
(J)
-
--
..--
. ..
-'~ .
.-'t."
_.
-
.- !
-
L. - V\I
.. -
.--
.. ..'
,.
'. -
-.
..
,.
.
C)
~
~
\::)
~
::l:
~
"""
.
:0
IT1
s:
o
<
III
-
o
1]
o
r
IT1
(J)
~ - v-.J
~
WHEELESS RO
-.
.
- ---
~~
~
(J)
~
41
<I)
""'1 @
-
FAIR VIEW STI
. .
~
-'-'
-'cl
r. ~::--
I
I
I
I
@
-t -~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
I
.j
j'
C\
~
~
~
.~
::t
~
,
::0
fTI
3:
o
<
(TJ
-
-
-0
o
r
rrJ
CJ)
@
.s - W'
~
~
~
.~
<::)
~
:t
~
""(
~
.~
I
.
...
iO
o-
r
.l"1l.,
en- ',-
:0
111
3:
o
.<
ITl
-00
~
-
_.
"
.,'
j
I
I
I
~
~:-~
t?-V\j
,
@
-
-0
o
r
(TI
,
;'
;'
/ / 9(\'<1
-' '<1 .l> 5 (\
'-
""
/' .~\ (\
/' ~ \ v'
\
\
\
\
.\
\
\
,
::0
ITI
~
o
<
fTJ
-
1J
o
r
(TJ
\.
\
\
'\.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'l'RAJ'I'IC DJGIHBERIIlG IXPROVBHDITS, PHASB I
S. R. 5' , HARVIll GRII'I'IIl ROAD
S. R. 5' (I APPLB VALLBY DRIVE
S. R. 28 (WASHIIlGTOIl ROAD) . BOY SCOUT ROAD
VARIOUS IIr.l'BRSECTIOIlS ALOIlG GORDaIl HIGHWAY
PROJECT IlUKBBR: 57-8590-09'
G~ NOTES
CASINGS:
All steel casings being. installed across any roadway and/or
right-of-way shall have the joints continuously welded to
obtain a watertight seal. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer when welds are ready for inspection. Welded casings
backfilled without the Engineer'S approval shall be uncovered
for inspection at the Engineer'S request.
COMPACTION:
All compaction shall be as defined in the current edition of
Georgia Department of Transportation Specifications. Special
attention shall be given to the backfill or minor structures
(pipe, box culverts, manholes, catch basins, drop inlets,
etc.). Compaction shall be achieved using approved tamps and
soil layers of approximately 6 inches (loose measure) and in
accordance with Georgia Department of Transportation Standards
1030-0 and 1401. BaCkfilling operations of this nature shall
not begin until the Contractor has on hand all equipment in
good working condition, and competent operators.
CONCRETE:
The Contractor shall have a slump cone on the project at all
times . when concrete is being placed.. . He shall, in the
Engineer'S presence, perform slump tests as directed by the
Engineer. Tests shall be performed by qualified personnel
with a properly cleaned slump cone. Allowable slumps are 2"
minimum and 4" maximum. Class "A" concrete shall have a
minimum 'of 611 lbs. cement per cubic yard. Class "B" concrete
shall have a minimum of 470 lbs. cement per cubic yard.
Concrete not meeting these requirements will be rejected by
the Engineer.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT:
Construction layout work shall be performed by the Contractor.
See section 149 of the Standard Specifications.
G-1
EXCESS MATERIAL:
All excess material is to be disposed of as directed by the
Engineer or as noted in Subsection 107.23 of the
Specifications.
FINISHING AND DRESSING:
All unpaved and natural areas which are. disturbed by the
construction of this project are to be. returned to the pre-
existing shape and slope and then finished and dressed. No
separate payment will be made for grassing, fertilizing and
mulching of disturbed areas, unless specifically shown as a
pay item.
FLAGGING:
Flaggers shall be provided as required to handle traffic, as
specified in the Plans or Special Provisions, and as required
by the Engineer.
All. flaggers shall meet the requirement of part 6F of the
MUTeD and must have received training and a certificate upon
completion of the training from a Department approved training
program. Failure to provide certified flaggers as required
above shall be reason for the Engineer suspending work
involving the flagger(s) until the Contractor provides the
certified flagger(s).
Flaggers shall wear a fluorescent orange cap or hat, and a
fluorescent orange vest, shirt, or jacket, and shall use a
stop/Slow paddle meeting the requirements of section 6F-2 of
the MUTCD for controlling traffic. The Stop/Slow paddle shall
have a shaft length of six (6) feet minimum. In addition to
the flag as an additional device to attract attention. For
night work, the vest shall have reflectorized stripes on front
and back.
Signs for flagger traffic control shall be placed in advance
of the flagging operation in accordance with the MUTCD. In
addition to the signs required by the MUTCD, signs at regular
intervals, warning of the presence of the flagger shall be
placed beyond the point where traffic can reasonably be
expected to stop under the most severe conditions for that
day's work.
INSPECTION:
This project will be inspected by the Engineer or his
Representative.
G-2
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RIGHT-OF-WAY AND EASEMENTS:
The Contractor shall not perform any work outside the limits
of the riqht-of-way or easements. In addition, no equipment
or material shall be placed outside these areas without
written permission of both the property owner and the
Enqineer.
In the event that the Contractor elects to utilize private
property for any purpose connected with the project such as,
but not limited to, staqinq areas, equipment and/or material
storaqe or simply as a convenience, he shall submit a written
agreement to the Enqineer containinq vital information such as
limits of both area and time the property is to be utilized
and a description of the intended use. The agreement must be
siqned by both the property owner and the Contractor and will
be reviewed and recorded by the Enqineer. Such aqreements
must be submitted prior to the Contractor's use of the
property.
SPECIFICATIONS:
This project is based upon, and shall be constructed in
accordance with, the State of Georqi~ Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction of
Roads and Bridqes, current Edition and any supplements
thereto. All of these specifioations shall be considered as
thouqh fully contained herein. In cases where conflicts arise
within these specifications, they will be revised to resolve
such conflict. Until the conflict is resolved, the
interpretation of the Enqineer shall control the situation.
STANDARDS:
This project shall be constructed in accordance with current
Georqia Department of Transportation Roadway Standards.
SUBCONTRACTORS:
The Contractor shall furnish the official name of all firms he
proposes to use as Subcontractors in the work. This
information should be furnished at the Preconstruct ion
Conference. However, no work shall be done on this project by
a Subcontractor until the Contractor receive written approval
of his Subcontractor(s) from the Enqineer. The Enqineer shall
notify the Contractor, in writinq within 10 calendar days
whether or not approval of the Subcontractor(s) is qranted.
G-3
TESTING OF THE WORK:
The Contractor shall employ a qualified materials testing
laboratory to monitor more fully the quality of materials and
work and to perform such tests as may be required under the
contract documents as conditions for acceptance of materials
and work. THE ENGINEER MAY ORDER TESTING AT ANY TIME HE DEEMS
PROPER TO CONTROL THE QUALITY OF THE WORK.
Concrete compressive strength
project (see section 500 of
Transportation Specifications).
where necessary.
tests are required on this
the Georgia Department of
Other tests may be required
All test results are to be submitted to the Engineer. No
separate payment will be made for employing the testing
laboratory or any required tests.
On projects that include asphaltic concrete, cores shall be
cut in the asphaltic concrete at random locations, selected by
the Engineer, to verify thicknesses. A minimum of three (3)
cores per mile or three (3) cores per project, whichever is
greater, shall be cut by the Contractor. If all thicknesses
are satisfactory, in accordance with Section 400 of the
Department of Transportation specifications, no further cores
will be required. If cores indicate an unsatisfactory
thickness, additional cores, as determined by the Engineer'and
at locations of the Engineer's choosing, shall be cut to
determine the extent of the unsatisfactory thickness.
Corrections as shown in Section 400 of the Department of
Transportation Specifications shall be made where required.
There will be no separate payment for cutting cores, filling
core holes or corrective work. Payment shall be included in
the price bid for asphaltic concrete items or in the overall
bid price of the contract.
TRAFFIC CONTROL:
The Contractor shall provide construction signs in accordance
with requirements of "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices for Streets and Highways", current edition with added
supplements and special provisions.
The attention of the Contractor is specifically directed to
Subsection 107.09 of the Standard specifications regarding
barricades, danger, warning, and detour signs.
All temporary signs, barricades, flashing lights, striping and
any other traffic control devices required during construction
of this project shall meet all requirements of the M.U.T.C.D.,
current edition, as directed by the Enqineer and furnished by
the Contractor with payment in accordance with Section 150.
G-4
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'..
?'"
..' .
The contractor shall so conduct his operations that there will
be a minimum of interference with, or interruption of, traffic
on the travelway. This applies to the initial installation
and the continuing maintenance and operation of the facility.
At least one-lane, two-way traffic shall be maintained at all
times unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. As a
minimum, the Contractor must comply with the manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices, current edition and Georgia Standard
9102.
UTILITIES:
The Contractor's attention is directed to the possibility of
encountering private utility installations consisting of
sanitary sewers, water, sprinkler systems, ornamental light
systems, gas upderground telephone cables, etc. that either
are obstructions to the prosecution of the work and need to be
moved out of the way or, if not, must be properly protected
during construction. No separate payment will be made for
this work. Public utilities of this nature will be handled by
the utility owner.
UTILITY ACCOMMODATION POLICY:
In so far as possible work shall be scheduled so that
open excavations will not be left overnight. Where trenches,
pits or other excavations are within the clear roadside areas
and cannot be backfilled before leaving the job site, they
shall be covered by timbers or metal plates and protected by
reflectorized and/or lighted barricades as appropriate and as
directed by the Engineer. Barricades sufficient to prevent a
person from falling into an excavated or work area must be
erected in areas where these conditions exist.
G-S
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
SPECIAL PROVISION
SECTION 1SD-TRAFFIC CONTROL
August 28, 1995
First Use: October 20, 1995
Modification of Special Provision
Section 150 - Traffic Control (Rev. June 21,1994)
Retain Section 150 as written and add the following:
For this project, all references to flags on construction warning signs in the Standard Construction Details
listed below are deleted except for signs which are mounted at less than seven (7') feet in height (portable
signs).
Standard Construction Details
· Typical By-Pass Detour for Two-Lane Highway
· Typical Detour Across Median
· Transition of 4-Lane Divided Highway to 2-Lane Highway
· Traffic Control General Notes, Standard Legend, Miscellaneous Details
In addition, G20-1, G20-2A, and W20-1 signs shown on Georgia Standards 9102, 9106, 9107, and
applicable Standard Construction Details shall conform to Part VI of the MUTCD, Revision 3, dated
September 3, 1993.
150.02 WORK ZONES: Delete 'Work Zones" and substitute: Temporary Traffic Control Zones.
150.02. 8.2.: Delete last sentence and substitute: Channelization device spacing shall be 10 feet for 200
feet in advance of the temporary gore, and 10 feet for the first 100 feet of the temporary gore.
150.03. F.1. MATERIALS - INTERIM SIGNS: Retain as written and add second paragraph.
Posts for all interim signs shall be constructed to yield upon impact unless the posts are protected
by guardrail, portable barrier, impact attenuator or other type of positive barrier protection.
Unprotected posts shall meet the breakaway requirements of the "1985 AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaries and Traffic Signals".
Unprotected post sPlices will not be permitted any higher than four inches above the ground line
to lessen the possibility of affecting the undercarriage of a vehicle.
lS0.03.H. CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGNS: CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGNS THAT ARE
REQUIRED TO BE MOUNTED AT SEVEN FEET IN HEIGHT NO LONGER REQUIRE THE USE OF
WARNING FLAGS.
Delete first sentence of second paragraph and substitute:
Construction warning signs which are mounted at less than seven feet in height (portable signs) shall
have two 18 inch x 18 inch fluorescent red-orange or orange-red warning flags mounted on each sign.
TC-/
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
~.-. _..t'!~'
..~... ',....;~-,
150.04.E.2.a.2.:Retain as written and add: In lane shift areas skip lines are not allowed. Solid lines are
required. . .
150.04. E.2.b.1.: Retain as written and add: In lane shift areas skip lines are not allowed. Solid lines are
required.
150.05. D. TEMPORARY GUARDRAIL ANCHORAGE: Delete all references to Type 9 and substitute Tj'pe
11 (eleven).
150~ oj 0 PAYMENT: Item No. 641 . Delete reference to Type 9 and substitute Type 11 (eleven).
SPECIAL PROVISION
SECTION 1SD-TRAFFIC CONTROL
June 22,1994
First Use: July 24, 1994
Modification of Standard Specifications, 1993 Edition
Retain Section 150 as written and add the following:
For this projeCt, all references in the Standard Construction Details listed below to Type I Barricades,
Type II Barricades, Type "A" flashing-lights and Type "C" steady burn lights are deleted, except that
Type "C" lights will be required for tapers in nighttime lane closures.
Standard Construction Details
· Typical By-Pass Detour for Two-Lane Highway
· Typical Detour Across Median
· Transition of 4-Lane Divided Highway to 2-Lane Highway
· Traffic Control General Notes, Standard Legend, Miscellaneous Details
In addition, G20-1, G20-2A, and W20-1 signs shown on Georgia Standards 9102, 9106, 9107, and
applicable Standard Construction Details shall conform to Part VI of the MUTCD, Revision 3, dated
September 3, 1993.
Detail "A" as shown on Georgia Standard 4960 is deleted.
SPECIAL PROVISION
SECTION 1SD-TRAFFIC CONTROL
Rev. June 21, 1994
First Use: July 24,1994
Rev.: August 16, 1994
Modification of the Standard Specifications, Current Edition
Delete Section 150 as written and substitute the following:
150.01 DESCRIPTION: This section as supplemented by the Plans, Specifications, and MUTCD shall be
considered the Traffic Control Plan. Activities shall consist of furnishing, installing, maintaining, and
removing necessary traffic signs, barricades, lights, signals, cones, pavement markings and other traffic
control devices and shall include flagging and other means for guidance and protection of vehicular and
-rc-z-
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
pedestrian traffic through the Work Zone. 'This Work shali include both maintaining existing devices
(excluding Traffic Signals) and installing additional devices as necessary in construction work zones.
When any provisions of this Specification or the Plans do not meet the minimum requirements of the
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), the MUTCD controls. 'The 1988 Edition of the
MUTCD and Revision 3, dated September, 1993, of Part VI shall be in effect for the duration of the
project.
A The Contractor shall designate a qualified individual as the Worksite Traffic Control Supervisor
(WTCS) who shall be responsible for selecting, installing and maintaining all traffic control devices
in accordance with the Plans, SpecificatioRS, Special Provisions and theMUTCD. 'This individual's
traffic control responsibilities shall have priority over all other assigned duties.
As the representative of the Contractor, the WTCS shall have full authority to act on behalf of the
Contractor in administering the Traffic Control Plan. The WTCS shall have appropriate training in
safe traffic control practices in acCordance with Part VI of the MUTCD. In addition to the WTCS all
others making decisions regarding traffic control must meet the training requirements of Part VI of
the MUTCD. On projects where traffic control duties will not require full time supervision, the
Engineer may allow tlle Contractor's Project Superintendent to serve as the WTCS as long as
satisfactory results are obtained.
The WTCS shall have a copy of the MUTCD on the job site. Copies of current MUTCD may be
obtained from:
U.S. Government Printing Office
Superintendent of Documents
Mail Stop: SSGP
Washington, D.C. 20402-9328
The WTCS shall be available on a 24-hour basis as needed to maintain traffic control devices with
access to all personnel, materials and equipment necessary to respond effectively to an emergency
situation within forty-five (45) minutes of notification of the emergency.
The WTCS shall supervise the initial installation of traffic control devices which will be reviewed by
the Engineer prior to the beginning of construction. Modifications to traffic control devices as required
by sequence of operations or staged construction must be reviewed by the WTCS. The WTCS shall
regularly perform inspections to ensure that traffic control is maintained.
B. All traffic control devices used during the construction of a project shall meet the Standards utilized
in the MUTCD, and shall comply with the requirements of these Specifications, Project Plans, and
Special Provisions. Reference is made to Subsections 104.05, 107.07, and 107.09.
C. All reflectorization for construction (black on orange) signs, object markers, and channelization
devices shall meet tbe requirements of Section 913, Type I! or II! unless otberwise specified. All other
signs shall meet the requirements of Type I unless otherwise specified.
D. No work shall be started on any project phase until the appropriate traffic control devices have been
placed in accordance with Project requirements. Changes to traffic flow shall not commence unless
all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to make the changes are available on the Project.
E. The Contractor shall secure the Engineer's approval of the Contractor's proposed plan of operation,
sequence of work and methods of providing for the safe passage of vehicular and pedestrian traffic
before it is placed in operation. The proposed plan of operation should supplement,the approved
traffic control plan. Any major changes to the approved traffic control plan, proposed by the
Contractor, are to be submitted to tbe Department for approval in accordance with Subsection 104.03
of the Standard Specifications.
-rC-3
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
Some additional traffic control details will be required prior to any major shifts of traffic. The traffic
control details shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. A detailed drawing showing traffic location and laneage for each step of the change.
2. The location, size, and message of all signs required by the MUTCD, Plans, Special Provisions,
and other signs as required to fit conditions.
3. The method to be used in, and the limits of, the obliteration of conflicting lines and markings.
4. Type, location, and extent of new lines and markings.
5. Horizontal and vertical alignment and superelevation rates for detours, including cross section
and profile grades along each edge of existing pavement.
6. Drainage details for temporary and permanent alignments.
7. Location, length, and/or spacing of channelization and protective devices (temporary barrier,
guardrail, barricades, etc.)
8. Starting time, duration and date of planned change.
9. For each traffic shift, a paving plan, erection plan, or work site plan, as appropriate, detailing
workforce, materials, and equipment necessary to accomplish the proposed work.. This will be the
minimum resource allocation required in order to start the work..
The above details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days prior to the
anticipated traffic shift. The Contractor shall have traffic control details for a traffic shift which has
been approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of the physical shift. All preparatory work
relative to the traffic shift which does not interfere with traffic shall be accomplished prior to the
designated starting time. The Engineer and the Contractor's representative will verify that all
conditions have been met prior to the Contractor obtaining materials for the actual traffic shift.
F. Traffic control devices shall be in acceptable condition when first erected on the project and shall be
m~intained in accordance with Subsection 104.05 throughout the construction period. All
unacceptable traffic control devices shall be replaced within 24 hours. When not in use, all traffic
cOntrol devices shall be removed, placed or covered so as not to be visible to traffic. If traffic control
devices are left in place for more than ten days after completion of the Work, the Department shall
have the right to remove such devices, claim possession thereof, and deduct the cost of such removal
from any monies due, or which may become due, the Contractor.
G. The Department reserves the right to restrict construction operations when, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the continuance of the Work would seriously hinder traffic flow on days immediately before,
on, or after holidays or other days in which unusual traffic conditions exist, including threatening or
inclement weather.
150.02 WORK ZONES:
A. In addition to the other provisions contained herein, work zone traffic control shall be accomplished
using the following means and materials:
1. Portable advance warning signs as required by the contract or meeting the requirements of the
MUTCD and Sub-Section 150.03.
2. Portable sequential or flashing arrow panels as shown in the Plans or Specifications for use on
Interstate or multi-lane highway lane closure only, shall be a minimum size of 48" high by 96"
TC-~
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
wide with not less than 15 lamps used for the arrow. The arrow will occupy virtually the entire
size of the arrow panel and shall have a minimum legibility distance of one mile. The minimum
legibility distance is that distance at which the arrow panel can be comprehended by an observer
on a surmy day, or clear night. Arrow panels shall be equipped with automatic dimming features
for use during hours of darkness. The arrow panels shall also meet the requirements as shown
in the MUTCD. The sequential or flashing arrow panels shall not be used for lane closures on two-
lane, two-way highways when traffic is restricted to one-lane operations in which case,
appropriate signing, flaggers and when required, pilot vehicles will be deemed sufficient.
3. Portable changeable message signs meeting the requirements of Section 632 and the MUTeD.
4. Channelization devices meeting the standards of the MUTeD and Subsection 150.05.
5. Precast concrete barrier meeting the requirements of Section 622.
6. Temporary traffic signals meeting the requirements of Section 647.
7. Pavement marking materials complying with Subsection 150.04.A.
B. LANE CLOSURES:
1. All lane closures shall have prior approval of the Engineer. Lane closures that require same
direction traffic to be split around the Work Area will not be approved for roadways with posted
speeds of 35 mph or greater, excluding turn lanes.
2. On multilane highways where traffic has been shifted to the inside lanes for overnight use, the
entrance and exit ramps shall have channelization devices placed on both sides of the ramp. The
temporary ramp taper length shall be greater than, or equal to, the existing taper length. Interim
EXIT gore signs shall be placed at the ramp divergence. Charmelization device spacing in the first
100 feet of the temporary gore shall be 25 feet.
3. Termination Area: The transition to normal or full width highway at the end of a lane closure
shall be a maximum of 150 feet.
4. To provide the greatest possible convenience to the publi~ in accordance with Subsection 107.07,
the Contractor shall remove all signs, lane closure markings, and devices immediately when lane
closure work is completed or temporarily suspended for any length of time or as directed by the
Engineer.
C. TRAFFIC PACING METHOD:
1. PACING OF TRAFF1C: With prior approval from the Engineer, traffic may be paced allowing the
Contractor up to ten (10) minutes maximum to work in or above all lanes of traffic for the
following purposes:
a. Placing bridge members or other bridge work..
b. Placing overhead sign structures.
c. Other work items requiring interruption of traffic.
\)
The Contractor shall provide a uniformed police officer with patrol vehicle and blue flashing light for
each direction of pacing. The police officer, Engineer, and naggers at ramps shall be provided with a
radio which will provide continuous contact with th~ Contractor.
TC-S-
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
'.~"'. ~\
..~;" '. '-, ,......;.
When ready to start the work activity, the police vehicle will pull into the travel lanes and act as a
pilotvehicle slowing the traffic thereby providing a gap in traffic allowing the Contractor to perform
the Work. Anyon-ramps between the pace and the work area shall be blocked during pacing of traffic,
with a flagger properly dressed and equipped with a Stop/Slow paddle. Each ramp should be opened
after the police vehicle has passed.
Pilot vehicles shall travel at a safe pace speed, desirably not less than 20 mph interstate and 10 mph
non-interstate. The Contractor shall provide a vehicle to proceed in front of the police vehicle and
behind the other traffic in order to inform the Contractor's work force when all vehicles have cleared
the area.
Traffic will not be permitted to stop during pacing except in extreme cases as approved by the
Engineer.
2. METHODS OF SIGNING FOR TRAFFIC PACING: At a point not less than 1,000 feet in advance of
the beginning point of the pace, the Contractor shall erect and cover a W-special sign (72 inch x 72
inch) with a Type liB" flashing light, with the legend "TRAFFIC SLOWED AHEAD SHORT DELAY"
(See Detail 150-A). A portable changeable message sign may be used in lieu of the W-special sign. On
divided highways this sign shall be double indicated. A worker with a two-way radio shall be posted
at the sign, and upon notice that the traffic is to be paced shall turn on the flashing light and reveal
the sign. When traffic is not being paced, the flashing light shall be turned off and the sign covered
or removed. W-special signs are reflectorized black on orange, Series "c" letters and border of the size
specified.
-rc:-'-r;
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
1m ... fLlSHllIi LIGHT ON TltAH Ie SIDE
,8 MMCIN
,1~8 IlCIAD(R
'8 RADIUS
SJ8
19.5..
s.
7Z.
....iiJ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
'0. r . sz- ., 10.
~~(Q)'~[Q)
U-," U. ""-'5
~~~~[Q)
~~@!Rl] ..~~~~ Yf
t.,-I. :.~ .L.':I
,.
128
'2. SER. .C.
15.
12-
tZ. SER. .c- .
G-
12.
U. SEA. .C.
4.
II-
. - SEA. .C.
J-Sl'tC I AI. S I Gill
(TtIlrtlWn' I"OS T w:u41E D I
S I CH SHAL L HA V[ Il AO: L [Ci(1C) AIill 8lJlDE It
Del 0fW<<j[ REFLtC1DRlrED e~(;ftOOHD
DETAIL 150-A
D. The Contractor's trucks and other vehicles shall travel in the direction of normal roadway traffic
unless separated by a positive barrier, 'or when construction activity necessitates otherwise, and shall
not reverse direction except at intersections, interchanges, or approved temporary crossings.
E. The Contractor shall ensure that dust, mud, and other debris from construction activities do not
interfere with normal traffic operations or adjacent properties.
F. Existing street lighting shall remain lighted as long as practical and until removal is approved by the
Engineer.
G. Adequate temporary lighting shall be provided at all nighttime work sites where workers will be
immediately adjacent to traffic.
H. For their own protection, workers in or adjacent to traffic during nighttime operation shall wear
reflectorized vests.
/ t::'-7
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
1. The parking of Contractor's and/or workers personal vehicles within the work area or adjacent to
traffic is prohibited.
J. The Worksite Traffic Control Supervisor C\VTCS) shall monitor the work to ensure that all the rocks,
boulders, construction debris, stockpiled materials, equipment, tools and other potential hazards are
kept clear of the travel way. These items shall be stored in a location, in so far as practical, where they
will not be subject to a vehicle running off the road and striking them.
. K. All existing pedestrian walkways shall be maintained. Whenever changes to the worksite necessitate
changes to existing walkways, temporary walkways shall be provided and maintained, with
appropriate signs as necessary, to allow safe passage of pedestrian traffic.
150.03 SIGNS:
A. When required for proper traffic control during construction of the project, all existing guide, warning,
and regulatory signs shall be maintained by the Contractor in accordance with these Specifications.
Existing street name signs shall be maintained at street intersections. All existing illuminated signs
shall remain lighted and be maintained by the Contractor.
B. When not in use, all inappropriate traffic signs or portions thereof shall be removed, placed or covered
so as not to be visible to traffic. All construction warning signs shall be removed within seven calendar
days after time charges are stopped or pay items are complete. Subsequent punch-list or other work
to be performed shall be accomplished utilizing temporary construction warning signs that shall be
removed daily.
C. The Contractor shall not remove any existing signs and supports without prior approval from the
Engineer. All existing signs and supports which are to be removed shall be stored and protected as
directed by the En'gineer, and become the property of the Department unless otherwise specified in
the contract documents. .
D. Interim guide, warning, or regulatory signs required to direct traffic shall be furnished, installed,
reused and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with the MUTCD, the Plans, Special
Provisions, or as directed by the Engineer. These signs shall remain the property of the Contractor.
The bottom of all interim signs shall be at least seven feet above the level of pavement edge.
E. Existing special guide signs on the Project shall be maintained until conditions require a change in
location or legend content. When change is required, existing signs shall be modified and continued
in use if the required modification can be made within existing sign borders using design
requirements Oegend, letter size, spacing, border, etc.) equal to that 'of the existing signs, or of
Subsection IS0.03.E.S. Differing legend designs shall not be mixed in the same sign.
1. SPECIAL GUIDE SIGNS: Special guide signs are those expressway or freeway guide signs that
are designed with a message content Oegend) that applies to a particular roadway location. When
. an existing special guide sign is in conflict with work to be performed, the Contractor shall remove
the cOnflicting sign and reset it in a new, non-conflicting location which has been approved by the
Engineer.
2. INTERIM SPECIAL GUIDE SIGNS: When it is not possible to utilize existing signs, either in
place or relocated, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, modify, relocate, and remove new
interim special guide signs in accordance with the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
3. INTERIM OVERHEAD GUIDE SIGN STRUCTURES: Interim overhead special guide sign
structures are not required to be lighted unless specifically required by the Plans. Iflighting is
required the sign shall be lighted as soon as erected and shall remain lighted, during the hours
of darkness, until the interim sign is no longer required. The Contractor shall notify the Power
Company at least thirty (30) days prior to desiring connection to the power source.
-rC-8
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
4. The ins~lation of new permanent special guide signs and the permanent modification or
resetting of existing special guide signs, when included in the contract, shall be accomplished as
soon as practical to minimize the use of interim special guide signs. Iflighting is required by the
Plans, all new permanent overhead special guide signs shall be lighted as soon as erected.
5. Interim special guide signs that may be required in addition to, or a replacement for, existing
expressway and freeway (interstate) signs must be designed and fabricated in compliance with
the minimum requirements for guide signing contained in Part 2E "Guide Signs Expressways"
and Part 2F "Guide Signs Freeways" of the MUTCD, except that the minimum size of all letters
. . and numerals in the names of places, streets and highways on all signs shall be 16 inches Series
"E" initial upper-case and 12 inches lower-case. All interstate shields on these signs shall be 48
inches and 60 inches for two-numeral and three-numeral routes, respectively. Additionally, the
exit road name or route shield shall be placed on the exit gore sign. .
F. MATERIALS - INTERIM SIGNS:
1. POSTS - Posts for all interim signs shall meet the requirements of Section 911 except that green
or silver paint may be used in lieu of galvanization for steel posts or structural shape posts. Wood
posts are not required to be pressure treated.
2. SIGN BLANKS AND PANELS - All sign blanks and panels shall conform to Section 912 of the
Specifications except that blanks and panels may be ferrous based or other metal alloys. Type 1
and Type 2 sign blanks shall have a minimum thickness of 0.08 inches regardless of the sign type
used. Alternative sign blank materials (composites, poly carbonates, fiberglass reinforced plastics,
recycled plastics, etc.) shall have a letter of approval from the Office of Materials and Research
for use as interim construction signs before these materials are allowed to be incorporated into
the work.. Signs shall be painted to prevent rust if other metals are used in lieu of aluminum.
Plywood blanks or panels will not be permitted.
G. All existing, interim and new permanent signs shall be installed so as to be completely visible for an
advance distance in compliance with the MUTCD. Limbs, brush, construction equipment and
materials shall be kept clear of the driver's line of sight to the signs.
H. Advance warning signs shall be placed ahead of construction in accordance with Part VI of the
MUTeD and shall include a series of at least three advance road construction (W20-1) signs placed
at the termini of the project. The series shall have the legend ROAD WORK (1500 FEET, 1000 FEET,
AND 500 FEET.) In addition to the above, multi-lane divided highways shall also have the legend
ROAD WORK (2 MILES, 1 MILE, AND 1/2 MILE.) On-ramps and at grade intersecting roadways
shall be signed with a minimum of one ROAD WORK AHEAD sign.
All construction warning signs shall have two 18 inch x 18 inch fluorescent red-orange or orange-red
warning flags mounted on each including the project construction signs (G20-1 and G20-2A.) Project
mileage indicated on the G20-1 sign shall be the actual project mileage rounded up to the nearest
whole mile. All construction warning signs on divided highways shall be double indicated (i.e., on the
left and right sides of the roadway.)
I. The sequential or flashing arrow panels shall be placed on the shoulder at or near the point where
the lane closing transition begins. The panels shall be mounted on a vehicle, trailer, or other suitable
support. Vehicle mounted panels shall be provided with remote controls. Minimum mounting height
shall be seven feet above the roadway to the bottom of the panel, except on vehicle mounted panels
which should be as high as practical.
J. The portable changeable message sign, when specified, shall be placed ahead of construction activities
and shall meet the requirements of Section 632 and theMUTCD. .
-rc-r
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE' OF GEORGIA
K The flashing beacon assembly, when specified, shall be used in conjunction with construction warning
signs, regulatory, or guide signs to inform traffic of special road conditions which require additional
driver attention. The flashing beacon assembly shall be installed in accordance with the requirements
of Section 647.
150.04 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Generally, full pattern pavement markings in accordance with Section 652 and in conformance with
Section 3A and 3B, except 3B-3 and 3B-5, of the MUTCD are required on all courses before the
roadway is opened to traffic. No passing zones shall be marked to conform to Section 150.04 E. Durfug
construction and maintenance activities on all highways open.to traffic, both existing markings and
markings applied under this Section shall be fully maintained until Final Acceptance. If the pavement
markings are, or become, unsatisfactory in the judgement of the Engineer due to wear, weathering,
or construction activities, they shall be restored immediately. On resurfacing projects pavement
markings shall be provided on all surfaces that are placed over existing markings. On widening and
reconstruction projects (where the lane configuration is altered from the pre-construction layout)
pavement markings will be as required by the Plans or the Engineer. On new construction projects
pavement marking plans will be provided.
B. MATERIALS: All traffic striping applied under this Section shall be a minimum four inches in width
and shall conform to the requirements of Section 652, except as modified herein. Raised pavement
markers (RPMs) shall meet the requirements of Section 654. Markings on the fmal surface course
which must be removed shall be a removable type. The Contractor will be permitted to use paint,
thermoplastic, or tape on pavement which is to be overlaid as part of the project, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. Partial (skip) reflectorization (i.e. reflectorizing only a portion of a stripe)
will not be allowed.
C. USAGE: The Contractor shall sequence the work in such a manner as to allow the installation of
markings in the final lane configuration at the earliest possible stage. .
Inappropriate or conflicting existing pavement markings shall be removed:
When shifting of traffic necessitates removal of centerline, lane lines, or edge lines, all such lines shall
be removed prior to, during, or immediately after any change so as to present the least interference
with traffic.
Before any change in traffic lane(s) alignment, marking removal equipment shall be present on the
project for immediate use. If marking removal equipment failures occur, the equipment shall be
repaired or replaced (including leasing equipment if necessary), so that the removal can be
accomplished without delay.
Except for the final swface, markings on asphaltic concrete may be obliterated by an overlay course,
when approved by the Engineer. When an asphaltic concrete overlay is placed for the sole purpose
of eliminating conflicting markings and the in place asphaltic concrete section will allow, said overlay
will be eligible for payment only if designated in the Plans. Overlays to obliterate lines will be paid
for only once and further traffic shifts in the same area shall be accomplished with removable
markings. Only the minimum asphaltic concrete thickness required to cover lines (generally 60 IbJsq.
yd. of Asphaltic Concrete "H") will be allowed. Excessive build-up will not be permitted. When an
overlay fOT the sole purpose of eliminating conflicting markings is not allowed, the markings no longer
applicable shall be removed in accordance with Subsection 656.02. The elimination of conflicting
pavement markings by overpainting with paint or liquid asphalt is not acceptable.
D. Raised pavement markers (RPMs) are required as listed below for all asphaltic concrete pavements
before the roadway is open to traffic. When Portland Cement Concrete is an intermediate or [mal
surface and is open to traffic, one calendar day is allowed for cleaning and drying before the
installation ofRPMs is required.
TC-/CJ
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
1. On Interstate and limited access highways under construction, excluding projects consisting
primarily of asphalt resurfacing items, retro-reflective raised pavement markers (RPMs) shall be
placed and/or maintained on intermediate pavement surfaces opened to traffic as follows:
a. SUPPLEMENTING LANE LINES:
80 foot centers on skip lines with curvature less than three degrees. (Includes tangents.)
40 foot centers on solid lines and all lines with curvature between three degrees and six
degrees.
20 foot centers on curves over six degrees.
20 foot centers on lane transitions or shifts.
b. SUPPLEMENTING RAMP GORE LINES:
20 foot centers, two each, placed side by side.
c. OTHER LINES:
As shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
2. On other highways under construction RPMs shall be used and/or maintained on intermediate
pavement surfaces as follows:
a. StJPPLEME1\TTING LANE LINES AND SOLID LINES:
40 foot centers except on lane shifts. (When required in the Plans or Contract.)
20 foot centers on lane shifts. (Required in all cases.)
b. SUPPLEMENTING DOUBLE SOLID LINES:
40 foot centers (one each beside each line) except on lane shifts. (When required in the Plans
or Contract.)
20 foot centers on lane shifts. (Required in all cases.)
RPMs are ll.Q1 allowed on right edge lines.
E. EXCEPTIONS FOR INTERIM MARKINGS: Some exceptions to the time of placement and pattern
of markings are permitted as noted below, however, full pattern pavement markings are required for
the completed project.
1. TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY ROADWAYoS
a. SKIP LINES: All interim skip (broken) stripe shall conform to Section 652 except that stripes
shall be at least four feet long with a maximum gap of 36 feet. On curves greater than six
degrees, a two-foot stripe with a maximum gap of 18 feet shall be used. In lane shift areas
skip lines will not be allowed. Solid Lines will be required. Interim skip lines will be
permitted for a period not to exceed 14 calendar days. Interim skip lines must be replaced
with markings in full compliance with Section 652 prior to expiration of the 14 calendar day
period.
-rc-//
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE"OF GEORGIA
Interim raised pavement markers may be substituted for the interim skip (broken) stripes.
If raised pavement markers are substituted for the four foot interim skip stripe, four markers
spaced at equal intervals over a four feet distance will be required. No separate payment will
be made if the interim raised pavement markers are substituted for interim skip lines.
Interim raised pavement markers shall be retro-reflective, shall be the same color as the
pavement markers for which they are substituted, and shall be visible during daytime.
The type of interim marker and method of attachment to the pavement must be approved by
the Office of Materials and Research but in no case will the markers be attached by the use
of nails.
The interim raised pavement markers must be maintained until the full pattern pavement
markings are applied. At the time full pattern pavement markings are applied the interim
raised markers shall be removed in a manner that will not interfere with application of the
full pattern pavement markings.
b. NO PASSING BARRIER: On two-lane, two-way roadways for periods not to exceed three
calendar days where skip centerlines are in place, no-passing zones may be identified by
using post or portable mounted DO NOT PASS regulatory signs (R4,1 24" x 30") at the
beginning and at intervals not to exceed 1/2 mile within each no-passing zone. A post or
portable mounted PASS WITH CARE regulatory sign (R4-1 24" x 30") shall be placed at the
end of each no-passing zone. Post mounted signs shall be placed in accordance with the
MUTCD. Portable signs must have a minimum vertical height of three feet above the
pavement surface to the bottom of the sign and be secured in such a manner as to not be
easily blown over or misaligned.
c. EDGELINES:
(1) Bituminous Surface Treatment Paving: Edgelines will not be required on intermediate
surfaces (including asphaltic concrete leveling for bituminous surface treatment paving) that
are in use for a period of less than 60 calendar days except at bridge approaches, on lane
transitions, lane shifts, and in such other areas as determined by the Engineer. On the final
surface, edgelines must be placed within 30 calendar days of the time that the final surface
was placed.
(2) All Other Types of Pavement: Edgelines will not be required on intermediate surfaces that
are~ in use for a period ofless. than 30 calendar days except at bridge approaches, on lane
transitions, lane shifts, and in such other areas as determined by the Engineer. On the final
surface, edgelines must be placed within 14 calendar days of the time that the surface was
placed.
d. MISCELLANEOUS PAVEMENT MARKINGS: School zones, railroads, stopbars, symbols,
words and other similar markings shall be placed on final surfaces conforming to Section 652
within 14 calendar days of completion of the final surface. On intermediate surfaces these
markings will generally not be required unless specified by the Engineer because of special
conditions or when the intermediate surface will be in use for more than 45 calendar days.
2. MULTI-LANE HIGHWAYS - WITH NO PAVED SHOULDER(S) OR PAVED SHOULDER(S)
FOUR FEET OR LESS
a. UNDIVIDED HIGHWAYS (INCLUDES PAVED CENTER TURN LANE) .
(1) Centerlines and No-Passing Barrier - Full pattern centerlines and no-passing barriers
shall be restored before nightfall. . . ,
TC-/Z,
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
(2) Lanelines - Interim skip (broken) stripe as described in Subsection 150.04.E.1.a. may be
used for periods not to exceed three calendar days.
(3) Edgelines - Edgelines shall be placed on intermediate and final surfaces within three
calendar days of obliteration.
b. DIVIDED HIGHWAYS (GRASS OR RAISED MEDIAN)
(1) Lanelines - Full pattern skip stripe shall be restored before nightfall.
(2) CenterlinelEdgeline - Solid lines shall be placed on intermediate and final surfaces within
three calendar days of obliteration.
c. Miscellaneous Pavement Markings Same as Subsection 150.04.E.l.d.
3. LIMITED ACCESS ROADWAYS AND ROADWAYS WITH PAVED SHOULDERS GREATER
THAN FOUR FEET
a. Same as Subsection 150.04.E.2. except as noted in (b) below.
b. EDGELINES-
(1) Asphaltic Concrete Pavement - Edgelines shall be placed on intermediate and final
surfaces prior to opening to traffic.
(2) Portland Cement Concrete Pavement - Edgelines shall be placed on any surface open to
traffic no later than one calendar day after work is completed on a section of roadway. All
water and residue shall be removed prior to daily striping.
F. APPLICATION OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS: The Contractor shall furnish layout, clean as
necessary, and preline the surface for the placement of pavement markings applied under this
Section. All existing marking tape on final surfaces shall be removed prior to placement of final
markings.
Pavement markings shall re-establish No-Passing Zones in the locations and configuration that
existed prior to construction. Existing No-Passing Zones shall be clearly identified as to location prior
to construction by staking or erection of DO NOT PASS and PASS WITH CARE signs. On new
location projects and on project.s where either horizontal or vertical alignments have been modified,
the location of No-Passing Zones will be identified by the Engineer.
G. MOBILE OPERATIONS: When pavement markings (centerlines, lane lines, and edge lines) are
applied in a continuous operation by moving vehicles and equipment, the following minimum
equipment and warning devices shall be required in addition to the requirements of the MUTCD:
1. A lead vehicle is required for two-way traffic conditions and shall have an approved sequential
or flashing arrow panel mOWlted so as to be easily visible to oncoming traffic. A lead vehicle is not
required for low volume off-system routes and one-way traffic applications.
2. The work vehicle applying markings shall have a sequential or flashing arrow p~el mounted on
the rear. If the work vehicle is also functioning as the lead vehicle then an approved arrow panel
shall be mounted so as to be easily visible to oncoming traffic. The work vehicle shall follow
directly behind the lead vehicle.
3. The work vehicle placing cones shall follow directly behind the work vehicle applying the
markings. The cone work vehicle shall have a sequential or flashing arrow panel mounted on the
rear.
-/ -c-/..5'
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
4. For multi-lane roadways a protection vehicle shall follow the above vehicles and the protection
vehicle shall also display a prominent sigu. with the legend PASS ON LEFT (RIGHT). On
interstate and limited access roadways, the protection vehicle shall be equipped with a truck
mounted attenuator (TMA) that is certified for impacts not less than 45 mph in accordance with
NCHRP 230.
5. All vehicles shall be equipped with the official.slow moving vehicle symbol sign and left and right-
side rear mounted flashing yellow lights.
150;05 CHANNELIZATION
A. GENERAL: Channelization should clearly delineate the travelway through the work zone and alert
drivers and pedestrians to conditions created by work activities in or near the travel way.
Channelization shall be done in accordance with the plans and specifications, the MUTCD, and the
following requirements.
1. Types of Devices Permitted for Channelization in Construction Work Zones:
a DRUMS:
(1) DESIGN: Drums shall meet the minimum requirement of the MUTCD and shall be
reflectorized as required in Subsection 150.0l.C.
(2) APPLICATION: Drums shall be used as the required channelizing device to delineate the
full length of a lane closure, shift, or encroachment, except as modified by this Subsection.
(a) TRANSITION TAPERS AND LANE CLOSURES: Drums shall be used on all
transition tapers. The minimum length of the approach transition taper for a lane closure,
shift, or encroachment for highways with posted speed of 45 mph or greater shall be equal
to the lane width of lateral shift (Ft.) x the posted speed limit (Mph), (L = WS), but not
less than 150 feet. For multiple lane closures, only one lane may be closed per taper with
a minimum tangent length of 2L between tapers. The length of a closed lane, excluding
the transition taper, will be limited to two mile, unless otherwise approved or directed by
the Engineer. Drums shall be placed the full length of the taper spaced at maximum
intervals in feet equal to the numerical speed limit (EXAMPLE: 55 Mph Speed Limit =
55 feet maximum spacing).
For taper lengths on urban, residential or other streets where the posted speed is 40.mph
or less, the minimum length of the approach transition taper may be computed using the
formula L = WS2/60. Greater taper length shall be ~sed when required for individual
situations.
Drums with steadybuming lights, for the length of the taper only, are required if the
condition exists into the night.
(b) LONGITUDINAL CHANNELIZATION: Drums shall be spaced as listed below for
various roadside work conditions except as modified by Subsection 150.06. Spacing shall
be used for situations meeting any ofthe conditions listed as follows:
(1) 50 FOOT SPACING MAXIMUM:
(a) For difference in elevation exceeding two inches.
(b) For healed sections no steeper than 4:1 as shown in Subsection 150.06, Detail
150-E..
-rc - /?-
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
(2) 100 FOOT SPACING MAXIMUM:
(a) For difference in elevation of two inches or less.
(b) F1ush areas where equipment or workers are within ten feet of the travel lane.
(3) 200 FOOT SPACING MAXIMUM: Where equipment or workers are more than
ten feet from travel lane. Lateral offset clearance to be four feet from the travel lane.
(a) For paved areas' eight feet or greater in 'width that are paved flush with a
standard width travel lane.
(b) For disturbed shoulder areas not completed to typical section that are flush
to the travel lane and considered a usable shoulder.
When the appropriate signs are posted advising of conditions such as soft or low
shoulder, drums may be removed after shoulders are completed to typical section
and grassed and after guardrail or other safety devices have been installed.
b. VERTICAL PANELS:
(1) DESIGN: All vertical panels shall have a minimum of 270 square inches of retro-reflective
area facing the traffic and shall meet the requirements of the MUTeD.
(2) APPLICATION: Lane encroachment by the drum on the travelway should permit a
remaining lane width often feet. When encroachment reduces the travel way to less than ten
feet, vertical panels shall be used to restore the travelway to ten feet or greater. No other
application of vertical panels will be permitted.
c. CONES:
(1) DESIGN: All cones shall be a minimum of28 inches in height regardless of application and
shall meet the requirement of the MUTCD.
(2) APPLICATION: For longitudinal channelizing only, cones will be permitted for daylight
closures or minor shifts. (DIums are required for all tapers.) The use of cones for nighttime
work will not be permitted.
d. BARRICADES:
(1) DESIGN: The use of Type I and Type II barricades will not be permitted. Type III
barricades shall meet the minimum requirements of the MUTeD and shall be reflectorized
as required in Subsection 150.01.C.
(2) APPLICATION: Type III barricades shall be placed as required by the plans, the
Standards, and as directed by the Engineer.
e. WARNING LIGHTS:
(1) DESIGN: All warning lights shall meet the requirements of the MUTeD.
(2) APPLICATION:
(a) Type A low-intensity flashing lights shall be used' as sho~ in the Plans, the
Standards, and as directed by the Engineer. Flashing lights are not required for advance
warning signs in Subsection ISO.03.H.
-rc- /5
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
(b) Type C Steady-Burn lights shall be used on all tapers when the condition existl into
the night. Steady-bum lights shall also be used as shown in the Plans, the Standards, and
as directed by the Engineer.
f. PORTABLE BARRIERS:
. (1) DESIGN: Portable Barriers shall meet the requirements of Section 622 - PRECAST
CONCRETE BARRIER.
(2) APPLICATION: Portable Barriers shall be placed as required by the plans. standards, and
as directed by the Engineer. When Portable Barrier is located 20 feet or less from a travel
lane, yellow reflectors shall be fixed to the top of the barrier at intervals not greater than 50
feet and shall be mounted approximately two inches above the barrier. The reflectors shall
be either 10" x 10" square Type V (or equal) reflective sheeting mounted on flat-sheet panels,
or 8" diameter center-mounted sealed prismatic reflex reflectors housed in an aluminum'
backing with a single grommeted hole.
Approach end of Portable Barrier shall be flared or protected by an impact attenuator (crash
cushion) or other approved treatment in accordance with Georgia Standard 4960,
Construction Details and Standard Specifications.
On interstate or other controlled access highways where lane shifts or crossovers cause
opposing traffic to be separated by less than 40 ft., precast concrete barrier shall be used as
a separator.
B. TEMPORARY SAND LOADED A'ITENUATOR MODULES
1. DESCRIPTION: This work consists of the furnishing, installation, maintenance, relocation, reuse
as required, and removal of Temporary Sand Loaded Attenuator Modules for traffic impact
attenuators.
2. MATERIAlS: Materials used in the Attenuator shall meet the requirements of Subsection 648.02
for Type 2 Sand Loaded Modules - Cylindrical Drums or Type 2-A Sand Loaded Modules -
Stabilizer Drums with Wine Glass shaped Inner Containers.
3. CONSTRUCTION: Temporary Sand Loaded Attenuator Module installation shall conform to the
requirements of Subsection 648.03, Manufacturer's recommendations, and Georgia Standard
4960 and shall be installed at locations designated by the Engineer.
C. PORTABLE IMPACT ATTENUATORS:
1. DESCRIPTION: This work consists of the furnishing (including spare parts), installation,
maintenance, relocation, reuse as required, and removal of Portable Impact Attenuators.
2. MATERIALS: Materials used in the Attenuator sh.all meet the requirements of Section 650 for
Type A Portable Impact Attenuators.
3. CONSTRUCTION: Portable Impact Attenuator installation shall conform to the requirements of
Subsection 650.03, Manufacturer's recommendations, and Georgia Standard 4960 and shall be
installed at locations designated by the Engineer, and/or shown on the plans.
D. TEMPORARY GUARDRAIL ANCHORAGE - Type 11:
1. DESCRIPTION: This work consists of the furnishing, installation, maintenance and removal of
Temporary GuardrailAnchorage - Type 11 used for Portable Barrier or temporary guardrail end
treatment.
TC-/~
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
2. MATERIALS: Materials used in the Temporary Guardrail Anchorage - Type 11 shall meet the
requirements of Subsection '641.02 of the Standard Specifications and current Georgia Standards
and may be new or used. Materials salvaged from the Project which meet the requirements of
Standards may be utilized if available. The use of any salvaged materials will require prior
approval of the Engineer.
3. CONSTRUCTION: Installation of the Temporary Guardrail Anchorage - Type 11 shall conform
to the requirements of the Plans, current Georgia Standards and Subsection 641.03 of the
Standard Specifications. Installation shall also include sufficient additional guardrail and
appurtenances ro effect the transition and connection to Temporary Concrete Barrier as required
by the details in Georgia Standard 4960.
150.06 EXCAVATION ADJACENT TO A TRAVEL LANE: Construction work involving trenching adjacent
to a travelway shall not begin until the Contractor is able to continuously place the required typical
section to within two inches of the existing pavement elevation, or heal the remaining difference in
elevation to the traveled way as shown in Detail150-E.
Channelization devices and placement during the construction period shall conform to the requirements
of Subsection 150.05 and Details l50-B, l50-C, l50-D, and l50-E shown herein.
In addition to the signs specified in Section 150 and the MUTCD, a W-20 sign with the legend "(LEFT)
(RIGHT) LANE NARROWS" with two flags shall be kept just off the paving edge and 500 feet upstream
of the point where channelization devices are erected on the paving edge.
A. STONE BASES, SOIL AGGREGATE BASES, AND SOIL BASES: Drop~ffs in elevation of more than
two inches between surfaces carrying, or adjacent to, traffic will not be allowed for more than 24
hours. However, where the Contractor has demonstrated the ability to continuously excavate and
backfill in a proficient manner, a single length of excavated area not to exceed 1000 feet may be left
open as a start up area for periods not to exceed 48 hours.
B. ASPHALT BASESIBINDERS: Drop-off's in elevation of more than two inches between surfaces
carrying or adjacent to traffic will not be allowed for more than 48 hours.
C. PORTLMTD CEMENT CONCRETE AND CEMENT STABILIZED BASES: Construction work
adjacent to the traveled way which involves these types of bases shall be healed within 48 hours after
the curing period is complete for each section placed. During the placement period, traffic control
devices will be in accordance with Subsection 150.05 and Detail150-B.
D. MISCELLANEOUS EXCAVATIONS OR DROP-OFFS ADJACENT TO TRAVELWAY: Work such as
drainage structures, utility facilities, or any other work which results in a drop-off adjacent to the
travel way shall be performed expeditiously so as to minimize the exposure to the hazard. As soon as
practical, the excavation shall be backfilled to the minimum requirements of Detail150-E. In no case
will the drop-<>ffbe allowed ro exist more than five calendar days. This may require stage construction,
such as plating and backfilling the incomplete work.
-rc- /7
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
. STATE OF GEORGIA
. -, - , ~~.
NOTE. Drums reQUIred for thIs
locatIon, sPaced at 50 FT. Intervals.
If the traveled way wIdth
'S reduced to less than
10 feet by the use of drums.
vertical panels sholl be used
In lieu of drums.
locatIon of drums when
drop-aff exceeds ~ Inches.
----------\
----~------_.!\
-c:
t- NEW CONSTRUCTION +
TRAVEL LANE
1r--+
DROP-OFF GREATER THAN 4 INCHES
DET AIL 150-8
Drums spaced at
SO feet Intervals.
locotlon of drums when
drop-off Is 2+ Inches to
~ Inches.
_1:,,~~---_--~.
-----------\
4:
t-
NEW CONSTRUCTION
+
TRAVEL LANE
1r--+
DROP-OFF OF 2+ INCHES TO 4 INCHES
DET AIL 150-C
-rc-/t?
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
Drums spaced at
100 feet Int.ryols.
LocatIon of drums when
drop-off Is 2 Inches or less.
~f~:"I- ______~. .
-----------\
I(
t
NEW CONSTRUCTION
+
TRAVEL LANE
~
DROP-OFF OF 2 INCHES OR LESS
DET AIL 150-D
Location of drums ImmedIately
after completIon of healed sectIon.
spaced at SO ft.lnteryols.
Compacted oroded
oooreoote, subbase
materIal or dirt.
TOP OF DRUM TO BE LEVEL
2 ft. +1-
----------~.
-----------\
NO STEEPER THAN 4:1
~
I(
t
NEW CONSTRUCTION
+
TRAVEL LANE
~
HEALED SECTION
DET AIL 150-E
TC-If
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
150.07 FLAGGING AND PILOT CARS:
A. Flaggers shall be provided as required to handle traffic, as specified in the Plans or Special Provisions,
and as required by the Engineer.
B. All flaggers shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD and must have received training and a
certificate upon completion of the training from a Department approved training program. Failure
to provide certified flaggers as required above shall be reason for the Engineer suspending work
involving the flagger{s) nntil the Contractor provides the certified flagger{s).
C. Flaggers shall wear high-visibility clothing in compliance with the MUTCD and shall use ~ Stop/Slow
paddle meeting the requirements of the MUTCD for controlling traffic. The Stop/Slow paddles shall
have a shaft length of seven (7) feet minimum. In addition to the Stop/Slow paddle, a flagger may use
a 24 inches square red/orange flag as aD. additional device to attract attention. For night work. the
vest shall have reflectorized stripes on front and back.
D. Pilot vehicles shall be provided if specified in the Plans or Specifications and meet the requirements
ofthe MUTCD. .
E. Signs for flagger traffic control shall be placed in advance of the flagging operation in accordance with
the MUTeD. In addition to the signs required by the MUTCD, signs at regular intervals, warning of
the presence of the flagger shall be placed beyond the point where traffic can reasonably be expected
to stop under the most severe conditions for that day's work.
150.08 ENFORCEMENT: The safe passage of pedestrians and traffic through and around the temporary
traffic control zone, while minimIzing confusion and disruption to traffic flow, shall have priority over all
other Contractor activities. Continued failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of Section
150 (TRAFFIC CONTROL) will result in non-refundable deductions of monies from the Contract as shown
in this Subsection for non-performance of Work.
Failure of the Contractor to comply with this Specification shall be reason for the Engineer suspending
all other work on the Project, except erosion control and traffic control, taking corrective action as
specified in Subsection lOS.l5,and/or withholding payment of monies due the Contractor for any work
on the Project until traffic control deficiencies are corrected. These other actions shall be in addition to
the deductions for non-performance of traffic control.
-rc- z 0
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
. STATE OF GEORGIA
SCHEDULE OF DEDUCTIONS FOR EACH CALENDAR DAY OF DEFICIENCIES OF
TRAFFIC CONTROL INSTALLATION AND/OR MAINTENANCE
I ORIGINAL TOTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT I I
From More Than To and Includin~ Daily CharE!e
$0 $100,000 $100
100,000 1,000,000 250
1.000.000 5,000,000 500
5,000,000 20,000,000 750
20,000.000 40,000,000 1,000
40.000,000 - 1.500
150.09 MEASUREMENT:
A. TRAFFIC CONTROL: When listed as a pay item in the Proposal, payment will be made at the Lump
Sum price bid, which will include all traffic control not paid for separately, and will be paid as follows:
When the first Construction Report is submitted, a payment of 25 (twenty-five) percent of the
Lump Sum price will be made. For each progress payment thereafter, the total of the Project
percent complete shown on the last pay statement plus 25 (twenty-five) percent will be paid Oess
previous payments), not to exceed one hundred ClOO) percent and subject to normal retainage.
When no payment item for Traffic Control-Lump Sum is shown in the Proposal, all of the
requirements of Section 150 and the Traffic Control Plan shall be in full force and effect. The cost of
complying with these requirements will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the overall
bid submittal.
B. SIGNS: When shown as a pay item in the contract, interim special guide signs will be paid for as
listed below. All other regulatory, warning, and guide signs, as required by the Contract, will be paid
for under Traffic Control Lump Sum or included in the overall bid submitted.
1. Interim ground mounted or interim overhead special guide signs will be measured for payment
by the square foot. This payment shall be full compensation for furnishing the signs, including
supports as required, erecting, illuminating overhead signs, maintaining, removing, re-erecting,
and final removal from the Project. Payment will be made only one time regardless of the number
of moves required.
2. Remove and reset existing special guide signs, ground mount or overhead, complete, in place, will
be measured for payment per each. Payment will be made only one time regardless of the number
of moves required.
3. Modify special guide signs, ground mount or overhead, will be measured for payment by the
square foot. The area measured shall include only that portion of the sign modified. Payment shall
include materials, removal from posts or supports when necessary, and remounting as required.
-rc-Z/
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
C. PRECAST MEDIAN BARRIE~: Pr~cast Median Barrier will be measured as specified in Section 622.
D. CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN, PORTABLE: Changeable Message Sign, Portable will be measured
as specified in Section 632.
E. TEMPORARY GUARDRAIL ANCHORAGE, Type 11: Temporary Guardrail Anchorage - Type 11 will
be measured by each assembly, complete in place and accepted according to the details shown in the
plans, which shall also include the additional guardrail and appurtenances necessary for transition
and connection to Temporary Concrete' Barrier. Payment shall include all necessary materials,
equipment, labor, site preparation, maintenance and removal.
F. TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION - TEMPORARY: Traffic Signal Installation - Temporary will be
measured as specified in Section 647.
G. FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLY: Flashing Beacon Assemblies will be measured as specified in
Section 647.
H. TEMPORARY, SAND LOADED A'ITENUATOR MODULES: Each Sand Loaded Attenuator Module
of the type specified includes all material components, hardware, incidentals, labor, site preparation
and maintenance. Each module will be measured for payment by the drum only once regardless of the
number of locations installed. Modules to replace those damaged or destroyed by traffic impact will
also be measured by the unit for payment. Upon completion of the project, the modules shall be
removed and retained by the Contractor.
1. PORTABLE IMPACT ATTENUATORS: Each Portable Impact Attenuator will be measured by the
unit which shall include all material components, hardware, incidentals, labor, site preparation, and
maintenance, including spare parts recommended by the manufacture for repairing minor accident
damage. Each tm.it will be measured only once regardless of the number of locations installed, moves
required, or number of repairs necessary because of traffic damage. Upon completion of the project,
the units shall be removed and retained by the Contractor.
J. PAVEMENT MARKINGS: Pavement markings will be measured as specified in Section 150.
150.1 0 PAYMENT:
When shown in the Schedule ofltems in the Proposal, the following items will be paid for separately.
Item No. 150. - Traffic Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . Lump Sum
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Solid Traffic Stripe _ Inch, (Color) ............. per Linear Mile
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Skip Traffic Stripe_ Inch, (Color) .............. per Linear Mile
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Solid Traffic Stripe, .
Thermoplastic _ Inch, (Color) ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . per Linear Mile
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Skip Traffic Stripe,
Thermoplastic Inch, (Color) ............................ per Linear Mile
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Pavement Arrow with Raised Reflectors. ... ... . . . . . . . . .. per Each
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Raised Pavement Markers - All Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. per Each
Item No. 150. Interim Ground Mounted Special Guide Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " per Square Foot
Item No. 150. Interim Overhead Special Guide Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. per Square Foot
7&ZZ
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF GEORGIA
Item No. 150. Remove & Reset Existing Special Guide Signs,
Ground Mount, Complete in Place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. per Each
Item No. 150. Remove & Reset, Existing Special Guide Signs,
. Overhead,Complete in Place ..................................... Per Each
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Temporary Sand Loaded Attenuator Modules ............ per Each
I tem No. 150, Traffic Control, Portable Impact Attenuator . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Per Each
Item No. 150. Traffic Control, Pavement Markers, WordS and Symbols .... . . . . . .. per Square Foot
I tem No. 150. Traffic Control, Pavement Arrow (Painted) With Raised Reflectors ........ per Each
Item No. 150. Modify Special Guide Sign, Ground Mount. .. .......... ... .. . .... per Square Foot
Item No. 150. Modify Special Guide Sign, Overhead. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. per Square Foot
Item No. 622. Precast Concrete Median Barrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . per Linear Foot
Item No. 632. Changeable Message Sign, Portable .................................. per Each
Item No. 641 Temporary Guardrail Anchorage, Type 11 ............................. per Each
Item No. 647. Traffic Signal Installation, Temp. . . . . . . . . .. . ... . . . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . .. . , Lump Sum
Item No. 647. Flashing Beacon Assembly, Structure Mounted. . .. .. .. .. ... . .. . . . . . . . .. per Each
Item No. 647. Flashing Beacon Assembly, Cable Supported..: .. . .... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. per Each
-rC-Z3
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REVISED SEPTEMBER 1, 1991
F;rst use: November 22, 1991
TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATIONS
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SUPPLEMENTAL SPEciFICAT'ZON
647.01
647'.02
647.03
647.04
647.05
647.06
647.07
647.08
647.09
647 . 10
647.11
647.12
647.13
647.14
647.15
647.16
647 . 17
647.18
647.19
647.20
647.21
64-7.. 22
647.23
647.24
647.25
647.26
647.27
647.28
SECTZON 647
DESCRIPTION
MATERIALS
CODES
EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY
AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT
MICROPROCESSOR BASED TRAFFIC CONTROLLER
CABINETS
SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
FLASHING.BEACON CONTROLLER
LOOP DETECTOR
PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS
CABLE
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
GROUNDING
SIGNAL POLES
PULL BOXES
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
BLANK-OUT SIGNS
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIP. MODIFICATION AND REMOVAL
FIELD TESTS
OPERATIONAL TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF SIGNAL MATERIALS
STATE SUPPLIED MATERIALS
WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES
MEASUREMENT
PAYMENT
PA6E 1
"-5 -I
b47.01 DESCRIPTIO~"
THIS WORK SHALL CONSIST OF FURNISHING AND' ERECTING A TRAFFIC
SIGNAL I NST ALLA T I ON I NCL'UD I NG ALL POLES, CONCRETE BASES, W I RES
AND M I SCELLANEOUSMATER I ALS REQU I RED FOR" COMPLET I ON OF THE
INSTALLATION. THIS. WORK SHALL INCLUDE 'ALL TEST PERIODS,
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES AS DESIGNATED BELOW.
PAYMENT I TEMS RELATED TO. SECT I ON b4.7 A'RE DESCR I BED I N THE
FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
STRAIN POLES
HIGHWAY LIGHTING
LIGHTING STANDARDS AND LUMINARIES
WIRE, CABLE AND CONDUIT
GRASSING
SIGN BLANKS
REFLECTORIZATION MATERIALS
b39
bBO
bBl
bB2
700
912
913
647.02 MATERIALS
ALL MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE ~ TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS PUBLICATION
(CURRENT EDITION), THE MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
(CURRENT EDITION), THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS EQa ROAD AND
BR lOGE CONSTRUCT I ON. DEPARTMENT Qf. TRANSPORTAT'I ON. STATE Q.E
GEORGIA (CURRENT EDITION), AND/OR ANV SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
OR SPECIAL PROVISIONS SPECIALLY PREPARED FOR EACH PROJECT.
MATERIALS USED IN THIS CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE FOLLOWING UNLESS OTHERWISE STIPULATED:
MATERIALS
GA. D.O.T.
SPECIFICATION OR
SPECIAL PROVISION
REFERENCE tHh.
500
BOO
BOl
B32
833.09
853.01
B54.01
B70
BBb
925
923.01
923.02
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE, CLASS "A"
COARSE AGGREGATE
FINE AGGREGATE
CEMENT CONCRETE CURING
POLYURETHANE SEALANT FOR INDUCTION LOOPS
BAR REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
GRAY IRON CASTINGS
PAINTS, (FIELD PAINTING)
EPOXY ADHESIVE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
PVC ELECTRICAL CONDUIT
PA&t 2
-rs-Z
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I"
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.02.1 CERTIFICATION
FOR TRAFF I C SIGNAL I TEMS SUCH AS . STEEL STRA I N POLES OR STEEL
POLES WITH TRAFF I C SIGNAL MAST ARMS, ( EITHER OF WH I CH WITH OR
WITHOUT ADDITIONAL ARMS FOR LUMINAIRE ATTACHMENT), THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL INSTRUCT THE SUPPLIER OR MANUFACTURER TO SUBMIT A
CERTIFICATION INCLUDING MILL CERTIFICATES DIRECTLY TO THE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION'S OFFICE OF MATERIALS AND RESEARCH,
15 KENNEDY DRIVE, FOREST PARK, GEORGIA 30050, GUARANTEEING THAT
THE ITEM(S) UNDER CONSIDERATION WERE MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS WITH SPECIFIC
REFERENCE TO THE PROJECT NUMBER AND THE ARTICLE NUMBER. THIS
SUBM I SS I ON BY THE SUPPL I ER OR MANUFACTURER SHOULD HAVE
APPROPRIATE COPIES OF THE TRANSMITTAL LETTER SENT TO THE
CONTRACTOR, AREA ENGINEER AND THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
ENGINEER.
FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL ITEMS SUCH AS SIGNAL HEADS, CONTROLLERS,
DETECTORS, MONITORS, CO-ORDINATION UNITS AND OTHER RELATED SIGNAL
EGU I PMENT , THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBM ITS I X ( 6 ) COP I ES OF THE
CATALOG PRODUCT NUMBERS AND DESCRIPTIONS TO THE AREA ENGINEER
WITH APPROPRIATE REFERENCE TO PROJECT NUMBER AND ARTICLE NUMBER.
THE AREA ENGINEER WILL FORWARD THIS ENTIRE SUBMISSION TO THE
DISTRICT TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER FOR HIS REVIEW AND COMMENTS.
THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC ENGINEER (DTE) WILL THEN TRANSMIT THE ENTIRE
SUBMISSION TO THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER FOR FINAL
EVALUATION. THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER WILL RE-
DISTRIBUTE THE CATALOG INFORMATION WITH APPROVAL/DISAPPROVAL
COMMENTS TO ALL PARTIES AND THUS RELIEVE THE NEED FOR SITE
TESTING OF THIS TYPE OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL .ITEM(S) BY THE AREA
ENGINEER OR LABORATORY. APPROVAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO CONTRACTOR
BEGINNING WORK.
CATALOG CUTS WILL NOT BE REQUIRED IF THE SIGNAL ITEMS ARE
PURCHASED FROM THE STATEWIDE TRAFFIC SIGNAL EGUIPMENT CONTRACT
(SWC 87-419) AND CONFORM TO ALL CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS. THE
TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE WILL BE IDENTICAL TO .THE CATALOG CUT
METHOD LISTED ABOVE EXCEPT THAT THE CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT A LIST
OF EDU I PMENT WITH BRAND AND MODEL NUMBERS. AND PROOF OF PURCHASE
TO THE AREA ENGINEER FOR FINAL EVALUATION BY THE STATE TRAFFIC
AND SAFETY ENGINEER. APPROVAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO THE
CONTRACTOR BEGINNING WORK.
647.02.2 POLE DESIGN
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE SHOP DRAW I NGS AND RELATED DES I GN
CALCULATIONS OF THE PROPOSED SIGNAL STRAIN POLE AND PROVIDE
-BENDING MOMENT AT YIELD" FOR DETERMINATION OF FOUNDATION SIZE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE SIGNAL STRAIN POLE (WITH OR WITHOUT MAST ARM)
FOUNDATIONS DRAWINGS. THE DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW ALL DIMENSIONS AND
MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS OF THE DESIGNS. SIX COPIES OF THIS DATA
WILL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF BRIDGE DESIGN FOR APPROVAL
PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. COPIES OF THE TRANSMITTAL
LETTER SHALL BE SENT TO THE AREA ENGINEER AND THE DISTRICT OFFICE
OF TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND SAFETY.
PA&E 3
75-3
I..
! .
647.03 CODES
ALL TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT SHALL CONFORM TO' THE STANDARDS OF
THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURES' ASSOCIATION. (NEMA), THE
UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES, INC (UL), OR ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING
SOCIETY (IES), WHENEVER APPLICABLE. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
CODE, THE ASTM STANDARDS, THE AMERICAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION
(ASA), THE LOCAL POWER COMPANY RULES AND ANY LOCAL MUNICIPAL
ORDINANCES WHICH MAY APPLY. DIFFERENCES IN STANDARDS OR CODES
REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE RESOLVED AS DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.04 EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY
ALL MACHINERY SUCH AS TRUCKS, DERRICKS, BUCKET VEHICLES, SAWS,
TRENCHERS, ETC. AND OTHER EQU I PMENT NECESSARY FOR THE
SATISFACTORY AND EXPEDITIOUS PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK SHALL BE
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE ITS USE IN THE. INSTALLATION
PROCESS. THE MACHINERY SHALL BE IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER, BE SAFE
TO OPERATE AND MEET CURRENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
647.05 AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT
ALL AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED COMPLETE WITH
ALL NECESSARY CONNECTING HARNESSES AND INSTALLED IN THE CABINET
WITH WHICH IT IS ASSOCIATED. NO EXTRANEOUS WIRING SHALL BE
NECESSARY TO INSTALL THE EQUIPMENT. IT SHALL BE NECESSARY ONLY
TO CONNECT THE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT TO ITS CABLE HARNESS OR INSERT
IT IN PREMOUNTED RACKS OR SOCKETS.
647.06 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLERS
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLERS SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AT
THE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.
THE CONTROLLER AND ALL OTHER AUX I L I ARY EQU I PMENT SHALL BE
IDENTIFIED BY SERIAL NUMBER AND MODEL IN SUCH A WAY THAT THESE
NUMBERS CAN READILY BE CHECKED TO DETERMINE THAT THEY AGREE WITH
PREVIOUSLY APPROVED CATALOG SUBMITTALS. THE CONTROLLER, CABINET
AND ALL AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT SHALL BE ASSEMBLED IN SUCH A MANNER
AS TO PROVIDE THE OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND ANY
FUTURE OPERATIONS SPECIFIED.
647.07 CABINETS
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINETS SHALL BE FURNISHED AND
INSTALLED AT THE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND AS DIRECTED BY
THE ENGINEER. CABINET INSTALLATION SHALL CONFORM TO THE STANDARD
DETAIL DRAWINGS. THE PLANS SHALL INDICATE WHETHER THE CABINET
SHALL BE POLE OR BASE MOUNTED. BASE MOUNTED CAB I NETS SHALL BE
SEALED TO THEIR CONCRETE BASE. THE COMPOUND SHALL BE A READILY'
WORKAELE SUBSTANCE WHICH SHALL NOT MELT OR RUN AT TEMPERATUREE AS
HIGH .3 300 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT. AL~ FIELD CABINET WIRING SHALL
BE AC~JMPLISHED IN A NEAT WORKMANLIKE MANNER. ALL FIELD CABINET
WIRING SHALL BE CUT TO THE PROPER LENGTH AND NEATLY LACED INTO
THE CAB I NET. THE CONCRETE BASES SHALL BE CAST I N PLACE TO THE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE STANDARD
DETAIL DRAWINGS. PRE-FABRICATED BASES MAY BE USED SUBJECT TO
APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER.
PASE 4
-rs- 9-
.1
I
I
I
I
I.
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 ;,.
CABINET WIRING SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF THE
NA T ION ALE L E C T R I C A L COD E ( N E C ) AND N A T ION ALE L E C T R I C A L
MANUF ACTURERS . ASSOC I AT I ON ( NEMA) . CONDUCTORS BETWEEN SERV ICE
TERMINALS AND THE "AC+'" TERMINALS TO SIGNAL' 'LIGHT RELAYS. BUSS
TERMINALS AND THE SIGNAL L'IGHT NEUTRAL SHALL BE NO. lQ. AWG
MINIMUM. TERMINAL CONNECTIONS TO LIGHT NEUTRAL SHALL BE NO. 10
AWG MI~IMUM. TERMINAL CONNECTIONS TO CONDUCTORS SHALL BE CRIMPED
WITH A RATCHET TYPE CRIMPING TOOL WHICH WILL NOT _ RELEASE UNTIL
THE CRIMPING OPERATION IS COMPLETED. - NO SPLICES WILL BE
PERM I TTED I NS I DE' THE CONTROLLER CAB I NET, BASE OR CONDU IT. NO
SOLID WIRE WILL BE'.ALLOWED 'WITH THE EXCEPTION OF GROUNDING WIRE.
THE CABINET SHALL BE LOCATED SO AS TO MINIMIZE INCONVENIENCE TO
PEDESTRIANS AND PROVIDE MAXIMUM PROTECTION TO MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL FROM VEHICLES WHEN SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT. THE
CABINET SHALL BE ORIENTED SO THAT THE DOOR OPENS AWAY FROM THE
INTERSECTION. THE CABINET SHALL NOT BLOCK A SIDEWALK OR
PASSAGEWAY AND SHALL BE LOCATED AS FAR FROM THE ROADWAY OR CURB
LINE AS POSSIBLE TO PREVENT VEHICULAR DAMAGE TO THE CABINET. TO
AVOID POTENTIAL CONFLICTS DUE TO PROPOSED RECONSTRUCTION
PROJECTS, COMMERCIAL DRIVEWAYS, ETC.. THE CABINET MAY BE
RELOCATED WITHIN THE RIGHT-OF-WAY AT THE DISCRETION OF THE
ENGINEER.
647.08 SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED COMPLETE
WITH ALL NECESSARY CONNECTING HARNESSES INSTALLED IN THE CABINET
WITH WHICH IT IS TO BE ASSOCIATED. NO EXTRANEOUS WIRING SHALL BE
NECESSARY. IT SHALL BE NECESSARY ONLY TO CONNECT THE AUXILIARY
EQUIPMENT TO ITS CABLE HARNESS.
647.09 FLASHING BEACON
THE FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED
AT THE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND AS DIRECTED BY THE
ENGINEER. IT SHALL BE INSTALLED AS A COMPLETE UNIT (SOLID STATE
FLASHER AND CABINET, WITH TIME CLOCK IF APPLICABLE) AND SHALL
CONFORM TO APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF SECTION b47.07.
647.10 LOOP DETECTORS
INSTALLAT I ON AND TESTS SHALL CONFORM TO (NEMA) STANDARDS
PUBLICATION TS 1-1983, SECTION 1~, INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTORS AND
ALL SUBSEQUENT REVISIONS, EXCEPT AS SHOWN ON PLANS, DETAILS,
NOTES AND THESE SPECIFICATIONS (SECTION 647).
647.10.1 INSTALLATION OF LOOP DETECTORS
UNLESS OTHERW I SE SHOWN ON THE PLANS OR SPEC 1 FlED HERE IN, EACH
LOOP SHALL CONS I ST OF A M I N I MUM OF TWO ( 2) TURNS OF CONDUCTOR.
NO PORTION OF THE LOOP SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF
ANY CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL IN THE PAVEMENT SUCH AS MANHOLE COVERS,
WATER VALVES, GRATES, ETC.
PULL BOXES, CONDULETS AND CONDUITS SHALL BE IN PLACE BEFORE
BEGINNING LOOP INSTALLATIONS. THE AMBIENT SURFACE TEMPERATURE OF
THE PAVEMENT IN THE SHADE SHALL BE AT LEAST 40 DEGREES F BEFORE
PAGE 5
-r5-5
SEALER WILL BE ALLOWEQ TO BE PLACED IN SAWCUTS.
LOOP DETECTORS SHALL BE COMPLETE AND FULLY OPERATIONAL PRIOR TO
PLACING THE SIGNAL IN STOP AND GO OPERATION.
647.10.1.1 POLYETHYLENE OR PVC CONDUIT ENCASED 14 AWG LOOP WIRE
1. THE LOOP SHALL BE OUTLINED ON THE PAVEMENT TO CONFORM TO THE
SPECIFIED CONFIGURATION. THE DETECTOR LOOP SHALL BE INSTALLED IN
A SAWED SLOT IN THE ROADWAY SURFACE 3/8 INCH WIDE BY PROPER DEPTH
TO PROVIDE 2" MINIMUM COVER. TO PREVENT SHARP BENDS OF THE WIRE,
A 1 1/4 INCH 0 I AMETER . DR I LLED HOLE ( OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD)
SHALL BE MADE 114 THE PAVEMENT AT EACH I NTERSECT I ON OF SAW CUTS.
MITER SAW CUTS AT THE INTERSECTION OF SAW CUTS SHALL OVERLAP SO
THAT THE SLOTS HAVE FULL DEPTH AND A SMOOTH BOTTOM. WHEN
INSTALLING THE DETECTOR LOOP WIRE, THE PAVEMENT SHALL BE DRY AND
. THE WEATHER SHALL NOT I NCLUDE THE THREAT OF I MPEND I NG
PRECIPITATION. THE SAWED SLOT SHALL BE COMPLETELY CLEAN OF DUST
AND DEBRIS AND THOROUGHLY DRY. HOT AIR MAY BE USED TO DRY THE
SAW CUT. THE INSTALLATION SHALL NOT PROCEED UNTIL SLOTS ARE
COMPLETELY DRY AND FREE OF ANY DEBRIS.
2. THE LOOP WIRE SHALL BE INSTALLED STARTING AT THE ROADSIDE
PULLBOX OR CONDULET, AROUND THE LOOP FOR THE SPECIFIED NUMBER OF
TURNS AND BACK TO THE PULLBOX OR CONDULET. SPLICES SHALL NOT BE
PERMITTED OUTSIDE THE. PULLBOX OR CONDULET. THE WIRE SHALL BE
DEPRESSED IN THE SLOT WITHOUT THE USE OF SHARP OBJECTS WHICH
MIGHT DAMAGE THE POLYETHYLENE. THE LOOP SHALL BE HELD IN PLACE
EVERY FIVE FEET WITH ONE INCH (APPROXIMATE) STRIPS OF RUBBER,
NEOPRENE, FLEXIBLE TUBING OR FOAM BACKER ROD AS APPROVED BY THE
ENGINEER. THESE HOLD DOWN STRIPS SHALL BE LEFT IN PLACE WHEN THE
SLOT IS FILLED WITH ROADWAY LOOP EMBEDDING SEALER.
THE ENDS OF THE POLYETHYLENE TUBING, ENCASING THE WIRE, SHALL BE
GIVEN A WATERPROOF SEAL IMMEDIATELY AFTER PLACING THE WIRE TO
PREVENT MO I STURE FROM ENTER I NG THE TUBE. WHERE THE LOOP W I RES
CROSS PAVEMENT JOINTS AND CRACKS, THE LOOP WIRES SHALL BE
PROTECTED US I NG THE METHOD SPEC I F I ED ON THE MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS.
647.10.1.2
14 AWG LOOP WIRE THHN, THWN OR XHHW STRANDED
1. THE LOOP SHALL BE OUTLINED ON THE PAVEMENT TO CONFORM TO THE
SPECIFIED CONFIGURATION. THE DETECTOR LOOP SHALL BE INSTALLED IN
A SAWED SLOT IN THE ROADWAY SURFACE 5/16 INCH WiDE BY PROPER
DEPTH TO PROVIDE 2" MINIMUM COVER. A 1 1/4 INCH DIAMETER DRILLED
HOLE OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD SHALL BE MADE IN THE PAVEMENT AT
EACH INTERSECTION OF SAW CUTS TO PREVENT SHARP BENDS OF THE WIRE.
THE INTERSECTION OF SAW CUTS SHALL OVERLAP SO THAT THE SLOTS HAVE
FULL DEPTH AND A SMOOTH BOTTOM. WHEN INSTALLING THE DETECTOR
LOOP WIRE THE PAVEMENT SHALL BE DRY AND THE WEATHER SHALL NOT
INCLUDE THE THREAT OF IMPENDING PRECIPITATION. THE SAWED SLOT
SHALL BE COMPLETELY CLEAN OF OUST AND DEBRIS AND THOROUGHLY DRY.
HOT AIR MAY BE USED TO DRY THE SAW CUT. THE INSTALLATION SHALL
NOT PROCEED UNTIL SLOTS ARE COMPLETELY DRY AND FREE OF ANY
DEBRIS.
'ASE ,
-rs- ,
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. THE LOOP WIRE SHALL BE INSTALLED I.STARTING AT THE ROADSIDE
PULLBOX OR CONDU I T AROUND' .THE LOOP FOR THE SPEC I F I ED NUMBER OF
TURNS AND BACK TO. THE P.ULLBOX OR CONDUl:..ET. SPLICES SHALL NOT BE
PERMITTED OUTSIDE' THE .PULLBOX OR CONDULET. THE WIRE SHALL BE
DEPRESSED IN THE SLOT WITHOUT THE USE OF SHARP OBJECTS WHICH
MIGHT DAMAGE WIRE I NSULAT ION. THE LOOP SHALL BE HELD I N PLACE
EVERY FIVE FEET WITH ONE INCH (APPROXIMATE) STRIPS OF RUBBER,
NEOPRENE, FLEXIBLE TUBING OR FOAM BACKER ROD AS APPROVED BY THE
ENGINEER. THESE HOLD DOWN STRIPS SHALL BE LEFT IN.PLACE WHEN THE
SLOT IS FILLED WITH ROADWAY LOOP EMBEDDING SEALER.
3 . AFTER SUCCESSFUL TESTI NG OF EACH LOOP, THE SLOTS SHALL BE
FILLED WITH SEALANT TO WITHIN AT LEAST itS INCH OF THE PAVEMENT
SURFACE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SEALANT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED
INSTALLAT,ION PROCEDURES. THE SEALANT SHALL FULLY ENCASE ALL THE
CONDUCTORS AND BE AT LEAST TWO (2) INCHES THICK ABOVE THE TOP
CONDUCTOR IN THE SAW CUT. BEFORE SETTING, SURPLUS SEALANT SHALL
BE REMOVED FROM THE ADJACENT ROAD SURFACES WITHOUT THE USE OF
SOLVENTS. EPOXY SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION
8SC - EP('1XY RES I N ADHES I VES. POL YEURATHANE SEALANTS SHALL
CONFORM TO THE STANDARD SPEC I F I CAT IONS SECT I ON 833.09 I F THE
CONTRACTOR I NTENDS TO SUBST I TUTE ANY SEALANT NOT ON THE STATE
APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SAMPLES OF
THE PROPOSED SEALANT TO THE OFFICE OF MATERIALS AND RESEARCH, 15
KENNEDY DR., FOREST PARK, GA. 30050, FOR APPROVAL AND MATERIALS
CERTIFICATION.
WHEN THE ENG I NEER DETERM I NES THAT THE LOOP SEALER HAS SET
SUFFICIENTLY TO ACCOMMODATE VEHICULAR TRAFFIC BUT THE SURFACE
REMAINS TACKY, THE SEALER ON THE PAVEMENT SURFACE MUST BE DUSTED
WITH CEMENT DUST BEFORE OPENING THE LANE(S) TO'TRAFFIC.
ANY SOLVENTS USED TO CLEAN LOOP INSTALLATION EDUIPMENT SHALL BE
DISPOSED OF IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND
ALL LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
4. THE SHIELDED LEAD-IN CABLE SHALL BE CONTINUOUS (NO SPLICES)
FROM THE PULL BOX OR CONDULET TO THE CONTROLLER CABINET
TERMINALS. THE GROUND WIRE IN THE SHIELDED CABLE SHALL BE
GROUNDED AT THE PULL BOX.
A SINGLE LOOP TO BE OPERATED ON AN INDIVIDUAL DETECTOR CHANNEL OR
SEPARATE DETECTOR AMPLIFIER UNIT SHALL HAVE A SEPARATE' SHIELDED
LOOP LEAD-IN BETWEEN THE PULL BOX OR CONDULET AND THE CABINET.
WHERE TWO (2) OR MORE LOOPS ARE TO BE OPERATED ON THE SAME
DETECTOR CHANNEL OR DETECTOR AMPLIFIER UNIT, THEY SHALL BE WIRED
IN SERIES TO THEIR. LOOP LEAD-IN AT THE PULL BOX OR CONDULET.
SERIES PARALLEL CONNECTION MAY BE USED WHEN SERIES CONNECTION
DOES NOT MEET THE MANUFACTURER' S SPECIFIED OPERATING RANGE FOR
THE DETECTOR AMPLIFIER UNIT.
r
ALL SPLICES SHALL BE WEATHER TIGHT AND WATER PROOF AND SHALL BE
MADE ONLY AFTER THE DETECTOR SYSTEM HAS BEEN DEMONSTRATED UNDER
TRAFFIC CONDITIONS TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ENGINEER.
ALL LOOP CONDUCTORS FOR EACH DIRECT I ON OF TRAVEL FROM THE SAME
PHASE OF A TRAFFIC SIGNAL, IN THE SAME PULL BOX, SHALL BE SPLICED
TO A CABLE WHICH SHALL BE RUN FROM THE PULL BOX ADJACENT TO THE
PASE 7
rS-7
SAW CUT DETECTOR LOOP TO A SENSOR UNIT MOUNTED IN THE CONTROLLER
CABINET.
647.10.2 TESTING LOOP DETECTOR INSTALLATION
A. AFTER CONDUCTORS ARE INSTALLED IN THE SLOTS CUT IN THE
PAVEMENT AND PR I OR TO SEAL I NG , TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
INSTALLER ON EACH LOOP INSTALLED. THESE TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED
AT THE POINT WHERE THE LOOP WIRE IS SPLlCED TO THE SHIELDED LEAD-
IN WIRE (IN PULL BOX, CONDULET, OR POLE BASE) AND AGAIN AT THE
PO I NT WHERE TH IS SH I ELDED LEAD- I N WIRE ENTERS THE CONTROLLER
CABINET. IN THE EVENT THAT "THERE ARE NO SPLICE POINTS, (AS' IN
DIRECT ENTRY TO CONTROLLER CABINET) ONLY THE TESTS AT THE
CONTROLLER ARE REQUIRED. THE TEST RESULTS OF THE TESTS SHALL BE
RECORDED ON THE INSTALLATION DATA SHEET (647.10.2.1), (MAKE
COPIES AS REQUIRED). THESE DATA SHEETS WILL BE PART OF THE
PROJECT RECORDS, AND A COpy SHALL BE PLACED I N THE CONTROLLER
CABINET.
B. THE FOLLOWING FIVE (5) TESTS SHALL BE REQUIRED TO EVALUATE
EACH LOOP INSTALLATION FOR ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO SEALING THE LOOP
IN THE PAVEMENT:
1) INDUCED AC VOLTAGE TEST:
A READING OF 0.05 VOLT OR LESS ON A DIGITAL VOLT METER OR
NO DEFLECTION ON THE POINTER OF AN ANALOG METER
2) INDUCTANCE:
INDUCT ANCE ( L ) I S MEASURED IN M I CROHENR I ES ( MH ) AND THE
TOTAL INDUCTANCE IS EQUAL TO THE INDUCTANCE OF LOOP +
INDUCTANCE OF THE LOOP LEAD-IN.
ACCEPTABLE INDUCTANCE SHALL BE WITHIN 10~ OF THE CALCULATED
VALUE FOR A SINGLE LOOP WITH THE FOLLOWING DESIGN CRITERIA:
STANDARD (BI-POLE) LOOPS:
o"X o' (3 TURNS): L ~ 70 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
b"X IS" (2 TURNS): L - SO MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
0" X 30" (2 TURNS) I L - 120 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
b" X 40" (2 TURNS) I L · 105 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP.
LEAD-IN
0" X 50" (2 TURNS): L -= 205 MH +23 MH PER 100 FEET. OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
b"X 70" (2 TURNS) : L .. 285 + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
PA&E 8
IS - i
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
QUADRUPOLE (QP) LOOPS:.
6' X 30' (2,4,2 TURNS): L ... 269 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
6' X 40' ( 2 , 4 , 2 TURNS) I L - 349 .MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
6 'X 50 ' (2,4,4 TURNS): L ... 429 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
c'X cO' (2,4,2 TURNS): L - 509 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
c' X 70' (2,4,2 TURNS): L .. 589 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
3) LEAKAGE RESISTANCE TO GROUND:
A READING OF 1 MEGOHM OR MORE
4) LOOP RESISTANCE:
THE RESISTANCE READING ON AN OHM METER IS APPROXIMATELY
WITHIN 10% OF THE CALCULATED VALUE~
ACCEPTABLE RESISTANCE (R) (DC @ c8 DEGREES F)
OHMS(u)
14 AWG WIRE: R e 13.32u/MILE (OR) R .. 2.523 X 10-3u/FT.
APPROXIMATELY 2.6 OHMS PER 1000 FEET OF 14 AWG WIRE
12 AWG WIRE: R .. 8.38U/MILE (OR) R .. 1.587 X 10-3U/FT.
5) LOOP Q:
Q AT 50K HZ IS GREATER THAN S.
ANY OUT-OF-RANGE READINGS ON ANY OF THE ABOVE TESTS SHALL
BE IMMEDIATELY REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER. IF ANY TESTS ARE FOUND
UNACCEPTABLE, THE LOOP SHALL BE REMOVED AND NEW WIRE INSTALLED
AND THE SAME PROCEDURE SHALL BE REPEATED. THESE TEST RESULTS
SHALL CONTAIN THE TYPE AND MODEL NUMBER OF THE EQUIPMENT USED,
(MUST BE OHM METER HAVING A HIGH RESISTANCE SCALE OF R X 10K OHMS
OR GREATER), ITS LAST CALIBRATION DATE AND THE SCALE USED.
THE LOOP SHALL ALSO BE CHECKED WITt:! AN APPROPRIATE IMPEDANCE
TESTER TO DETERMINE THE NATURAL OPERATING FREQUENCY AND
IMPEDANCE.
THE COMPLETED UNITS SHALL DETECT ALL LICENSED MOTOR VEHICLES. IF
THEY DO NOT DETECT PROPERLY, NO PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR ANY WORK
ON THE SIGNAL INSTALLATION UNTIL CORRECTIONS ARE COMPLETED.
PAGE 9
75-7
647.10.2.1 LOOP INSTALLATION DATA SHEET
DATE:
WEATHER:
APPROXIMATE TEMPERATURE
PAVEMENT CONDITION - WET ), OR. DRY (
LOCATION: INSTALLATION OR PLAN SHEET NUMBER
ROUTE NUMBERS OR NAMES
LANE LOCATION OR LOOP ~
CONTRACTOR:
MATERIAL:
LOOP WIRE TYPE AND LGTH.:
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE TYPE AND LGTH.:
SPLICE POINT:
CONDUIT LGTH. FROM CURB'E.P. TO SPLICE POINT:
CONDUIT LGTH. FROM SPLICE POINT TO CABINET:
SEALANT TYPE AND BRAND:
INTERCONNECT WIRE TYPE AND LGTH:
LOOP TESTS:
1. INDUCED VOLTAGE
2. INDUCT ANCE
3. LEAKAGE RESISTANCE TO GROUND
4. LOOP RESISTANCE
5. LOOP Q (QUALITY)
)
MICROHENRIES
MEGA OHMS
OHMS
Q
COMMENTS:
INSPECTOR & TITLE:
PAGE 10
-rs-/CJ
I
I
I
I
I
'I~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.11 PEDESTRIAN PUSHBUTTON
THE PUSH' BUTTON SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WITH A
PEDESTRIAN INSTRUCTION SIGN AS ILLUSTRATED .ON THE GEORGIA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD DETAIL SHEETS AND SHALL
CONFORM TO THE PLANS AT SPECIFIED .LOCATIONS. 'THE PEDESTRIAN
BUTTONS SHALL BE LOCATED AS SHOWN ON THE SIGNAL PLAN SHEET, NEAR
THE PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK AND FACE THE DIRECTION OF THE PEDESTRIAN
SIGNAL HEAD THAT CONTROLS THE PEDESTRIAN CROSSING MOVEMENT. THE
BUTTONS SHALL BE LOCATED APPROXIMATELY 42 INCHES, ABOVE SIDEWALK
LEVEL. AN EXISTING STREET LIGHT POLE, TRAFFIC ~SIGNAL POLE OR
PEDESTAL POLE SHALL BE. UTILIZED FOR MOUNTING THE BUTTONS, WHEN
POSSIBLE, AND IN THE MANNER AND LOCATION SHOWN IN THE PLANS.
647.12 ELECTRICAL CABLE
ELECTRICAL CABLE SHALL BE INSTALLED AND CONNECTED TO THE PROPER
EQUIPMENT TO PRODUCE AN OPERATING TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND/OR SYSTEM.
ALL CABLE SHALL BE OF STRANDED COPPER, EXCEPT EARTH GROUND. NO
ALUMINUM CABLE SHALL BE ALLOWED.
647.12.1 SIGNAL CABLE
SIGNAL CABLES LEAVING A STRUCTURE OR WEATHERHEAD TO ENTER A
SIGNAL FIXTURE SHALL BE NEATLY TIED TO THE MESSENGER CABLE AS
ILLUSTRATED ON THE GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD
DETAIL SHEETS.
A MINIMUM TWENTY-FOUR (24) INCH WEATHER DRIP LOOP AS SHOWN IN THE
CONSTRUCTION DETAIL SHEETS OF THE PLANS SHALL BE MADE AT THE
ENTRANCE TO EACH SIGNAL HEAD, AT THE ENTRANCE OF A POLE, AND AT
THE ENTRANCE OF ANY OVERHEAD CONDUIT AND WEArHERHEAD.
647.12.2 INTERCONNECT CABLE
. ' : :.~ ';' .
THE INTERCONNECT CABLE (COMMUNICATION CABLE) SHALL PROVIDE THE
LI NK BETWEEN A MASTER CONTROLLER AND THE FIELD LOCATED
CONTROLLERS AND SENSORS. THE CABLE SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR AERIAL
(LASHEQ .OR SELF-SUPPORTING), DUCT (CONDUIT) OR DIRECT EARTH
BURIAL INSTALLATION. THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF CONDUCTOR PAIRS '(6)
AND THE MINIMUM GAUGE (19) AWG SHALL BE SHOWN IN THE PLANS. THE
COLOR-CODE, POLYETHYLENE INSULATION, COPPER TAPE SHIELDING,
POL YETHYLENE JACKET I NG . SHALL BE I N ACCORDANCE TO I MSA
SPECIFICATIONS, WITH A MINIMUM RATING OF 600 VOLT.
INSTALLATION. THE INTERCONNECT CABLE SHALL BE SUPPORTED ON
EXISTING UTILITY POLES AND/OR INSTALLED SIGNAL POLES EXCEPT, IF
NOTED ON THE PLANS FOR DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION. CABLES SHALL
BE PULLED WITH A CABLE GR I P DES I GNED TO PROV I DE A FIRM HOLD ON
THE EXTERIOR COVERING OF THE. CABLE. THE CABLES SHALL BE PULLED
WITH A MINIMUM OF DRAGGING ON THE GRQUND OR PAVEMENT. POWDERED
SOAPSTONE, TALC, OR OTHER APPROVED INERT LUBRICANT(S) SHALL BE
USED TO FACILITATE THE PULLING OF THE CABLE THROUGH CONDUIT.
WHEN A SEPARATE MESSENGER CABLE IS USED THE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
SHALL BE SPIRALLY WRAPPED TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF IMSA-20-2
SPECIFICATIONS. THEY SHALL BE INSTALLED BY USING A LASHING
MACHINE OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT, WHEN SHOWN ON THE PLANS AS
OVERHEAD CABLE.
PA6E 11
-rS -II
FOR AERIAL INSTALLATIONS THE CONTRACTOR MAY ELECT TO USE A SELF-
SUPPORTING "FIGURE 8" TYPE CABLE WHICH MEETS THE IMSA-20-4
SPECIFICATIONS (POLYETHYLENE JACKET). IN EITHER CASE THE
MESSENGER IS TO BE CONSIDERED INCIDENTAL TO THE INSTALLATION OF
THE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE AND WILL NOT BE PAID FOR SEPARATELY.
FOR DIRECT EARTH BURIAL THE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE SHALL MEET THE
REQUIREMENTS OF IMSA 20-6 SPECIFICATIONS (PE JACKET). IT IS
RECOMMEDED THAT SPLICES OUTSIDE THE SIGNAL CABINET BE LIMITED TO
THE END OF FULL REELS OF S, 000 FEET ; HOWEVER UP TO TWO . (2)
ADDITIONAL SPLICES MAY BE ALLOWED PER 1/2 MILE OF CABLE, IF
APPROVED BY THE ENG J NEER. SPL I CE POI NTS SHALL BE READ I L Y
ACCESSABLE WITHOUT TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR LANE CLOSURE(S) AND SHALL
BE MADE NEAR SUPPORT POLES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ORDER AND
INSTALL THE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE IN LENGTHS. SUFFICIENT TO
COMPLETE ALL INSTALLATIONS BETWEEN CONTROLLER CABINETS WITH
M I N I MAL SPL I C I NG . CABLE SHALL BE LOOPED I N AND OUT OF CONTROL
CABINETS. THE CABLE ENDS SHALL BE TAPED TO EXCLUDE .MOISTURE, AND
SHALL REMAIN SO UNTIL THE TERMINALS ARE ATTACHED. THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL TAKE EVERY PRECAUTION TO ENSURE THE CABLE IS NOT DAMAGED
DURING STORAGE AND INSTALLATION. THE CABLE SHALL NOT BE STEPPED
ON 8Y WORKMEN OR RUN OVER BY ANY VEHICLE OR EQUIPMENT. THE CABLE
SHALL NOT BE PULLED ALONG THE GROUND OR OVER OR AROUND
OBSTRUCTIONS. ALL CABLE SHALL BE INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY THE
ENGINEER BEFORE INSTALLATION.
FIELD TEST: UPON COMPLETION OF EACH INSTALLATION FROM ONE
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION TO THE NEXT CONTROLLER INSTALLATION, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL CONDUCT A TEST FOR CONTINUITY AND ISOLATION IN
THE PRESENCE OF THE ENGINEER AND A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE LOCAL
GOVERNMENT"S ELECTRICAL OR SIGNAL DEPARTMENT.
THE CONTINUITY TEST SHALL BE PERFORMED FOR EACH CONDUCTOR IN THE
CABLE. CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE SHALL NOT EXCEED 10 OHMS PER 1000
FEET. THE RESISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED WITH AN OHM METER HAVING
A MINIMUM INPUT IMPEDANCE OF 10 MEGOHMS PER VOLT. THE
RESISTANCE OF EACH PAIR SHALL BE RECORDED ON THE DATA SHEET (S)
647.12.2.1 AND FURNISHED AS PROJECT DOCUMENTATION.
THE ISOLATION TEST FOR TESTING. INSULATION RESISTANCE SHALL BE
PERFORMED FOR EACH CONDUCTOR AND CABLE SHIELD IN THE SYSTEM. THE
ISOLATION TEST SHALL BE MEASURED WITH ALL CONDUCTORS IN THE CABLE
(EXCEPT THE TEST CONDUCTOR) GROUNDED. THE MEASUREMENT SHALL BE
MADE WITH A DC POTENTIAL OF NOT LESS THAN 360 VOLTS NOR MORE THAN
SSO VOLTS, APPLIED FOR ONE MINUTE. INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR
EACH CABLE CONDUCTOR AND THE SHIELD SHALL EXCEED 1000 MEGOHM PER
MILE. THE INSULATION RESISTANCE OF EACH CONDUCTOR SHALL BE
RECORDED ON THE DATA SHEET(S) 647.12.2.1 AND FURNISHED AS PROJECT
. DOCUMENTATION.
IF ANY CONDUCTORS FAIL THE CONTINUITY AND/OR ISOLATION TEST, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE THE INSTALLED CABLE, INSTALL NEW CABLE,
AND REPEAT THE TESTS. '
GENERAL: PR I OR WR I TTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ENG I NEER SHALL BE
REQUIRED SHOULD THE CONTRACTOR DESIRE TO INCREASE THE NUMBER OF
PA I RS OR USE A LARGER S I Z E CONDUCTOR , AT NO CHANGE IN PR I CE .
REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTING INTERCONNECT AND/OR MESSENGER CABLE SHALL
BE INCIDENTAL TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW CABLE.
PASE 12
TS -/z,..
I
I
I
I
I
I..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;/~' ~~'-'
'.:: '\- "'
647.12.2.1 INTERCONNECT (COMMUNICATIONS) CABLE DATA SHEET
DATE:
WEATHER:
LOCATION OF CONTROLLER CABINET:
TERMINI OF CABLE~
CONTRACTOR:
MATERIALs
TYPE WIRE:
NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS:
SPLICE POINTs
TOTAL LENGTH OF CABLE:
TESTS:
CONDUCTOR JACKET
COLOR/DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Ci'.
10.
11.
12.
13. Shield
PASE 13
CONTINUITY
(OHMS)
ISOLATION
(MEGOHMS)
-rS-IS
PA6E 14
/5-/4
I
I
I
I
I
I',
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
INSPECTOR & TITLEs .
647.12.3 MESSENGER CABLE, STRANDED
THE CABLE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM:A 475 SIEMENS-MARTIN GRADE WITH
CLASS A COATING.
THE MESSENGER STRAND SHALL BE ~SED TO SUPPORT ALL CABLE INDICATED
ON THE PLANS AS OVERHEAD CABLE. THE MESSENGER SHALL INCLUDE THE
DEVICES SUCH AS RINGS OR LASHING USED TO ATTACH THE CABLE. THE
MESSENGER SHALL RUN FROM STRUCTURE TO STRUCTURE WITHOUT SPLICING.
PR I OR TO ERECT I NG MESSENGER STRAND, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
DETERM I NE THE LENGTH OF SUSPENS I ON STRAND REQU I RED TO SPAN THE
DISTANCE BETWEEN THE POLES, ALLOWING A SUFFICIENT ADDITIONAL
LENGTH OF SPAN WIRE TO ALLOW FOR SAG. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SAG
SHALL BE FIVE PERCENT OF ONE-HALF OF THE LONGEST 0 I AGONAL
DISTANCE BETWEEN SIGNAL POLES. ATTACHMENT POINTS FOR THE
MESSENGER STRAND AT THE SIGNAL POLE SHALL BE CALCULATED ACCORDING
TO THE PLAN DETAIL SHEET.
MESSENGER STRANDS SHALL BE SO SET THAT THE HE I GHT OF THE
INSTALLED TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS SHALL CONFORM TO THE CLEARANCES
SET FORTH ON THE STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS. WOOD POLES SHALL BE
DRILLED TO RECEIVE THIMBLE EYE THROUGH BOLTS SUCH THAT THE SPAN
WIRE AND EYE BOLT, AT EACH CONNECTION, WILL FORM AN APPROXIMATE
STRAIGHT ANGLE. IN NO CASE SHALL THE MESSENGER PULL OR STRAIN ON
THE EYE BOLT BE AT AN ANGLE GREATER THAN 10 DEGREES +/- FROM
STRAIGHT. DOWN-GUY WIRES MUST BE ATTACHED TO GUY HOOKS AND CAN
NEVER BE ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO THE EYEBOLT. . MESSENGER STRAND
CLEARANCES SHALL BE I N CONFORMANCE WITH LOCAL UT I L I TY COMPANY
STANDARDS. ALL ATTACHMENT POINTS FOR STRANDED MESSENGER CABLE
SHALL BE MADE WITH THE APPROPRIATE SIZE STRAND VISECS).
647.12.4 UNDERGROUND CABLE FOR SIGNAL CIRCUITSs
UNDERGROUND CABLE FOR SIGNAL CIRCUITS SHALL CONSIST OF CABLE WITH
OR WITHOUT CONDUIT, AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS.
WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO INSTALL CABLE UNDER AN EXISTING PAVEMENT
OR SURFACED SHOULDER, CONDUIT, WHEN SPECIFIED, SHALL BE INSTALLED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF ARTICLE 647.13.
647.12.4.1 CABLE IN CONDUIT:
CABLES IN CONDU I TS SHALL BE CARE FULL Y PULLED J NTO PLACE US I NG
APPROVED METHODS SO THAT THE CABLE WILL BE INSTALLED FREE FROM
ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL INJURY. POWDERED SOAPSTONE, TALC, OR
OTHER APPROVED J NERT LUBR I CANT (S) SHALL BE USED I NPLAC J NG
CONDUCTORS IN CONDUIT. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE HANDLED AND INSTALLED
IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO PR~VENT KINKS, BENDS OR OTHER DISTORTIONS
WH I CH COULD CAUSE DAMAGE _.~ THE CONDUCTOR OR OUTER COVER I NG . ALL
CABLES WITHIN A SINGLE CO~~UIT SHALL BE PULLED AT THE SAME TIME.
WHEN CABLES ARE PULLED THRU HAND HOLES, IN POLE SHAFTS, ETC., A
PAD OF FIRM RUBBER OR OTHER SUITABLE MATERIAL SHALL BE PLACED
BETWEEN THE CABLE AND THE EDGES OF THE OPENING TO PREVENT CABLE
DAMAGE.
'I
;1
:1
I
'1 .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. :"-;lr
f '.-
647.12.4.2 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE IN TRENCHESl
CABLE SHALL MEET IMSA SPECIFICATIONS 20-5 OR 20-6. CABLES SHALL
~ BE UNREELED AND PULLED INTO THE TRENCH FROM ONE END. THEY
SHALL BE UNREELED AND LAID ALONGSIDE THE TRENCH AND THEN LAID IN
THE TRENCH. THE CABLES SHALL BE ALLOWED TO "SNAKE" SLIGHTLY IN
THE TRENCH TO ALLOW. FOR . SETTL I NG OF EARTH. THERE SHALL BE NO
CROSSOVERS OF CABLE IN THE TRENCH. ALL ROCKS~ DEBRIS AND ANY
SHARP OBJECTS WILL BE REMOVED FROM THE TRENCH.. AFTER THE
INSTALLATION HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER,
BACKFILL WILL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 647.13.1.3
WHERE CABLE IS BROUGHT UP INTO THE BASE OF THE POLE SHAFTS, PULL
OR JUNCTION BOXES, SUFFICIENT SLACK SHALL BE LEFT TO ENABLE THE
CONNECTIONS TO BE MADE OUTSIDE THE POLE SHAFTS, PULL OR JUNCTION
BOXES. DIRECT BURIAL UTILIZING VIBRA PLOWS WILL BE ACCEPTABLE.
DEPTH OF BURIAL, WHEN DIRECT BURIAL IS UTILIZED, SHALL BE
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.12.4.3 SPLICES:
SPLICING OF CONDUCTORS SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE W1TH THE
NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE AND MATERIALS SHALL BE USED THAT WILL BE
COMPATIBLE WITH THE SHEATH AND INSULATION OF THE CABLE. SPLICES
SHALL BE MADE AT THE FIRST OPPORTUNITY, I.E. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL
BOXES, CONTROLLER CABINET OR POLE BASES UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON
THE PLANS. STRA I GHT OR LINE SPL I CES SHALL BE MADE WITH COPPER
CLAD PRESSED SLEEVES, OR AN APPROVED EQU I VALENT ( SEE "PULL BOX
SPLICES" IN MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION DETAILS). TEE SPLICES
SHALL BE MADE WITH A PRESSED SLEEVE, SPLIT OR UNSPLIT TYPE, OR AN
APPROVED EQU I VALENT. CABLE SPL I C I NG I N TRANSFORMER BASE TYPE
POLES MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED ,WITH A PREMOLDED FUSED SPLICE. AFTER A
CONDUCTOR SPLICE IS MADE, IT SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A PLASTIC,
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE, ALL WEATHER 8.S MIL ELECTRICAL TAPE. THE
TAPE SHALL BE APPLIED HALF-LAP TO A THICKNESS EQUAL TO 1-1/2
TIMES THE THICKNESS OF THE FACTORY APPLIED INSULATION AND SHEATH,
AND TAPERED OFF OVER THE SHEATH NEATLY TO A POINT APPROXIMATELY 3
INCHES FROM THE CONDUCTOR SPLICE. ALL SHARP POINTS AND EDGES OF
THE CONNECTOR SHALL BE PADDED, AND ALL VOIDS FILLED WITH EXTRA
WRAPS OF PLASTIC TAPE. THE TAPE SHALL NOT BE STRETCHED
EXCESSIVELY NOR IN SUCH MANNER AS TO CAUSE CREEPING. FOR CABLE
SPLICING IN JUNCTION BOXES, OR POLES MOUNTED ON STRUCTURES, A
HEAT-SHRINKABLE SELF-SEALING SPLICE MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THE
ABOVE AT THE CONTRACTOR'S OPTION. ALL SPLICED JOINTS SHALL BE
WATERTIGHT.
647.12.4.4 UNDERGROUND CABLE SPLICESt
UNDERGROUND CABLE SPL ICES, I F SPEC I F I ED , SHALL BE MADE WITH A
PRESSED SLEEVE CONNECTOR OR EQUIVALENT, AND A PROTECTiVE PLASTIC
CASE INSTALLED AROUND THE CABLE. ENDS OF THE CASE SHALL BE
SEALED WITH PLASTIC TAPE, FOLLOWING WHICH THE'CASE SHALL. BE
POURED FULL OF AN INSULATING COMPOUND, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. THESE SPLICES SHALL BE WATER
TIGHT AND CAPABLE OF SATISFACTORY OPERATION UNDER CONTINUOUS
PASE 15
{S -IS
PAGE 16
-rS -I'
I.
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUBMERSION IN WATER.
647.12.5 AERIAL CABLE FOR SIGNAL CIRCUITS:
AERIAL CABLE FOR SIGNAL CIRCUITS SHALL CONSIST OF ONE OR ALL OF
THE FOLLOWING CABLES: LOOP LEAD-IN (SENSOR AND DETECTOR), SIGNAL
WIRING (CONTROLLER) OR INTERCONNECT CABLE (COMMUNICATIONS).
THESE CABLES SHALL BE SUPPORTED ON EXISTING OR CONTRACTOR
INSTALLED SIGNAL AND/OR UTILITY POLES. WHERE INTERCONNECT CABLE
IS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MESSENGER CABLE, AS FIGURE EIGHT
CABLE, I T SHALL CONFORM TO THE REDU I REMENTS OF I MSA-20-4
SPECIFICATIONS.
647.13 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:
ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT ON POLES SHALL BE RIGID, GALVANIZED METAL
CONDUIT.
ENDS OF METALLIC CONDUIT SHALL BE REAMED AFTER THREADS ARE CUT.
OTHER CONDU I T SHALL 8E REAMED AS NECESSARY. ALL ENDS SHALL BE
CUT SQUARE AND SHALL BUTT SOLIDLY IN THE JOINTS TO FORM A SMOOTH
RACEWAY FOR CABLES. CONDUIT JOINTS'SHALL BE MADE IN.SUCH A
MANNER SO AS TO FORM A WATERTIGHT SEAL. METALLIC CONDUIT THREADS
SHALL BE COATED WITH RED OR WHITE LEAD, PIPE COMPOUND OR
THERMOPLASTIC SEAL, AND THEN BE SECURELY CONNECTED. PLASTIC
CONDUIT JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH THE MATERIALS AND IN THE MANNER
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE CONDUIT AND APPROVED BY
THE ENGINEER.
BUSHINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT WHERE NECESSARY FOR
PROTECTION OF THE CONDUCTORS. WHERE THE CONDUIT IS INSTALLED FOR
FUTURE USE, THE ENDS OF METALLIC CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE PROPERLY
THREADED AND CAPPED. THE ENDS OF '::IN-METALLIC CONDUIT RUNS SHALL
BE SATISFACTORILY PLUGGED TO PREVENT WATER OR OTHER FOREIGN
MATTER FROM ENTERING THE CONDUIT SYSTEM.
ALL CONDU)T ON THE EXTERIOR OF POLES SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH
GALVANIZED, TWO (2) HOLE STRAPS OR CLAMPS. CLAMPS SHH_L BE
PLACED NOT MORE THAN THREE (3) FEET FROM ANY JUNCTION BOX,
CONDULET, WEATHERHEAD AND WI LL BE PLACED AT FI Vi:. (5) FOOT
INTERVALS ELSEWHERE. THE CLAMPS SHALL BE FASTENED WITH
GALVANIZED SCREWS OR LAG BOLTS TO WOOD POLES AND WITH GALVANIZED
WEJ-IT BOLTS OR ALUMINUM DRIVE PINS TO CONCRETE POLES.
AFTER INSTALLATION, THE INSPECTOR SHALL DETERMINE THAT THE
PLACEMENT OF CONDUITS OR FITTINGS HAVE NOT WARPED OR OTHERWISE
DISTORTED ANY CONDULETS OR TERMINAL, CONTROL OR JUNCTION BOXES.
647.13.1 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT:
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SHALL CONSIST OF ENCASED OR DIRECT BURIAL
CONDUIT. THE CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A TRENCH EXCAVATED TO
THE D I MENS IONS AND LINES SPEC I F I ED ON THE PL.ANS. M I N I MUM
~INISHED COVER, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, SHALL BE 18", EXCEPT
UNDER PAVEMENT WHERE THE M I N I MUM COVER SHALL BE 24 II BELOW THE
BOTTOM OF THE PAVEMENT.
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BEFORE ANY EXCAVATION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE THE
LOCATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL LINES, DRAINAGE OR UTILITY FACILITIES
IN THE VICINITY AND SHALL CONDUCT HIS WORK IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO
AVOID DAMAGE TO SAME. PRECAUTIONS SHALL BE TAKEN TO INSURE THAT
THE CONDUIT WILL BE LOCATED TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH PROPOSED GUARD
RAIL, SIGN POSTS, ETC.
CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE BUILT IN STRAIGHT LINES WHERE POSSISLE.
WHERE SWEEPS ARE NECESSARY, LONG SWEEP BENDS SHALL BE USED WHEN
FEASIBLE. A RADIUS OF SIX TIMES THE NORMAL DIAMETER OF THE
CONDUIT IS THE MINIMUM THAT SHALL BE USED, UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED.
OBSTRUCTIONS ENCOUNTERED WHEN EXCAVATING TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND
CONDUIT MAY REQUIRE MINOR CHANGES IN LOCATIONS OF CONDUIT RUNS,
PULL BOXES, ETC. ALL SUCH CHANGES SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE
APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. WHERE POSSIBLE, A MINIMUM OF 12 INCHES
SHALL BE PROVIDED BETWEEN THE FINISHED LINES OF CONDUIT.RUNS AND
UTILITY FACILITIES SUCH AS GAS LINES, WATER MAINS, AND OTHER
UNDERGROUND FACILITIES NOT ASSOCIATED WITH THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
WHERE THE CONDUIT RUN IS ADJACENT TO CONCRETE WALLS, PIERS,
FOOT I NGS , ETC., A M I N I MUM OF 4 I NCHES OF UND I STURBED EARTH OR
FIRML Y COMPACTED SOIL SHALL BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN THE CONDUIT
AND THE ADJACENT CONCRETE OR, WHEN THE CONDUIT IS ENCASED,
BETWEEN THE ENCASEMENT AND THE ADJACENT CONCRETE.
UNLESS SPECIFIED ON THE PLANS, TRENCHES SHALL NOT BE EXCAVATED IN
EXISTING PAVEMENT OR SURFACED SHOULDERS TO INSTALL CONDUIT. WHEN
IT IS NECESSARY TO PLACE CONDUIT UNDER AN EXISTING PAVEMENT, THE
CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED BY JACKING, BORING, OR OTHER APPROVED
MEANS. WHEN THE PLANS SPECIFICALLY ALLOW EXCAVATION OF A TRENCH
THROUGH AN EXISTING PAVEMENT OR SURFACED SHOULDER, THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL RESTORE THE PAVEMENT, SHOULDER SURFACE, BASE AND SUBGRADE
TO A CONDITION SATISFACTORY TO THE ENGINEER. REMOVAL .AND
SATISFACTORY DISPOSAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, SHOULDER SURFACE,
BASE AND SUB-GRADE AND RESTORING THEM TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION
WILL NOT BE PAID FOR DIRECTLY BUT SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE
CONTRACT PRICE FOR THE ITEMS TO WHICH THEY PERTAIN.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ALL TRENCHES FOR CONDUIT SHALL BE CUT
ON A SLIGHT GRADE (O.2~% MIN.) FOR DRAINAGE. WHERE IT IS NOT
PRACTICAL TO MAINTAIN THE GRADE ALL ONE WAY, THE DUCT LINES SHALL
BE GRADED FROM THE CENTER, BOTH DIRECT IONS, DOWN TO THE ENDS.
POCKETS OR TRAPS WHERE MOISTURE MAY ACCUMULATE SHALL BE AVOIDED.
THE WALLS OF THE TRENCH SHALL BE ESSENTIALLY VERTICAL. THE
BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH SHALL BE TAMPE~ AS NECESSARY TO PRODUCE A
FIRM FOUNDATION FOR THE CONDUIT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SHEET AND
BRACE THE TRENCHES, WHEN REQUIRED, AND SHALL ADEQUATELY SUPPORT
ALL PIPE AND OTHER STRUCTURES' EXPOSED IN TRENCHES, IF SUPPORT IS
NECESSARY TO PREVENT DAMAGE. FURNISHING, INSTALLING AND
SUBSE~UENT REMOVAL OF SHEETING, BRACING, AND SUPPORTS WILL NOT
BE PAID FOR DIRECTLY, BUT SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT
PRICES FOR OTHER ITEMS.
'ASE 17
TS-/7
PA&E 18
,5 - If
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.13.1.1 ENCASED CONDUIT:
ENCASED CONDUIT SHALL BE PLACED IN THE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE
PLANS AND UNLESS OTHERW I SE SPEC I F I ED, SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING:
THE ENCASEMENT SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF CLASS A CONCRETE MEET I NG
THE APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 500 OF THE SPECIFICATIONS.
THE . ENCASEMENT OR CONDUIT '-. UNDER ROADWAY PAVEMENTS OR SURFACES
SHALL EXTEND TO THE OUTER EDGES OF' THE SURFACED OR PAVED
SHOULDERS, OR ONE FOOT BEYOND THE OUTER EDGE OF THE SIDEWALK, OR
ONE FOOT BEYOND THE OUTER EDGE OF THE CURB WHEN NO SHOULDER OR
SIDEWALK IS INDICATED. THE CONDUIT SHALL EXTEND AT LEAST SIX
INCHES BEYOND THE ENCASEMENT. THREE INCHES OF CONCRETE SHALL BE
PLACED IN THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH AND THE CONDUIT PLACED
THEREON. THE ENDS OF THE CONDUIT SHALL BE PLUGGED TEMPORARILY TO
PREVENT THE ENTRANCE OF CONCRETE OR OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL.
CONCRETE SHALL THEN BE PLACED IN THE TRENCH TO A DEPTH THAT WILL
PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF THREE INCHES OF CONCRETE ABOVE THE CONDUIT.
NO CONDU I T SHALL BE ENCASED WITH CONCRETE UNT I L I NSPECTED AND
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT SHALL BE CURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 500.12, EXCEPT, THE CURING PERIOD MAY BE
REDUCED TO 24 HOURS (SEE 1.3 BACKF I LL I NG, BELOW). PRECAST
ENCASEMENT WILL BE PERMITTED WHEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.13.1.2 DIRECT BURIAL CONDUIT:
DIRECT BURIAL CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS
AND SHALL CONSIST OF RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL, RIGID' ALUMINUM OR
UNPLASTICIZED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE. MINIMUM COVERAGE UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED SHALL BE 18" BELOW TOP OF FINISHED GROUND OR
24" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE PAVEMENT.
WHEN ROCK IS ENCOUNTERED IN THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH, THE CONDUIT
SHALL BE INSTALLED ON A BED OF WELL COMPACTED FINE GRAIN SOIL AT
LEAST FOUR INCHES THICK.
647.13.1.3 BACKFILLINGs
ENCASED CONDUIT SHALL NOT BE BACKFILLED UNTIL THE CONCRETE
ENCASEMENT HAS CURED A M I N I MUM OF 24 HOURS. AFTER THE
INSTALLATION OF DIRECT BURIAL CONDUIT HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, IT SHALL BE PROMPTLY BACKFILLED TO THE
REQUIRED GRADE WITH SOIL FREE OF ROCKS OR OTHER FOREIGN MATTER.
BACKFILLING SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH APPROVED MATERIAL IN LAYERS
NOT EXCEEDING SIX INCHES IN LOOSE DEPTH, AND EACH LAYER SHALL BE
COMPACTED TO 1007. OF THE. MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY AS DETERMINED BY
TEST METHOD GDT: 7, 24 OR 67.
647.13.2 CONDUIT ON STRUCTURES:
ALL CONDUIT ON THE EXTERIOR OF SIGNAL POLES SHALL BE METALLIC.
THE CONDUIT FOR SIGNAL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE METALLIC FOR ITS
ENTIRE LENGTH FROM THE WEATHERHEAD ON THE POLE TO THE INTERIOR OF
THE CABINET. CONDUITS, CONDULETS, HANGERS, EXPANSION FITTINGS,
-I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AND ACCESSORIES SHAL~.BE INSTALLED ON STRUCTURES IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE PLANS AND, UNLESS OTHERWISE . SPEC I F I ED , IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE FOLLOWING:
CONDU I T SHALL RUN PARALLEL TO BEAMS, TRUSSES, SUPPORTS, PIER
CAPS, ETC., IN THE MOST DIRECT MANNER. HORIZONTAL RUNS SHALL BE
INSTALLED ON A SLIGHT GRADE, WITHOUT FORMING LOW SPOTS, IN ORDER
THAT THEY MAY DRAIN PROPERLY. CONDUITS SHALL BE RUN WITH SMOOTH,
EASY BENDS. THEY SHALL BE HELD IN BOXES WITH LOCKNUTS AND SHALL
HAVE BUSH I NGS FOR PROTECT I ON OF THE CONDUCTORS. WHEN NOT
SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS OR SPECIAL ,PROVISIONS, THE TYPE AND
METHOD FOR ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURES SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THE
CONTRACTOR TO THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL.
647.13.3 TESTING CONDUIT:
AFTER THE INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT IS COMPLETED, IT SHALL BE
TESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH A MANDREL IN THE PRESENCE OF THE
ENG I NEER . THE MANDREL SHALL HAVE A DIAMETER 1/4 I NCH SMALLER
THAN THE CONDUIT, AND A LENGTH OF 2 INCHES. ALL CONDUIT WHICH
WILL NOT ALLOW THE MANDREL TO PASS THRU SHALL BE REPAIRED TO THE
SATISFACTION OF THE ENGINEER. IF REPAIRS CANNOT BE EFFECTED, THE
CONDUIT SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO
THE DEPARTMENT.
AFTER THE MANDREL TEST, ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED
IN AN APPROVED MANNER, ACCEPTABLE TO THE ENGINEER.
WHEN CONDUIT IS INSTALLED AND WIRING IS TO BE DONE AT A LATER
DATE, THE CONTRACTOR INSTALLING THE CONDUIT SHALL PERFORM THE
MANDREL TEST, REAM THE DUCT OPEN I NG TO REMOVE. BURRS OR FORE I GN
MATTER, THOROUGHLY CLEAN, AND PROVIDE AND INSTALL A WEATHERPROOF
CAP AT EACH OPEN END. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO INSTALL A PULL
WIRE AND LEAVE IT IN THE CONDUIT WITH EACH END SECURED FOR FUTURE
USE. THIS WORK IS TO BE INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.14 GROUNDING
THE CABINETS, CONTROLLERS, POLES, PULL BOXES AND CONDUIT SHALL BE
GROUNDE;D TO REDUCE ANY EXTRANEOUS VOLTAGE TO A LEVEL WHERE IT
WILL NOT BE HARMFUL TO PERSONNEL OR EDU I PMENT . ALL GROUND J NG
CIRCUITS SHALL BE PERMANENT AND CONTINUOUS, WITH A CURRENT
CARRY I NG CAPAC I TY HIGH ENOUGH AND AN I MPEDANCE LOW ENOUGH TO
L I M I T THE POTENT I AL ABOVE THE GROUND TO A SAFE LEVEL. THE
GROUNDING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY BONDING THE GROUNDING CIRCUITS
TO NON-FERROUS METAL DRIVEN ELECTRODES. THE ELECTRODES SHALL BE
A MINIMUM OF 5/B" INCH IN DIAMETER, EIGHT FEET LONG, AND DRIVEN
STRAIGHT INTO THE GROUND. A GROUND LEAD SHALL BE AS SHORT AS
POSSIBLE AND LEAD DIRECTLY TO A GROUNDING SOURCE.
THE MAXIMUM RESISTANCE BETWEEN THE GROUND ELECTRODE AND A POINT
IN THE GROUNDING SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN 5 OHMS.
CONNECT I ONS BETWEEN THE GROUND ELECTRODES AND THE GROUND W J RE
SHALL BE MADE BY A . SCREW TYPE POS I T I VE LOCK I NG DEV ICE. ALL
NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE CABINET BUSS-BAR,
AND SHALL BE GROUNDED AT EACH TERMINAL POINT. THE CABINET SHALL
BE GROUNDED WITH A NO.6 AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE BONDED BETWEEN' THE
BUSS-BAR TO THE GROUND ELECTRODE. THE NO. 6 AWG SOLID COPPER
WIRE SHALL HAVE 4 INCH MINIMUM RADIUS BENDS AND SHALL BE AS SHORT
PAGE 19
7"5-/9
PA6E 20
TS-ZO
I
I
I
I
I
I~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AS POSSIBLE TO THE CABINET BUSS-BAR. POLES SHALL BE GROUNDED BY
PERMANENTLY BONDING THE NO. 6 AWG SOLID GROUND WIRE TO A SEPARATE
GROUND ROD AND OR ~OTH GROUND I NG THE POLE AND THE GROUND
ELECTRODE. POLE MOUNTED ACCESSORIES SHALL THEN ,BE GROUNDED TO
THE POLE. CONNECT IONS TO UNDERGROUND MET ALL I C CONDU I T OR DOWN
GUYS SHALL NOT BE DEEMED SUFF,I C I ENT FOR GROUND I NG PURPOSES. NO
SNAP-ON CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PERMITTED.
647.14.1 GROUND ROD
GROUND RODS SHALL BE INSTALLED ADJACENT TO THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL
POLE BASES OR CONTROLLER CABINET BASES TO SHIELD AND PROTECT THE
GROUND I NG SYSTEM. ANY GROUND ROO WITHOUT PROTECT ION MUST BE
BURIED AT LEAST 2" BELOW THE FINSIHED GROUND LEVEL. GROUND RODS
SHALL ALSO BE PLACED IN ALL PULL BOXES AS SHOWN IN THE DETAILS. .
647.14.1.1
GROUND RODS SHALL BE S/8 INCHES IN DIAMETER AND SHALL BE A
MINIMUM EIGHT FEET IN LENGTH. GROUND RODS SHALL BE COPPERWELD.
647.14.1.2
SINGLE GROUND RODS SHALL BE DR I VEN VERT I CALL Y UNT I L THE TOP OF
THE ROD IS NO MORE THAN 2" ABOVE THE FINISHED GROUND. A LENGTH
OF M6 BARE COPPER, SOLID WIRE SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE TOP OF THE
GROUND ROD WITH AN ACORN CLAMP OR 0 I RECT BUR I AL CLAMP AND
CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING NUT OF THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL BASE. WHEN
CONTROLLER CAB I NETS ARE MOUNTED ON TIMBER POLES THEY ARE TO BE
GROUNDED BY A LENGTH OF ..6 SOLID COPPER WIRE ATTACHED TO THE
GROUND ROD WITH SU I T ABLE GROUND ROO CLAMPS AND THE WIRE RUN UP
INSIDE A MINIMUM 3/4" CONDUIT ATTACHED TO THE TIMBER POLE; TO A
GROUNDING BUSS IN THE CONTROLLER CABINET.
647.14.1.3
WHEN SUFFICIENT PENETRATION CANNOT BE OBTAINED IN THE ABOVE
MANNER A GROUND ROD SYSTEM CONSISTING OF THREE PARALLEL GROUND
RODS SHALL BE PLACED A MINIMUM OF 6' CENTER TO CENTER IN A
HORIZ:~TAL PATTERN WITH NO MORE THAN 2" ABOVE THE FINISHED
GROUND. THESE RODS SHALL BE JOI NED AND CONNECTED TO THE
GROUNDING NUT OF THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL BASE WITH ..6 AWG SOLID COPPER
WIRE INSIDE MINIMUM 3/4" CONDUIT WHEN CONTROLLER CABINETS ARE
MOUNTED ON THE TIMBER POLES.
647.14.2 NEW WOOD POLES
ALL WOOD POLES SHALL HAVE A GROUNDW I RE I NST ALLED . I T SHALL BE
INSTALLED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO MINIMIZE DAMAGE FROM NATURAL
ABUSE AND VANDALISM. THE GROUND WIRE SHALL BE A MINIMUM NO. 6
AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE BONDED TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE AND
EXTENDING UPWARD TO A POINT PERPENDICULAR TO THE UPPERMOST SPAN.
WIRE STAPLES, UTILIZING A MAXIMUM SPACING OF TWO FEET, SHALL BE
USED TO SECURE THE GROUND WIRE TO THE POLE. ALL SPAN WIRE SHALL
BE BONDED TO THE POLE GROUND US I NG SPL IT BOLT CONNECTORS. THE
POLE GROUND MAY BE UTILIZED FOR A POLE MOUNT CABINET.
647.14.3 CABINETS
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
ALL CABINETS SHALL BE PERMANENTLY GROUNDED TO A MULTI-TERMINAL
MAIN GROUND BUSS WITH A NO. 6 AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE BONDED
BETWEEN THE BUSS AND GROUND I NG ELECTRODE. THE POWER COMPANY
NEUTRAL, CONDU I T GROUNDS AND GROUNDS OF ALL EQUI PMENT HOUSED IN
THE CABINET SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE BUSS-BAR.'
GROUNDING TO A PERMANENT WATER SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED IN
LIEU OF THE DRIVEN GROUND ROD. ALL GROUNDING DEVICES SHALL
CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)
AND (NEMA).
647.15 SIGNAL POLES
647.15.1 STRAIN POLES
ALL SIGNAL STRAIN POLES WILL CONFORM TO SECTION 639 OF THE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. ALL CAISSONS OR FOUNDATIONS WILL
CONFORM TO THE DETAIL SHEET OF THE PLANS AND MUST BE APPROVED BY
THE BRIDGE DEPARTMENT WITHOUT EXCEPTION.
647.15.2 METAL POLES .
647.15.2.1 FITTINGS AND ATTACHMENTS
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THE CONTRACTOR ADD ANY HOLES OR
OPENINGS TO ANY METAL POLE OR MAST ARM.
ONE POLE AT EACH INTERSECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A SERVICE
BRACKET FOR ATTACHMENT OF POWER SERVICE WIRE AS SPECIFIED ON THE
DETAIL SHEET OF THE PLANS .
POLES TO WH I CH CONTROLLER CAB I NETS ARE ATTACHED SHALL BE
COMPLETED WITH NECESSARY MOUNTING PLATES, BOLTS, NIPPLES AND A
MINIMUM OF 2 - 2 INCH THREADED OPENINGS AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF
THE POLE. FITTINGS SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE POLES AS SPECIFIED
BY THE MANUFACTURER ON THE PLAN (S) OR AS DIRECTED BY THE
ENGINEER. THEY MAY INCLUDE A CAST IRON OR ALUMINUM CAP~ A
WEATHERHEAD WITH CHASE NIPPLES AND COUPLINGS, A GALVANIZED ELBOW
WITH BUSHING INSTALLED' BY CUTTING POLE AND WELDING IN PLACE
AROUND ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE, OR A 1/2-INCH OR SIB-INCH DIAMETER
BY EIGHT FT. LONG COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD ATTACHED TO THE POLE BY
A TAP SCREW OR WELD FITTING OF NO. 6 SEMI-HARD DRAWN SOLID COPPER
WIRE AND A STANDARD CO~PER CLAD GROUND CLAMP.
647.15.3 CONCRETE STRAIN POLES
CONCRETE STRAIN POLES SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 639
OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
647.15.4 MAST ARMS
IN ADDITION TO' THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTIONS 636 AND 915 OF THE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, MAST ARMS SHALL ACCOMMODATE TRAFFIC
SIGNAL MOUNT I NG HARDWARE AND SHALL ADHERE TO THE MANUFACTURER' S
RECOMMENDED PROCEDURES. THE ADDITION OF HOLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
IS PROHIBITED.
pm 21
75 -Z I
PAGE 22
7.5 - Z. Z
I
I
I
I
I
1<
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.15.5 PEDESTRIAN PEDESTALS AND POLES
PEDESTALS AND. POLES SHALL BE INSTALLED AS REQUIRED AND WHERE
REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS.
ALL PEDESTALS AND POLES OF THE ANCHOR BASE TYPE SHALL HAVE
EXCAVATIONS PREPARED FOR FOUNDATIONS. THE EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE
OF THE SIZE SPEC I F I ED. THE ANCHOR BOLTS, RE I NFORC I NG BARS AND
GROUND RODS SHALL BE. PROPERL Y PLACED I N THE E X CAVA T I ON. THE
ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE SUPPORTED BY A TEMPLATE PROVIDING THE
PROPER BOLT CIRCLE FOR THE PEDESTAL OR POLE TO BE INSTALLED. THE
REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE WIRED TOGETHER AND MAY BE WIRED TO THE
ANCHOR BOLTS. CONDUITS IN THE BASE MAY BE WIRED TO THE
REINFORCING BARS FOR SUPPORT.
PRIOR TO POURING CONCRETE FOR THE FOUNDATION, THE ENGINEER SHALL
DETERMINE THAT THE ORIENTATION OF THE ANCHOR BOLTS IS CORRECT FOR
THE PEDESTAL OR POLE, PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT WITH MAST ARM POLES,
AND THAT THE ANCHOR BOLTS AND CONDUITS PROJECT THE PROPER
DISTANCE ABOVE THE FOUNDATION. AFTER APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER,
THE CONCRETE SHALL BE POURED AND VIBRATED IN HIS PRESENCE.
FOUNDAT IONS FOR PEDESTALS AND POLES WITH THE ANCHOR TYPE BASE
SHALL CONFORM TO SECT IONS 500 AND 639 OF THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATION. POLES SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED NOR LOADED WITHOUT
PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.
THE ENGINEER MAY, AT HIS OPTION, REQUIRE THE TAKING OF A TEST
CYL I NDER OF CONCRETE AS I TIS BE I NG POURED. THE CYL I NDER SHALL
BE PROPERL Y CURED AND THEN TESTED. F A I LURE OF THE CONCRETE TO
MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL RESULT IN
NOTIFICATION TO THE CONTRACTOR THAT THE FOUNDATIONS ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE AND MUST BE REPLACED.
AFTER THE POLES ARE INSTALLED AND THE LOADING APPLIED, THEY SHALL
BE INSPECTED FOR PLUMB AND, WHEN APPLICABLE FOR THE PROPER
HOR I Z ONTAL POS l T I ON OF THE MAST ARM D THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
CORRECT ANY DEFICIENCIES THROUGH THE USE OF THE LEVELING NUTS ON
THE ANCHOR BOLTS, BY ADJUSTMENT OF THE MAST ARM, OR BOTH.
THE ENGINEER SHALL ALSO EXAMINE THE PEDESTALS AND POLES FOR
DAMAGE TO THE PAINT OR GALVANIZING AND SHALL REQUIRE THE
CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE THE FINISH COATING WHERE NECESSARY.
AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF TH~.PEDESTALS AND POLES THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
FINISH THE AREA BETWEEN THE BASE OF THE POLE AND THE TOP OF THE
FOUNDATION WITH A SUITABLE GROUTING MATERIAL.
647.15.6 TIMBER POLES
TIMBER POLES SHALL MEET SECT I ON 861 AND 861.02 OF THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS. ALL SIGNAL SUPPORT POLES SHALL BE CLASS II (2).
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.16 PULL BOXES
\ ,
PULL BOXES SHALL CONFORM TO SECTION 680.06 AND TO THE STANDARD
DETAIL DRAWINGS OR PLAN DETAIL SHEET. PULL BOXES SHALL BE
INSTALLED AS REQUIRED AND WHERE REQUIRED B.Y. THE SPECIFICATIONS
AND PLANS.
EXCAVATIONS FOR PULL BOXES SHALL INCLUDE PROVISION FOR DRAINS AS
SPECIFIED. THE AGGREGATE FOR THE DRAIN SHALL NOT BE PLACED UNTIL
THE EXCAVATION HAS BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. PRECAST PULL
BOXES SHALL BE SET. IN PLACE, LEVELED AND CONDUITS INSTALLED AS
REQUIRED. AFTER APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER THE BACK-FILLING SHALL
BE DONE AND THE FRAME AND COVER INSTALLED.
647.17 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
DETAIL DRAWINGS. ANY DEVIATION FROM THE PLANS MUST BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE MUTCD AND HAVE THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.
ALL TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS PLACED OVER THE ROADWAY SHALL BE SO
INSTALLED AS TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES OF 17 FEET 0 INCHES
AND A MAXIMUM OF 19 FEET. THIS CLEARANCE SHALL BE MEASURED FROM
THE PAVEMENT TO THE LOWEST PART OF THE ASSEMBLY, I NCLUD I NG
BRACKETS AND BACK PLATES. TRAFFIC SIGNALS MOUNTED ON THE SIDE.OF
WOOD OR METALLIC POLES SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH. A MINIMUM CLEARANCE
OF TWELVE FEET ABOVE THE SIDEWALK OR PAVEMENT GRADE OF THE CENTER
OF THE HIGHWAY WHICHEVER GRADE IS HIGHER.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT THE SIGNAL CABLE TO THE WIRE IN EACH
SIGNAL HEAD TO PROVIDE THE CORRECT SIGNAL INDICATION WHEN THE
CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO THE CONTROLLER CABINET BACK PANEL.
SPL I C I NG OF CABLES SHALL BE ALLOWED ONLY I N HAND HOLES AT THE
BASES OF POLES OR OVERHEAD IN JUNCTION BOXES.
ALL OPTICALLY PROGRAMMABLE (D.P.) SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE INSTALLED
AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS, StANDARD DETAIL SHEET AND AS DIRECTED BY
THE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. ALL D.P. HEADS WILL BE MOUNTED
SECURELY AND/OR TETHERED TO LIMIT MOVEMENT. MASKING OF THE LAMP
FOR DIRECTING VISIBILITY SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED UNDER THE
SUPERVISION OF THE ENGINEER.
647.18 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON EITHER WOOD,
CONCRETE OR STEEL STRA I N POLES, WOOD OR STEEL AUX I L I ARY POLES,
AND/OR METAL PEDESTAL POLES. THE PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS SHALL
BE INSTALLED AS PER THE DETAIL DRAWING AND/OR THE INTERSECTION
ITEM SHEETS AND DRAWINGS.
647.18.1 PEDESTAL MOUNTS
PEDESTAL MOUNTS SHALL BE MADE WITH THE LOWER SUPPORTING ASSEMBLY
CONSISTING OF A FOUR-INCH SLIP-FITTER BRACKET WITH HOLLOW
ALUMINUM ARMS (MINIMUM INSIDE CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA EQUAL TO THAT
OF 1 1/2 INCH PIPE). SERRATED LOCKING DEVICES WHICH FIRMLY AND
POSITIVELY HOLD THE SIGNAL HEADS IN THE REQUIRED ALIGNMENT SHALL
BE UTILIZED.
PAGE 23
7.5-Z5
PAS[ 24
r5-Z~
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.18.2 POLE MOUNTS (SIDE OF POLE)
POLE MOUNTS SHALL BE MADE WITH THE UPPER AND LOWER ASSEMBLY
CONSISTING O~ A POST ARM (WITH MINIMUM CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA EQUAL
TO A 1 1/2" PIPE) AND A POST HUB THA'T MATCHES THE OUTSIDE CONTOUR
OF THE POLE. THE HUBS SHALL BE SECURED TO METAL AND/OR CONCRETE
POLES WITH STAINLESS STEEL BANDS, THREE-QUARTER INCHES WIDE, AND
TO WOOD POLES WITH LAG'BOLTS. THE JUNCTIONS SHALL BE SPACED SUCH
THAT EACH SIGNAL HEAD CAN BE DIRECTED TOWARD APPROACHING TRAFFIC
AS NEEDED. SERRATED LOCKING DEVICES WHICH FIRMLY AND POSITIVELY
HOLD THE SIGNAL HEADS I N THE REQU I RED AL I GNMENT SHALL BE
UTILIZED.
647.19 BLANK-OUT SIGNS
THE SIGNS SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED TO A STATIONARY STRUCTURE
OR TO A MESSENGER STRAND SUPPORT SYSTEM. WHERE APPLICABLE, EACH
SIGN SHALL BE CENTERED OVER THE LANE AND/OR LANES INTENDED TO BE
UNDER SIGN CONTROL. THE VERTICAL CLEARANCE FOR BLANK-OUT SIGNS
SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS OR SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN
SECTION 647.18. THE BOTTOM EDGE OF EACH SIGN SHALL BE HORIZONTAL
AS DETERMINED BY A SFIRIT LEVEL. EACH SIGN SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY
CONNECTED, THROUGH TERMINAL STRIPS, TO T~E EXTERNAL CONTROL BOX
OR CABINET.
647.20 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS
AND TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE DULY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF
THE DEPARTMENT. THE LAMP REPLACEMENT AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
OF THIS SYSTEM SHALL BE HANDLED COMPLETELY BY THE CONTRACTOR
UNTIL THE SUCCESSFUL CONCLUSION OF THE OPERATIONAL TEST PERIOD.
WHEN A TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION IS NOT IN USE, SUCH AS PRIOR
TO TURN ON OR PRIOR TO THE SWITCH-OVER FROM AN EXISTING
INSTALLATION TO A NEW INSTALLATION, THE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE
BAGGED TO CLEARLY INDICATE THAT THE INSTALLATION IS NOT IN
OPERATION.
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN PROPER OPERATION,
INCLUDING- EXISTING SIGNALS UNTIL THEIR APPROVED REMOVAL, AND
NEWLY INSTALLED SIGNALS UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THEIR CONTINUOUS 24-HOUR OPERATIONS. IF
FOR ANY REASON A SIGNAL IS NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL COMMENCE WORK ON THIS SIGNAL AS SOON AS HE HAS
BEEN NOTIFIED. NEITHER TRAVEL TIME NOR TIME OF DAY/WEEK WILL
EXCUSE THE RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR FROM
IMMEDIATELY MAKING REPAIRS NECESSARY FOR THE SAFE OPERATION OF
THE SIGNAL.
THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ANY INTERIM
TRAFFIC CONTROL (INCLUDING UNIFORMED LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICERS)
NEEDED DUE TO ANY DELAY IN MAKING SIGNAL' REPAIRS. THE DEPARTMENT
MAY MAKE ANY REPA I R WORK NECESSARY TO I NSURE THE SAFETY OF THE
TRAVEL I NG PUBL I C WHENEVER THE CONTRACTOR FA I LS TO MAKE AN
IMMEDIATE RESPONSE TO ANY SIGNAL MALFUNCTION. THE CONTRACTOR
WILL REIMBURSE THE DEPARTMENT FOR ANY EXPENSES INCURRED IN
ASSOCIATION WITH SIGNAL REPAIRS MADE BY THE DEPARTMENT.
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EMERGENCY REPAIR WO~~ PERFORMED BY THE DEPARTMENT WILL NOT
RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SIGNAL. WHERE
THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO TEMPORARILY RELOCATE EXISTING
TRAFFIC SIGNALS B~tAUSE OF HIS CONStRUCTION OPERATIONS,
EQUIPMENT, FITTINGS, WIRE, CABLE, CONDUIT, AND RELATED MATERIALS
SHALL BE REINSTALLED AND EXTENDED WHERE NECESSARY. TEMPORARY
TREATED TIMBER POLES, GUYS, AND RELATED MATERIALS SHALL BE
FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WHERE NECESSARY.
NEW TRAFFIC SIGNALS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS SOON AS PRACTICAL IN
ORDER TO REDUCE THE NUMBER OF TEMPORARY RELOCAT IONS CAUSED BY
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS.
647.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION AND REMOVAL
THE SIGNAL EQUIPMENT, DESIGN AND OPERATION MAY NOT BE MODIFIED
WITHOUT THE PERMISSION OF THE ENGINEER.
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT:
THE CONTRACTOR WILL REMOVE EXISTING SIGNAL EQUIPMENT NOT USED IN
THE FINAL INSTALLATION AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT OR WHEN
THE NEW SIGNAL EQUIPMENT IS OPERATIONAL. ANY EQUIPMENT REMOVED
SHALL BE REMOVED AS CAREFULLY AS ,POSSIBLE, WITH MINIMUM OR NO
DAMAGE, AND DELIVERED TO A SITE AS SPECIFIED ON THE PLANS OR AS
DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. THE COST OF REMOVAL SHALL BE INCLUDED
IN ITEM 647-5000 OR AS ITEM 647-1010 WHEN NEW EQUIPMENT IS NOT
REQUIRED.
TYPICAL SIGNAL RELATED EQUIPMENT REMOVED FOR A PROJECT WOULD BE
(BUT NOT LIMITED TO) STEEL POLES(S) INCLUDING FOUNDATION TO 2'
BELOW GROUND LEVEL, TIMBER POLE(S), TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER(S)
INCLUDING FOUNDATION PAD, AND ALL ORIGINAL SIGNAL HEADS INCLUDING
MESSENGER WIRE SUPPORT.
CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED IN REMOVING AND SALVAGING ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT SO THAT IT SHALL REMAIN IN ITS ORIGINAL FORM AND
E X I ST I NG COND I T IONS WHENEVER POSS I BLE . THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE
REOUIRED TO REPLACE. AT HIS EXPENSE. ANY TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
WHICH IS DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER TO HAVE BEEN DAMAGED OR
DESTROYED BY REASON OF THE CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS. EXISTING
MATERIAL REQUIRED TO BE RELOCATED AND FOUND TO BE UNSATISFACTORY
BY THE ENGINEER SHALL BE REPLACED BY NEW MATERIAL AND THE COST
PAID FOR AS EXTRA WORK.
647.22 FIELD TESTS
IN ADDITION TO TESTS CONDUCTED PREVIOUSLY DURING THE INSTALLATION
PROCESS AND PRIOR TO EQUIPMENT TURN ON, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
CAUSE THE FOLLOWING TESTS TO BE MADE ON ALL TRAFFIC SIGNAL
CIRCUITS IN THE PRESENCE OF THE ENGINEER:
1. .CONTINUITY:
EACH CIRCUIT SHALL BE TESTED FOR CONTINUITY.
2. GROUND:
TS-ZS
pm 25
EACH CIRCUIT SHALL BE TESTED FOR GROUNDS.
IF ANY TESTS ARE FAILED, THE CIRCUIT SHOULD IMMEDIATELY BE
REPAIRED. ANY NEW SIGNAL SHOULD OPERATE IN THE FLASH MODE FOR
THREE (3) WORK DAYS PRIOR TO BEGINNING STOP AND GO OPERATION
UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.23 OPERATIONAL TESTS
AFTER THE INSTALLATION OF ALL EQUIPMENT AND COMPLETION OF THE
SYSTEM CHECKOUT, THE ENGINEER WILL NOTIFY THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC
ENGINEER, IN WRITING, TO REDUEST FINAL INSPECTION. THE DISTRICT
SIGNAL TECHNICIANS SHALL CDNDUCT AN IN-DEPTH INSPECTION AND
SUPPLY THE ENGINEER WITH A WRITTEN PUNCHLIST OF ITEMS' THAT NEED
CORRECTIVE ATT~NTION FROM THE CONTRACTOR WITHIN THREE (3) WORK
DAYS OF THE W=JTTENNOTIFICATION. UPON SATISFACTORY RESOLUTION
OF ANY DEFECTS. THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC ENGINEER SHALL COMMENCE AN
OPERATIONAL TEST PERIOD OF SUFFICIENT DURATION TO DEFINITELY
DEMONSTRATE THAT EACH AND EVERY PART OF THE SYSTEM FUNCTIONS AS
SPECIFIED AND INTENDED. THE OPERATIONAL TEST FOR THE TRAFFIC
SIGNAL SYSTEM SHALL CONSIST OF NOT LESS THAN THIRTY (30) DAYS OF
CONTINUOUS, SATISFACTORY OPERATION. IF ANY COMPONENT FAILURE OR
UNSATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE OF THE SYSTEM DEVELOPS; THE CONDITION
SHALL BE CORRECTED AND THE TEST SHALL BE REPEATED UNTIL THE
THIRTY (30) DAYS OF CONTINUOUS SATISFACTORY OPERATION IS
OBTAINED. THIS PERIOD OF OPERATION SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED PART
OF THE SFEC I F I ED CONTRACT T I ME. THE 0 I STR I CT TRAFF I C ENS I NEER
WILL FURNISH THE ENGINEER AND CONSTRUCTION OFFICE WITH A LETTER
REGARDING THE START, TERMINATION, SUSPENSION OR SUCCESSFUL
COMFLETION OF THE OPERATIONAL TEST PERIOD. THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC
ENGINEER MAY MAKE A RECOMMENDATION FOR PAYMENT ONLY AFTER THE
SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THE TEST PERIOD.' WRIT.TEN ACCEPTANCE OF
THE SIGNAL INSTALLATION MUST BE OBTAINED FROM THE DISTRICT
TRA~=IC ENGINEER PRIOR TO AUTHORIZATION FOR PARTIAL OR FULL
PAY~~NT TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE WORK.
ALL :=;TS INCURRED DURING THE OPE~ATIONAL TESTS, INCLUDING POWER
CONSUMFTION AND COSTS CREATED BY THE SIGNAL SYSTEM, SHALL BE AT
THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE AND WILL BE CONSIDERED AS INDICATED IN
THE PRICE PAID FOR THE CONTRACT ITEM INVOLVED.
647.~4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF SIGNAL MATERIALS
647.24.1 GENERAL
THE REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT STIPULATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS
SHALL BE SUBJECT TO TESTING BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING METHODSs
BY THE DEPARTMENT USING OWN FACILITIES;
BY THE SUPPLIE~ OR MANUFACTURER USING THEIR FACILITIES WITH
TESTING WITNESSED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE DEPART
MENT ; ,.
THROUGH AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY CERTIFIED BY THE DE
PARTMENT.
PASE 26
-rs-z ~
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THE TESTING METHOD TO BE EMPLOYED SHALL BE GIVEN AS A PART OF THE
SPECIFICATIONS. THE'COSTS FOR TESTING~SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE
PR I CES QUOTED FOR. THE EQU I PMENT, WHERE APPROPR I ATE. THE
ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS TESTED SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF
WARRANTIES. AND GUARANTEES WHERE THESE ARE ,'REQUIRED BY THE
SPECIFICATIONS.
FIELD PAINTING:
AFTER ERECTION IS COMPLETED, STEEL POLES AND ARMS NOT GALVANIZED
SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED, TOUCHED UP AS REQUIRED WITH I-D RED
OR ORIGINAL TYPE ,PRIMER. AND THEN THE REMAINING COATS SHALL BE
APPL I ED I N ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQU I REMENTS OF SYSTEM V ( HEAVY
EXPOSURE) SECTION 535 OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, UNLESS
OTHERWISE INDICATED ON THE PLANS.
IF THE FINISH ON GALVANIZED STEEL MATERIALS IS SCRATCHED, CHIPPED
OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED, THE MATERIAL WILL BE REJECTED, OR MAY, WITH
THE APPROVAL OF THE ENG I N.EER , BE REPLACED AS SPEC I F I ED' UNDER
SECTION 645 OF THE STANDARD SPEciFICATIONS.
647 . 24 .2 SECT I ON 925 OF SUPPLEMENTAL SPEC I F I CAT ION - SIGNAL
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 925 WILL DETAIL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING SIGNAL
EQUIPMENT:
AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT
BLANK-OUT SIGNS
CABINETS
CONTROLLERS (MICROPROCESSOR OR OTHER, INCLUDING MASTERS)
DETECTOR UNITS (AMPLIFIERS)
FLASH UNITS
FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLIES
LOAD SWITCHES
MONITORS (CONFLICT)
PEDESTRIAN PUSHBUTTONS
SIGNAL HEADS (VEHICLE & PEDESTRIAN)
TIME CLOCKS
647.24.3 PEDESTALS AND METAL POLES FOR PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
FOR METAL POLES AND PEDESTALS THE SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH A MILL
CERTIFICATE SHOWING THE ALLOY AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE
METAL USED. WHERE THE MANUFACTURER CHANGES THESE PROPERTIES IN
.WORKING THE METAL, HE SHALL SUPPLY A CERTIFICATE FROM AN
INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY INDICATING THE CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE METAL IN THE FINISHED PRODUCT.
THE SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH A MILL CERTIFICATE SHOWING THE ALLOY
AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE STEEL USED IN FABRICATING THE
ANCHOR BOLTS. IN ADDITION, THE BOLTS MAY BE SUBJECTED TO A TEST
OF THEIR TENSILE AND SHEAR STRENGTHS.
'ASE 27
TS-Z7
PA6E 28
ifS-Z8
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.24.4 METAL MAST ARMS
ACCORDING TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION 915
647.24.5 ANCHOR BOLTS
ACCORDING TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION 639 AND B52
647.24.6 CONDUIT.'
ACCORDING TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION SECTION 923.
647.24.7 PULL BOXES
ACCORDING TO SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION 6BO
647.24.8 CABLE
ACCORDING TO SECTION 680 OR 925 O~ THE SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION
FOR THE TYPE WIRE OR CABLE. ALSO ACCORDING TO APPROPRIATE IMSA,
NEMA OR UL SPECIFICATIONS.
647.24.9 TERMINAL AND SPLICE BOXES
ACCORDING TO SUPPLEMENTAL SPECI~ICATION 680
647.24.10 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
ACCORDING TO SUPPLEMENTAL SPECI~ICATION 680
647.24.11 ~AILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS
W~ ~E EGUIFMENT TESTED FAILS TO MEET THE SPECIFICATI~~
R~_ _IREMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SO NOTIFIED IN WRITING. THE
CO;.TRACTOR SHALL HAVE 15 DAVS TO SUBMIT EQUIPMENT FOR TESTS WIT~
THE DEFECTS CORRECTED OR HE MAY SUBMIT WITHIN 15 DAYS EQUIPMENT
FROM A DIFFEF.~NT MANU~ACTURER WHICH DOES MEET' THE REQUIREMENTS.
647.25 STATE SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
STATE SUPPLIED MATERIALS:
THE DEPARTMENT WILL ~AVE ANY STATE SUPPLIED TRAFFIC SIGNAL
EQUIPMENT ShIPPED T: A SITE SPECIFIED BY THE PLANS OR THE
PROPOSAL.
THE ENGINEER WILL ACCEPT DELIVERY OF THE ST~TE SUPPLIED
EQUIPMENT. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE GIVEN 15 ~AYS, AFTER
NOTIFICATION BY THE ENGINEER OF THE EQUIPMENT ARRIVAL, TO INSPECT
THE EOUIPMEN- AND PERFORM ANY AND ALL TESTS REQUIRED TO INSURE
PROPER OPERA~ION OF THE EQUIPMENT. UPON COMPLETION OF CONTRACTOR
PER~ORMED TESTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ACCEPT DELIVERY OF THE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EQUIPMENT FROM THE STATE CERTIFYING' THAT THE EQUIPMENT WAS
RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION. IF, AT THE END OF THE 15 DAY PERIOD,
THE ENGINEER HAS NOT RECEIVED ANY WRITTEN DISSENT, IT WILL BE
UNDERSTOOD THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS ACCEPTED. THE EQUIPMENT TO BE
IN SATISFACTORY WORKING CONDITION WITHOUT DEFECTS. IN EITHER
CASE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSI BLE FOR ANY SUBSEQUENT
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK.
NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENT WILL BE MADE TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE
TESTING AND STORAGE. OF STATE SUPPLIED OR CONTRACTOR FURNISHED
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT.
647.26 WARRANTIES ANDIOR GUARANTEES
THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE ALL MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES OR
GUARANTEES ON ALL ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED,
EXCEPT STATE SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT. WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES ARE TO
BE CONSISTENT WITH THOSE PROVIDED AS .CUSTOMARY TRADE PRACTICES;
OR AS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OR SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
MANUF ACTURER 'S AND CONTRACTOR'S WARRANT I ES OR GUARANTEES, SHALL
BE TRANSFERRED TO THE AGENCY OR USER HANDLING EQUIPMENT
MAINTENANCE, SHALL BE CONTINUOUS THROUGHOUT THEIR DURATION, AND
THEY SHALL STATE THAT THEY ARE SUBJECT TO SUCH TRANSFER.
ACCEPTANCE OR APPROVAL OF THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK SHALL NOT
CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES WHERE THESE ARE
REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS.
647.27 MEASUREMENT
A. MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER:
B. CABINET:
C. MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER WITH CABINET:
D. TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION:
E. INTERCONNECT WIRE ---pAIR: THE NUMBER OF FEET OF INTERCONNECT
wIRE SHALL BE THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF LINEAR FEET OF THE SIZE
INSTALLED AND ACCEPTED.
ITEMS OF TRAFFIC SIGNALS OF THE KINO, SIZE AND TYPE SPECIFIED,
COMPLETE IN PLACE AND ACCEPTED, WILL BE MEASURED IN THE FOLLOWING
MANNER.
647.27.1 EACH UNIT
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS CAN BE MEASURED FOR PAYMENT AS THE NUMBER
OF EACH UNIT FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
CONTRACT OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.
'ASE 2CJ
-rS-&1
CONTROLLERS
CABINETS
AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
FLASHING BEACON
DETECTOR
PEDESTRIAN PUSH SUTTON
MAST ARMS
POLE EXCAVATION AND CONCRETE FOUNDATION
PULL BOXES
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
SIGNS-BLANK-OUT
TIMBER POLES
GUYS 8. ANCHORS
PEDESTAL POLES
647.27.2 LUMP SUM MEASUREMENTS
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS WILL SE MEASURED FOR PAYMENT ON A LUMP SUM
BASIS FOR THE WORK COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT AND
AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER:
TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION
TRAFFI~ SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION AND REMOVAL
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
647.28 PAYMENT
THE COST OF INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, AND REMOVAL OF
THE TRAFF I C SIGNAL EQU I PMENT SHALL BE I NCLUDED UNDER I TEM NO.
647.
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:
A. ITEM
B. ITEM
c. ITP1
WITH
D. ITEM
E. ITEM
NO. 647 MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER............. EA
NO. 647 CABINET..................................... EA
NO. 647 MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
CAB I NET. .' . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. EA
NO. 647 TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION .......... LUMP SUM
NO. 647 INTERCONNECT WIRE---fAIR................ LIN FT
PAYMENT FOR VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF TRAFFIC SIGNALS WILL BE MADE IN
THE FOLLOWING MANNER:
647.28.1 GENERAL
THE PRICE BID FOR ALL ITEMS OF WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION SHALL
INCLUDE THE FURNISHING OF ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, .
AND INCIDENTALS AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE ITEM OF WORK. ITEMS
WITH ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS ARE AS FOLLO~S:
647.28.2 CONTROLLERS
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
CONTROLLERS, BACK PANEL, CONNECTING HARNESS, MAKING ALL
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND ALL MATERIALS, LABOR AND INCIDENTAL
'AiE 30
rs -30
I
I.
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FITTINGS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.28.3 CABINETS
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
CABINETS FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND SHALL INCLUDE MOUNTING
ALL CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES, MAKING ALL ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS, AND ALL LABOR, MATERIALS AND INCIDENTAL FITTINGS
.NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPEC I F I ED. .
647.28.4 AUX I L I ARY CAB I NET EQU I PMENT AND SPEC I AL PURPOSE
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
AUXILIARY AND SPECIAL PURPOSE EQUIPMENT,~ INCLUDING THE CONNECTING
HARNESS, MAKING ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND ALL MATERIALS,
LABOR AND INCIDENTAL FITTINGS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS
SPECIFIED.
647.28.5 LOOP DETECTOR
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
DETECTOR, INCLUDING THE CONNECTING HARNESS, MAKING ALL ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS AND ALL MATERIALS, LABOR AND INCIDENTAL FITTINGS
NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.28.6 LOOP DETECTOR INSTALLATION
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE PREPARATION OF SURFACES; SAWING AND
. CLEANING OF SLOT; INSTALLATION OF ALL MATERIALS, INCLUDING LOOP
SEALANT, CABLES, SPLICE BOXES; THE PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC,
INCLUDING NECESSARY WARNING SIGNS; THE FURNISHING OF ALL TOOLS,
MACHINES AND OTHER EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE ITEM AND
FORM A CLOSED LOOP CIRCUIT.
647.28.7 PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND/OR INSTALLING
EACH PUSH BUTTON, FRAME, PEDESTR I AN I NSTRUCT I ON SIGN, NIPPLES,
AND BUSHINGS; DRILLING AND TAPPING EACH POLE
AND/OR CONTROLLER CABINET; AND ALL MATERIAL, LABOR EQUIPMENT AND
INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.28.B MESSENGER ASSEMBLY
THE QUANTITY TO BE PAID FOR SHALL BE THE NUMBER OF LINEAR FEET OF
MESSENGER STRANDS INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DRAWINGS AND
THE CONTRACT. THE PR I CE SHALL I NCLUDE THE COST OF MESSENGER
WIRE, STRAND VICES, EYE BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, DRILLING, ALL
MATERIALS, LABOR, INSTALLATION, INCIDENTAL FITTINGS, EQUIPMENT
AND TOOLS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
PAGE 31
,5-3/
647.29.9 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
THE QUANTITY TO BE PAID FOR SHALL BE THE NUMBER OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL
HEADS OF EACH TYPE FURNISHED AND/OR INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND CONTRACT. THE' PRICE SHALL
INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND/OR INSTALLING EACH OF THE
VARIOUS TYPES OF SIGNAL HEAD ASSEMBL I ES CALLED FOR IN THE
CONTRACT, MESSENGER WIRE HANGERS AND FITTINGS, SIGNAL TURNUNIONS
AND BRAGKETS, WIRING, LAMPS, BACK PLATES AND ALL MATERIAL, LABOR,
EQUIPMENT AND INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS
SPECIFIED.
647.29.10 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
THE QUANT I TY TO BE PA I D FOR SHALL BE THE NUMBER OF PEDESTR I AN
SIGNALS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
INTERSECTION DRAWING, ANDIOR STANDARD DETAIL. DRAWINGS, AND THE
CONTRACT. THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST .OF FURNISHING AND
INSTALLING EACH PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT,
NECESSARY SIGNAL FRAMEWORK, SLIPFITTER, AND PIPE BRACKETS OR
LAWTON POST HUBS (WHEN REQUIRED), STAINLESS STEEL BANDS, WIRING,
ONE AND ONE -HALF INCH CONDU IT, ELBOWS, DR I LL I NG, T APP I NG,
SPLICING, GASKETING, BUSHING ON CABLE ENTRANCES, AND ALL
MATERIALS, LABOR, EQUIPMENT AND INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE
THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.29.11 BLANK-OUT SIGNS
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
51 GNS, TIMERS, CLOCKS, ETC., MOUNT I NG "BRACKETS, CABLE
CONNECT IONS, AND ALL LABOR, MATER I ALS AND I NC IDENT AL F I TT I NGS
NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
GENERAL OFFICE OF TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
PASE 32
15-32-
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"
REVISED SEPTEMBER 1, 1991
First use: November ZZ, 1991
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
GEORGIA 'DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION 825
925.00
925.01
925.02
925.03
925.04
925.05
925.06
925.07
925.08
925.09
925.10
925.11
925.12
925.13
925.14
925.15
925.16
925.17
925.18
925.19
925.20
925.21
925.22
925.23
925.24
925.25
925.26
925.27
925.2B
925.29
925.30
925.31
925.32
925.33
925.34
925.35
925.36
925.37
925.38
925.39
925.40
925.41
925.42
925.43
GENERAL
FOUR-PHASE, F.A. ~ CONTROLLER, EXPANDABLE
EIGHT-PHASE, F.A. NEKA CONTROLLER
NON-NEMA CONTROLLER & CABINET ASSEMBLY
HEM CABINET
CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM
FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLY
LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT
MASTER COORDINATION UNIT
TIME BASE COORDINATION UNIT
FLASHING SCHOOL SIGNAL ASSEMBLY
LOAD SWITCHES
CONFLICT MONITOR
TIME SWITCH
LOOP DETECTOR
LOOP SEALANT
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, I-SECTION
S" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 3-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 3-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 4-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HE~D, SINGLE FACE, 5-SECT'ION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 5-CLUSTER
8" LENS
12" LENS
BLANK-OUT SIGN
LANE USE SIGNAL
- 9" PEDESTRIAN INCANDESCENT
12" PEDESTRIAN INCANDESCENT
12" PEDESTRIAN NEON
12" PEDESTRIAN FIBER
PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON
BACKPLATE - 8" 3-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" 3-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" 4-SECTJON
BACKPLATE - 12" S-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" S-CLUSTER
TUNNEL VISOR - B"
TUNNEL VISOR - 12"
HARDWARE, SPANWIRE
HARDWARE, MAST ARM
HARDWARE, PEDESTAL ERECTION
HARDWARE, BRACKET
HARDWARE, 2-WAY
HARDWARE, 3-WAY
PAGt I
TS....3's
'A6E 2
-rS-3f
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
q25.44
q25.45
q25.4b
q2S.47
q2S.48
q2S.4Q
Q2S.50
Q2S.S1
Q25.52
Q2S.S3
Q2S.S4
Q25.55
Q25.80
Q25.QO
HARDWARE, 4-WAY
BALANCE ADJUST
HARDWARE, PEDESTAL ERECTION (PED HEAD)
HARDWARE, BRACKET ERECTION (PED HEAD)
PEDESTAL POLE
CLASS II TIMBER POLE
STEEL STRAIN POLE
CONCRETE STRAIN POLE
PULL BOX
LAMPS
PREFAB CONTROLLER CABINET BASE
SPARE PARTS, ACCESSORIES, COMMENTS
THRU Q2S.88 WIRE AND CABLE
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
925.00
GENERAL
THIS SECTION PROVIDES SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
ONLY. ITEMS SUCH AS CLASS "A" CONCRETE, CONDUIT, SIGNS AND
MISCELLANEOUS MATERiALS ARE COVERED IN THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS, SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OR SPECIAL
PROVISIONS.
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN THIS SECTION WILL MEET
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SPECIAL PROVISIONS, PROJECT
PLANS WITH SPECIAL PLAN DETAILS, SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS,
STANDARD PLANS INCLUDING STANDARD CONSTRUCTION DETAILS AND THE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. IN ADDITION, THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS
OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NE~),
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS (AlEE), AMERICAN
SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS (AS~) AND NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
CODE (NEC) SHALL APPLY.
Q25.01 4-PHASE. NEMA MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
925.02 a-PHASE. NEMA MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
DEFINITION:
1. THIS-SPECIFICATION SETS FORTH THE FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS FOR SOFTWARE LOGIC MICROPROCESSOR BASED SOLID STATE,
DIGITAL TIMED, ACTUATED TRAFFIC CONTROLLERS PROVIDING FOUR TO
EIGHT PHASES OF SIGNAL CONTROL. THE CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY SHALL BE
A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL UNIT AND SHALL USE KEYBOARD ENTRY.
2. THE LENGTH OF ANY INTERVAL, PORTION, PART~ OR UNIT EXTENSION
SHALL NOT CHANGE BY MORE THAN ONE PERCENT OR 1/10 SECOND,
WHICHEVER IS GREATER, WHEN OPERATED WITH POWER SUPPLY VARIATIONS
BETWEEN THE LIMITS OF 105 VOLTS AND 130 VOLTS AND DUE TO ANY
CHANGE IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BETWEEN THE LIMITS OF +160 DEGREES
F (+71 DEGREES C) AND -20 DEGREES F (-29 DEGREES C) AND AT A
RELATIVE HUMIDITY OF QS PERCENT. HEATER OR REFRIGERATION
ELEMENTS SHALL NOT BE PERM I TTED. ALL EQU I PMENT SHALL BE
SUFFICIENTLY BUFFERED TO BE UNAFFECTED BY TRANSIENT VOLTAGES
NORMALLY EXPERIENCED IN COMMERCIAL POWER LINES.
3. THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE DESIGNED IN CONFORMANCE WITH CURRENT
HEM STANDARDS.
:1
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.01 ~ 925.02 continued
4. ALL ~CTIVE DEVICES USED FaR LOGIC, TIMING, OR. CONTROL
FUNCTIONS SHALL BE SOLID STATE AND SHALL BE SUFFICIENTLY RATED TO
INSURE NO MATERIAL SHORTENING OF LIFE UNDER CONDITIONS OF MAXIMUM
POWER DISSIPATION AT MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES.
5. WHERE SHORT AND LONG FRAMES ARE AVAILABLE THE LONG FRAME WILL
ALWAYS BE UTILIZED.
PURPOSEs
THE PURPOSE OF THIS SPECIFICATION IS JO DESCRIBE MINIMUM DESIGN
AND OPERAT I NG REQU I REMENTS FOR FOUR AND EIGHT PHASE
MICROPROCESSOR BASED TRAFF I C SIGNAL CONTROLLERS. TH IS
SPECIFICATION IS APPLICABLE TO PRE-TIMED OR FULL ACTUATED, VOLUME
DENSITY CONTROLLERS, AND TO INCLUDE PEDESTRIAN FEATURES WHEN
SPECIFIED. ALL PROVISIONS OF THE LATEST HEM STANDARDS SHALL
APPLY.
POWER:
1 . CONTROLLER SHALL OPERATE FROM NOM I NAL 120 VOLT AC, 60 HZ.
POWER SOURCE. ADDITIONALLY, IT SHALL OPERATE SATISFACTORILY
WITHIN ~ RANGE OF 105 TO 135 VOLTS AC AND FREQUENCY RANGE OF ~7
TO 63 HZ. ALL CONNECTORS SHALL MEET HE"A CONNECTION
REQUIREMENTS.
2. THE CONTROLLER SHALL AUTOMATICALLY RESUME NORMAL OPERATION
FOLLOWING A POWER INTERRUPTION WITHOUT MANUAL INITIATION OR
SWITCHING.
3. ALL MODULES (CARDS OR BOARDS) WHICH CONTAIN VOLATILE MEMORY
SHALL BE PROTECTED BY A BATTERY AFFIXED TO THE MODULE. THIS MAY
BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH EE PROMS.
4. THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE ADEQUATELY FUSED OR CONTAIN
EQU I VALENT C I RCU I T BREAKER ( S ) TO PRO V I DE SURGE ( OR OVERPOWER)
PROTECTION.
INTERVALS: .
THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE DES I GNED AND BU I L T SUCH THAT ANY
INTERVAL, PORTION, PERIOD, OR UNIT SHALL NOT CHANGE BY MORE THAN
1/2 SECOND OR 5~ OF THE SETTING, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THIS
TIMING TOLERANCE IS TO BE OBTAINED WITHOUT THE USE OF ANY HEATER
ELEMENTS.
INTERVAL SEQUENCEs
THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROV I DE THE PROPER I NTERVALS AND INTERVAL
SEQUENCE AND SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SKIPPING A PHASE WHEN NEITHER
VEHICLE(S) OR PEDESTRIAN ACTUATION ESTABLISHES A NEED FOR THE
NEXT TRAFFIC PHASE. (RECALL SWITCHES IN THE "ON" POSITION SHALL
CAUSE THE PHASE TO BE DISPLAYED EVEN THOUGH THE DETECTORS ARE NOT
ACTUATED. )
925.01 & 925.02 continued
PA6E 3
-rS-3S-
INTERVAL FUNCTIONS AND SETTINGSz
THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROV I DE FOR THE SETT I NG OF EACH INTERVAL,
PORT I ON OF INTERVAL, OR FUNCT I ON BY MEANS OF KEYBOARD FROM THE
FRONT PANEL. THE VALUES OF THE INTERVAL TIMINGS SHALL BE IN
SECONDS OR DECIMALS THEREOF, WHEN APPLICABLE, AND SHALL BE
CLEARLY LEGIBLE IN SUNLIGHT.
INTERVAL FUNCTIONS AND RANGESz
THE BASIC INTERVALS,. PORTIONS OF INTERVALS, AND FUNCTIONS FOR
SEPARATE CONTROLLER TIMING SETTINGS ARE TO BE AS SPECIFIED BY
CURRENT NEKA STANDARDS. YELLOW INTERVAL IN ALL CASES SHALL NOT
BE LESS THAN (3) SECONDS.
INDICATORSz
AS A MINIMUM LCD DISPLAYS SHALL BE PROVIDED PER RING AS SPECIFIED
BY CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS, AND IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWINGz
PHASE ON/NEXT (I/PHASE) NEXT MAY BE FLASHED.
VEHICLE DETECT (I/PHASE)
VEHICLE MEMORY (l/PHASE)
PED MEMORY (I/PHASE)
OVERLAPS:
ALL CONTROLLERS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF GENERAT I NG OVERLAPS IN
CONFORMANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS.
OTHER FUNCTIONSz
1. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THAT PHASE IN ACCORDANCE TO THE NORMAL INTERVAL SEQUENCING. THE
MINIMUM GREEN INTERVAL SHALL BE DISPLAYED PLUS ANY EXTENSIONS
FROM ACTUATIONS RECEIVED WHICH WOULD EXTEND THE PHASE BEYOND THE
MINIMUM GREEN INTERVAL.
2. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THAT PHASE FOR THE DURATION OF THE MAXIMUM GREEN INTERVAL IN
ACCORDANCE TO THE NORMAL INTERVAL SEQUENCING.
3. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THAT PHASE IN THE ABSENCE OF SERVICEABLE CALLS ON ALL OTHER
ACTIVE PHASES.
4 . THE ABOVE THREE RECALL FUNCT IONS St:tALL BE ACCOMPL I SHED BY
KEYBOARD ENTRY.
I
I
I
I
I
"I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PA&E 4
-r5 -3 (:,
,
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.01 . 925.02 continued
5. A KEYBOARD ENTRY SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED VEHICLE
PHASE WHICH WILL ESTABLISH LOCK (MEMORY ON) OR NON-LOCK (MEMORY
OFF) FOR THE DETECTOR MEMORY CIRCUIT FOR THAT PHASE.
6. A PHASE DETECTOR SWITCHING FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED TO
ALLOW DETECTOR SWITCHING FROM THE KEYBOARD.
AUXILIARV FUNCTIONS:
THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECEIVING INPUT FROM AUXILIARY
COMPONENTS WHICH, WHEN RECEIVED WILL CAUSE THE CONTROLLER TO STOP
TIMING. UPON REMOVAL OF THE INPUT, THE INTERVAL WHICH WAS TIMING
SHALL RESUME NORMAL TIMING. DURING STOP TIMING, ACTUATIONS ON
NON-GREEN SHALL BE ACCUMULATED AND ACTUATIONS FOR PHASE IN GREEN
INTERVAL SHALL CAUSE THE PASSAGE TIMER TO BE RESET.
CIRCUITS: .
OPENING AND CLOSING SIGNAL LIGHT CIRCUITS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED
BY SOLID STATE LOAD SWITCHES., EXTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER. THE
SWITCHES SHALL BE EXTERNAL, JACK MOUNTED LOAD SWITCHES IN
ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. (LOAD SWI TCHES NOT
INCLUDED IN CABINETS.)
CONFLICT MONITOR:
1. A SEPARATE EXTERNAL PROGRAMMABLE SIGNAL MONITORING DEVICE
SHALL BE UTILIZED WITH EACH CONTROLLER. THIS DEVICE SHALL DETECT
CONFLICTING SIGNAL INDICATIONS AND VOLTAGE LEVELS BELOW THE
SAT.ISFACTORY OPERATING VOLTAGES OF THE CONTROLLER. FOR PURPOSE
OF CONFLICT DETERMINATION, A SIGNAL ON ANY OF THE GREEN, YELLOW
OR WALK INPUTS ASSOCIATED WITH A CHANNEL SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS
THAT CHANNEL BEING IN SERVICE. THE VOLTAGE MONITOR PORTION OF
THE MONITOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF MONITORING THE CONTROLLER UNIT
VOLTAGE MONITOR OUTPUT FOR SATISFACTORY OPERATING VOLTAGE IN THE
CONTROLLER AND THE +24 VOLT DC INPUTS. THE MONITOR SHALL ALSO
DETECT THE ABSENCE OF ANY REQUIRED RED SIGNAL VOLTAGE AT THE
FIELD CONNECTION TERMINALS. THE MONITOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
MONITORING FOR THE ABSENCE OF VOLTAGE ON ALL OF THE INPUTS OF A
CHANNEL.
2. A CONFLICTING INDICATION OR UNSATISFACTORY VOLTAGE WHEN
SENSED BY THE MONITOR SHALL TRIGGER A TRANSFER OF THE SIGNALS TO
FLASH.
3. THE MONITOR SHALL BE PROGRAMMED TO MONITOR THE CONTROLLERS
MAXIMUM PHASE AND OVERLAP CAPACITY.
4. THE SIGNAL MONITOR"SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NSKA
STANDARDS (MONITOR IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE CABINET). WIRING FOR
THE MONITOR SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE CABINET, A MINIMUM OF 12
CHANNELS.
PASE 5
TS-E7
PA6E 6
-rs - 3' P
I.
I
I
I
I
'.'
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.01 ~ 925.02 continued
.'
FLASHING OF SIGNALS:
1. EXTERNAL MEANS TO THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE' PROVIDED TO PERMIT
FLASHING INDICATIONS FOR THE NORMAL INTERVAL SEQUENCE. IT SHALL
BE POSSIBLE TO CHANGE THE FLASH SEQUENCE WITHOUT PERFORMING ANY
MODIFICATIONS ON THE BACK SIDE OF THE CABINET BACK .PANEL. ALL
CABINETS FURNISHED SHALL INCLUDE SUFFICIENT FLASH CHANGE RELAYS
FOR ALL POSSIBLE FLASH SEQUENCES.
2. FLASHING RATE SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 50 NOR MORE THAN 60
FLASHES PER MINUTE WITH APPROXIMATELY 50% ON AND 50% OFF PERIODS.
3. THE FLASHER IS TO BE SOLID STATE WITH NO CONTACTS OR MOVING
PARTS, AND SHALL UTILIZE ZERO~CROSS SWITCHING.
4. MEANS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO FLASH THE DON"T WALK OR WALK
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS DURING THEIR INTERVAL. FLASHING OF THESE
INDICATIONS SHALL BE OPTIONAL AND SHALL BE SELECTABLE FROM THE
KEYBOARD.
MANUAL OPERATION:
FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS, CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MEANS
TO ALLOW MANUAL OPERATION. MANUAL OPERATION SHALL PROVIDE THE
SAME INTERVAL SEQUENCE AS THE CONTROLLER WOULD PROVIDE NORMALLY.
MANUAL COMMANDS SHALL PLACE VEHICLE ACTUATIONS AND PEDESTRIAN
ACTUATIONS (WHEN PED. IS INCLUDED) ON ALL PHASES, STOP CONTROLLER
TIMING IN ALL INTERVALS EXCEPT CHANGE/CLEARANCE INTERVALS.
DURING MANUAL OPERATION ALL VEHICLE CHANGE/CLEARANCE INTERVALS
SHALL BE TIMED BY THE CONTROLLER WITH NO EFFECT FROM THE MANUALLY
INPUT ACTUAT IONS. MANUAL CONTROL JACKS AND/OR BUTTONS ARE NOT
INCLUDED IN THE CABINET UNLESS USER SPECIFIED.
COORDINATION:
THE CONTROLLER SHALL ACCOMPLISH COORDINATION BY UT!LIZING RING OR
UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AS SPECIFIED BY CURRENT NEMA STANDRDS.
THE BASIC CONTROLLER UNIT SHALL NOT REQUIRE ANY ADDITIONAL
INTERNAL WIRING TO ACCOMMODATE INTERNAL COORDINATION, WHICH MAY
BE ADDED AT A LATER DATE~ COORDINATED OPERATION IS SPECIFIED
FULLY UNDER LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT (SECTION 925.07) AND MASTER
CORDINATION UNIT (SECTION 925.08).
GUARANTEE:
1. EACH MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT A CERTIFICATE TO THE STATE
TRAFF I C AND SAFETY ENG I NEER FROM AN APPROVED INDEPENDENT
LABORATORY STATING THAT THE EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND MEETS
THE REDUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. THIS CERTIFICATE
SHALL BE REQUIRED WHENEVER SUBMITTING EQUIPMENT FOR INCLUSION IN
THE STATE APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST.
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.01 & 925.02 continued
2. MATER I ALS SUBMI TTALS SHALL I NCLUDE ALL MANUFACTURERS
WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES WITH RESPECT TO MATERIALS, PARTS,
WORKMANSHIP, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS.
SIGNAL PREE"PTION OPTION FOR CONTROLLERS AND CABINETS
DESCRIPTION:
THIS ARTICLE SETS . FORTH FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN REGlUIREMENTS FOR
SIGNAL PREEMPTION TO OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION WITH SOLID STATE
CONTROLLERS AND CABINETS.
FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1. THE PREEMPTION SHALL BE INTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER AND SHALL
INCLUDE ANY CONNECTOR, CABLES AND INTERFACE PANEL REGlUIRED TO
MOD I FY OR OTHERW I SE CHANGE THE VEH I CULAR PHASE SEQUENCE TO
PROVIDE THE PROPER PREEMPTION OPERATION.
2. A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4) POSSIBLE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL BE
PROV I DED . THESE ROUT I NES SHALL BE EST ABL I SHED I N A PR lOR I TY
ORDER WITH ROUTINE NUMBER 1 RECEIVING THE HIGHEST PRIORITY. THE
ORDER OF PRIORITY MAY BE SELECTABLE, BY KEYBOARD ENTRY, AT THE
OPTION OF THE MANUFACTURER. IN ALL CASES AN ORDERLY TRANSITION
FROM LOWER PRIORITY TO HIGHER PRIORITY PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL
BE PROV I DED FOR. I N ADD I T I ON , PROV IS IONS SHALL BE MADE FOR AN
ORDERLY TRANSITION FROM HIGHER PRIORITY TO LOWER PRIORITY, WHEN
THE HIGHER PR I OR I TY DEMAND HAS BEEN SAT I SF I ED AND A LOWER
PRIORITY DEMAND STILL EXISTS. PREEMPTION SHALL BE INITIATED BY
A GROUND TRUE LOG I C INPUT. PREEMPT I NPUTS SHALL NORMALLY HAVE
PR I OR I TY OVER AND OVERR I DE ANY REMOTE FLASH I NPUT OR TSC
CONTROLL.ED FLASH INPUT. THIS OVERRIDE PRIORrTY SHALL BE
SELECTABLE (YES OR NO) THRU CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING.
CONTROLLERS UT I LIZ I NG START UP FLASH OR M I N I MUM FLASH PER I DDS
PRIOR TO INITIALIZATION SHALL CONTINUE THE FLASHING OPERATION IF
ANY PREEMPT INPUT IS ACTIVE OR BECOMES ACTIVE DURING THIS FLASH
PERIOD. THE FLASHING OPERATION SHALL BE CONTINUOUS FOR THE
DURATION OF ANY PREMPT INPUT.
3. THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL PROVIDE FOR THE CAPABILITY OF
DWELLING IN A SELECTED PATTERN FOLLOWING THE APPROPRIATE
CLEARANCE INTERVALS' OR , BY KEYBOARD SELECT I ON . SHALL ALLOW FOR
THE NORMAL CYCLING OF SELECTED PEDESTRIAN AND/OR VEHICLE PHASES.
PHASES OR OVERLAPS NOT SELECTED FOR CYCLING SHALL MAINTAIN THEIR
OUTPUT STATES AS DEFINED IN THE DWELL STATE FOR THE ROUTINE IN
EFFECT.
PA6E 7
-rs-gr
PAGE B
-r5-q.O
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.01 . 925.02 SIGNAL PREEMPTION continued
4. ALL PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHA~L PROVIDE FOR THE SAFE AND
ORDERLY TRANSITION BACK TO NORMAL OPERATION FOLLOWING THE LOSS OF
THE CALL FOR' PREEMPT I ON. I N THE EVENT THAT LOWER PR I OR I TY
PREEMPTION DEMAND IS PRESENT, THE CONTROLLER. SHALL PROVIDE FOR
THE SAFE AND ORDERLY TRANSITION TO THE LOWER PRIORITY PREEMPTION
ROUTINES.
5. THE CAPABILITY TO TEST EACH PREEMPTION ROUTINES PROGRAMMING
AND OPERATION SHALL BE AVAILABLE BY KEYBOARD ENTRY.
6. EACH PRE-EMPTION ROUTINE SHALL HAVE THE ABILITY TO DELAY THE
RECOGNiTION OF THE PREEMPTION INPUT. THIS. FEATURE SHALL
DETERMINE THE TIME, IN SECONDS, THAT THE PREEMPTION INPUT MUST BE
PRESENT BEFORE IT IS RECOGNIZED BY THE CONTROLLER UNIT. IT SHALL
BE POSSIBLE TO DELAY RECOGNITION OF THE PREEMPTION INPUT, AS A
MINIMUM, FROM 0 TO 4 SECONDS IN INCREMENTS OF 1 SECOND OR LESS.
7. THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL OPERATE ALL SIGNAL .INDICATIONS
AS SPECIFIED BY NEMA AND THE MUTCD AND IN ADDITION SHALL PROVIDE
FOR THE ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4)
INDEPENDENTLY SELECTABLE OUTPUTS.
8. ANY CONTROLLER IN SYSTEM OPERATION SHALL IMMEDIATELY BEGIN
THE REESTABLISHMENT OF SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION UPON COMPLETION OF
ANY PREEMPTION ROUTINE(S).
9. DOCUMENTATION OF THE PREEMPTION OPERATION, PROGRAMMING AND
WIRING OF ANY INTERFACE PANELS, RELAYS AND/OROTHER COMPONENTS
UTILIZED TO PROVIDE THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL BE PROVIDED.
925.03 NON-NEMA CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
DEFINITIONs
1. CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY SHALL REFER TO AND INCLUDE ALL
COMPONENTS, MOUNTED IN A CABINET, NECESSARY FOR CONTROLLING THE
OPERATION OF A TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION. THIS CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY SHALL INCLUDE, BUT SHALL NOT BE LIMITED TO THE
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS LISTED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION.
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 NON-NEMA CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
GENERAL:
1. THE EQUIPMENT FURNISHED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS, ~S PUBLISHED BY
THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA BUSINESS, TRANSPORTATION & HOUSING
AGENCY; DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION, CURRENT EDITION (JANUARY,
1989 OR LATER), .AND ALL CURRENT ADDENDA AND THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL
PROV I S IONS. I N CASE OF CONFL I CT, THE SPEC I AL PROV I S IONS SHALL
TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. ALL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED SHALL BE NEW AND SHALL CONFORM TO
SPECIAL PROVISIONS, SPECIFICATIONS AND TO THE APPLICABLE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY INCORPORATED (UL),
THE ELECTRON I C I NDUSTR I ES ASSOC I AT I ON (E I A), THE NATIONAL
ELECTR I C CODE (NEC.), THE. AMER I CAN . SOC I ETY OF TEST I NG AND
MATERIALS (ASTM), THE AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
(ANSI), AND THE. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
(NEMA) I AND THE APPL I CABLE STANDARDS, SPEC I F I CAT IONS, AND
REGULATIONS OF THE GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
3. THE. CONTRACTOR SHALL, FOR EACH CAB I NET PROV IDEO, SUPPL Y 3
CAB I NET WI RING DIAGRAMS. ADD I T I ONALL Y , FOR EACH CAB I NET TYPE
PROV I DED I A MYLAR SEP I A OF THE CAB I NET WI RING DIAGRAM SHALL BE
SUPPL I ED. EQU I PMENT MANUALS FOR EACH TYPE OF ELECTRON I C
COMPONENT SUPPLIED SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS~ 1 EACH FOR EACH
CABINET ASSEMBLY SUPPLIED.
GLOSSARY:
1. THE FOLLOWING DEFINITIONS SHALL BE ADDED OR AMENDED TO
SECTION 1 OF THE CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SPECIFICATIONS.
2. ENG I NEER : THE STATE TRAFF I C AND SAFETY ENG I NEER OF THE
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION, ACTING EITHER DIRECTLY OR
THROUGH PROPERLY AUTHORIZED AGENTS, SUCH AGENTS ACTING WITHIN THE
SCOPE OF THE PARTICULAR DUTIES DELEGATED TO THEM. .
3. STATE: ALL REFERENCES IN THE SPECIFItATIONS TO THE "STATE"
SHALL BE THE STATE OF GEORGIA.
4. LABORATORY z THE ESTABL I SHED LABORATORY OF THE GEORG IA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION OR OTHER LABORATORIES AUTHORIZED BY
THE DEPARTMENT TO TEST MATERIALS INVOLVED IN THIS CONTRACT.
ITEM 3A. CONTROLLER UNIT, I'UlDEL 170
1. GENERALz
THIS SECTION DEFINES THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MODEL 170
CONTROLLER UNITS TO BE SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT.
'HE ,
-rS - ,,"I
PA6E 10
/5-42-
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3A (170 CONTROLLER) continued
2. PROGRAM MODULE:
&. MODEL 412-C: EACH MODEL 110 CONTROLLER UNIT SHALL BE
FURN I SHED WITH ONE ( 1) SYSTEM MEMORY MODULE OR PROGRAM
MODULE, MODEL 412-C AS DESCRIBED IN THE, CAL TRANS TRAFFIC
SIGNAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS, DATED JANUARY 19B9.
THE 412-C PROGRAM MODULE SHALL CONTAIN AT LEAST 32K BYTES OF
EPROM IN Ul, BK BYTES OF RAM IN U2, 4K BYTES OF EEPROM IN U3,
AND 8K BYTES OF RAM IN U4. THE M~MORY MAP FOR THE FOUR
SOCKETS OF THE PROGRAM MODULE SHALL BE ASSIGNED BY A CMOS
EPROM. THE ASSOCIATED JUMPERS SHALL BE SET IN A WAY TO ALLOW
THE USE OF THE MEMORY CONFIGURATION SPECIFIED ABOVE. "
b. MODEL 412-B, 412-W: THE BIDDER SHALL OFFER ALSO THE SYSTEM
MEMORY MODULE OR PROGRAM MODULE MODEL 412B, 412W OR EQUAL,
THAT GENERALLY COMPL Y WITH CAL TRANS MEMORY MODULE
SPECIFICATIONS. THE STATE MAY DECIDE THE PURCHASE OF SOME OF
THESE MODULES TO OPERATE ON-STREET MASTERS OR TO IMPLEMENT
ANY OTHER SPECIAL APPLICATIONS. THE STATE WILL PROVIDE THE
SUCCESSFUL BIDDER WITH A MEMORY MAP CONFIGURATION PRIOR TO
DELIVERY. AS A MINIMUM EACH PROM MODULE SHALL CONTAIN 32K
BYTES OF EPROM, BK BYTES OF RAM, AND 6K BYTES OF EEPROM.
3. MODEM, MODEL 400:
EACH MODEL 110 CONTROLLER UNIT SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH ONE (1)
MODEM, MODEL 400, AS DESCRIBED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. IN
ADDITION, EACH MODEL 170 CONTROLLER SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A
SECOND ACIA DECODED AT ADDRESSES 6002/6003, AND WITH, A C20S
CONNECTOR WHOSE PIN-OUT ASSIGNMENTS SHALL BE'THESAME AS THE C2S
CONNECTOR. THE LOCAT I ON OF THE CONNECTOR C20S SHALL BE
ACCESSIBLE THROUGH THE BACK PANEL OF THE 170 CONTROLLER UNIT.
4. DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM:
,A D I AGNOST I C TES- PROGRAM, RES I DENT I N EPROM C'-' EACH PROGRAM
MODULE, SHALL BE SUPPL I ED. THE, D I AGNOST I C TEST PROGRAM SHALL
TEST THE OPERATION OF THE MODEL 170 CONTROLLER UNIT, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INTERNAL MEMORY, THE PROGRAM MODULE, THE REAL
TIME CLOCK, INPUT-OUTPUT CIRCUITRY, THE MODEM AND THE DISPLAY AND
KEYBOARD. THE PROGRAM SMALL BE CAPABLE OF OPERATING WITH AN
EXTERNAL CRT (PROVIDED BY OTHERS), AND WITH CONTROLLER KEYPAD
ENTR I ES AND D I SPLAYS. OPT I ONALL Y , THE BIDDER SHALL QUOTE PC
SOFTWARE REQUIRED TO ALLOW THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH IBM
CCMPATIBLE PERSONAL COMPUTER. FULL DOCUMENTATION ON THE PROGRAM
SHALL BE INCLUDED. THE DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM SHALL ALSO VERIFY
THE OPERATION OF THE CABINETS FURNISHED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THE
PROGRAM SHALL TEST CABINET WIRING RELATED TO THE OUTPUT FILE,
INPUT FILE, AND POLICE PANEL AND FLASH SWITCHES. IN ADDI~ION,
THE PROGRAM SHALL CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE CONFLICT MONITOR, BY
GENERATING ALL POSSIBLE CONFLICTS, IN SEQUENCE, AND RESETTING THE
MONITOR AUTOMATICALLY (A SHORTING PLUG JACK IN THE ,CABINET IS
SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE IN THIS DOCUMENT). THE CABINET TEST PORTION
OF THI S TEST MAY BE PROVI DED ON A SEPARATE SET OF EPROMS,
PROVIDED IN ADDITION TO THE CONTROLLER UNIT TEST PORTION
INSTALLED IN THE PROGRAM MODULE.
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I .'.--'
925.03 ITEM 3A (170 CONTROLLER) continued
THE BIDDER SHALL QUOTE ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE TO ALLOW OUTPUT
REPORTS TO BE SENT TO A PRINTER OR TO A FILE ON AN IBM COMPATIBLE
PERSONAL COMPUTER. THE BIDDER SHALL SUPPLY ONE . CAB I NET TEST
PROGRAM FOR EACH 10 OR LESS UNITS PURCHASED. EACH COpy OF THE
CONTROLLER TEST PROGRAM SHALL INCLUDE 1 SET OF NECESSARY WRAP-
AROUND CONNECTORS PER (10) CONTROLLERS PURCHASED.
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NE"A CABINET AS~BLIES
1. GENERAL:
TH I S SECT I ON DEF I NES THE ADD I T I ONAL REQU I REMENTS FOR MODEL 332,
MODEL 337 AND MODEL 336A STRETCH CAB I NET ASSEMBL I ES TO. BE
SUPPLIED BY THE BIDDER FOR THIS CONTRACT. ALL CABINETS SHALL
EXHIBIT A "BARE" ALUMINUM FINISH. ALL MAIN CABINET DOOR LOCKS
SHALL ACCEPT NO. 2 CORBIN KEYS. TWO (2) SETS OF KEYS SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH EACH CABINET. ALL CABINET ASSEMBLIES (WITH THE
POSSIBLE EXCEPTION OF MODEL 336B ALTERNATIVES DESCRIBED BELOW)
SHALL UT I L I ZE A POWER ,D I STR I BUT I ON ASSEMBLY ..2 (PDA 12). THE
OPTION FOR SUPPLYING A POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY" 1 (PDA ..1)
WITH SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. THE POWER
DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY 12 (PDA 12) SHALL BE OFFERED AS A PART OF
THE STANDARD CABINET ASSEMBLY AND ALSO AS A SEPARATE ITEM TO
ALLOW THE ACQUISITION OF SPARE UNITS. LOOP DETECTORS SHALL NOT
BE I NCLUDED AS STANDARD PARTS OF THE CAB I NET ASSEMBLY. THESE
ITEMS SHALL BE OFFERED BY THE BIDDER, AS IS'REQUIRED IN PART 3,
INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR INPUTS~ BUT THE STATE RESERVES THE RIGHT
TO ASS I GN CAB I NET ASSEMBL I ES AND LOOP DETECTORS TO DIFFERENT
BIDDERS. ALL CABINETS ASSEMBLIES (EXCEPT 332) SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH A POLE MOUNTING BRACKET AND BOLT PATTERN THAT WILL ALLOW
MAXIMUM FLEXIBILITY OF MOUNTING OPTIONS GIVEN THE DIFFERENT TYPES
OF POLE~ .TO BE USED. THE MOUNTING BRACKET SHALL BE MANUFACTURED
OF ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED STEEL IN THE SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS SHOWN
IN DETAIL SHEET 12, FIGURE 1. THE CABINET BOLT PATTERN SHALL BE
AS DETAILED IN AT THE END OF ITEM FOUR IN DETAIL SHEET 12, FIGURE
2. AL TERNATIVE DESIGNS FOR THE POLE MOUNTING ASSEMBLY MUST BE
APPROVED BY THE DEPARTMENT. ALL CABINET ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE
EQUIPPED WITH A LOADING CAPACITOR RATED AT 2.2 MICROFARADS AND
2'0 ,VOLTS FOR EVERY PED YELLOW OUTPUT AND ALL UNUSED REDS
(PHASES 1,3,' & 7) ON THE OUTPUT FILE
2. CABINET LIGHT.
EACH CABINET SHALL INCLUDE ONE (1) FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURE
MOUNTED INSIDE THE TOP FRONT PORTION O~THE CABINET. THE FIXTURE
SHALL INCLUDE A COOL WHITE LAMP, COVERED, AND SHALL BE OPERATED
BY A NORMAL PO~ER FACTOR UL LISTED BALLAST. A DOOR ACTUATED
SWITCH SHALL BE INSTALLED TO TURN ON THE CABINET LIGHT WHEN THE
FRONT DOOR IS OPENED.
PA6EU
T.S - 43
PAS{ 12
f5'-H
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
3. DIAGNOSTIC TESTING SHORTING JACK:
A PHONE JACK, WHICH SHALL MATE WITH A SWITCHCRAFT MODEL 190 PLUG,
SHALL BE LOCATED IN THE CABINET FOR AUTOMATIC CABINET DIAGNOSTIC
TESTING. WHEN THE PLUG IS INSERTED, A RESET SIGNAL, GENERATED BY
THE CONTROLLER UNIT AT PIN CI-I02 OF THE 210 MONITOR, WILL BE
ROUTED TO THE EXTERNAL RESET INPUT.
4. SURGE PROTECTION FOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT:
EACH CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DEVICES TO PROTECT THE
CONTROL EQUIPMENT FROM SURGES AND OVERVOLTAGES; SPECIFICALLY
EQUIPMENT CONNECTED THROUGH THE INPUT FILE AND COMMUNICATION
LINES. THE SURGE PROTECTION FOR THE INPUT FILE SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE 13 USABLE SLOTS OF THE
STANDARD 332/336 CABINET ASSEMBLY AS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL SHEET _1
LOCATED AT THE END OF ITEM FOUR. AC AND DC FIELD TERMINALS AND
SURGE PROTECTION WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE TERMINATION PANELS TO BE
ATTACHED TO THE CABINET RACK ASSEMBLY. AC ISOLATION TERMINALS
SHALL BE ON THE SAME S I DE OF THE CAB I NET WITH THE AC, SERV I CE
INPUTS. DC TERM I NALS AND LOOP DETECTOR TERM I NALS SHALL BE
INSTALLED ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE ,CABINET TO REDUCE
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION FROM POWER LINES. THE SURGE PROTECTOR
PANELS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO ALLOW FOR ADEQUATE SPACE FOR A WIRE
CONNECT I ON AND SURGE PROTECTOR REPLACEMENT. SURGE PROTECTORS
SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE FULL CAPACITY OF THE CABINET INPUT FILE
ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD PROVIDED IN DETAIL SHEET *1, THE TYPE
OF SURGE PROTECTORS FOR AC INPUTS, DC INPUTS" LOOP DETECTOR
INPUTS AND COMMUNICATION LINES SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING
SPECIFICATIONS.
~. AC SERVICE INPUTS:
EACH CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL INCLUDE A SURGE PROTECTION UNIT
ON THE AC SERVICE INPUT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING
REQUIREMENTS:
EACH CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A HYBRID TYPE
POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (WHICH MAY BE INCORPORATED
INTO THE POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY [PDA _2)). THE
PROTECTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE APPLIED LINE VOLTAGE
AND EARTH GROUND; THE SURGE PROTECTOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
REDUCING THE EFFECT OF LIGHTNING TRANSIENT VOLTAGES APPLIED
TO THE AC LINE. THE PROTECTOR SHALL I NCLUDE THE FOLLOW I NG
FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS:
MAXIMUM AC LINE VOLTAGE: 140 VAC.
TWENTY PULSES OF PEAK CURRENT, EACH OF WHICH WILL RISE IN B
MICROSECONDS AND FALL IN 20 MICROSECONDS TO ONE-HALF THE
PEAK: 20,000 AMPERES.
THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE FOLLOWING TERMINALS:
MAIN LINE (AC LINE FIRST STAGE TERMINAL).
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
MAIN NEUTRAL (AC NEUTRAL INPtlT TERMINALS).
EQUIPMENT LINE OUT (AC LINE SECOND STAGE OUTPUT TERMINAL, 10
AMPS. ) .
EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT (NEUTRAL TERMINAL TO PROTECTED
EQUIPMENT).
GND (EARTH CONNECTION).
THE MAIN AC L I NEI N AND THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT TERMINALS
SHALL BE SEPARATED BY A 200 MICROHENRIE (MINIMUM) INDUCTOR
RATED TO HANDLE 10 AMP AC SERVICE.
THE FIRST STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN MAIN LINE AND GROUND
TERMINALS.
THE SECOND STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT LINE OUT
AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL.
THE PROTECTOR FOR THE FIRST AND SECOND-STAGE CLAMP MUST HAVE
A MOV OR SIMILAR SOLID STATE DEVICE RATED AT 20 KA AND BE OF
A COMPLETELY SOLID STAGE DESIGN (I.E. NO GAS DISCHARGE TUBES
ALLOWED) .
THE MAIN NEUTRAL AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT SHALL BE CONNECTED
TOGETHER INTERNALLY AND SHALL HAVE AN MOV SIMILAR SOLID STATE
DEVICE OR GAS DISCHARGE TUBES RATED AT 20 KA BETWEEN MAIN
NEUTRAL AND GROUND TERMINALS ~
PEAK CLAMP VOLTAGE: 350 VOLTS AT 20 KA. (VOLTAGE MEASURED
BETWEEN EOUIPMENT LINE our AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT
TERMINALS. CURRENT APPLIED BETWEEN MAIN LINE AND GROUND
TERMINALS WITH GROUND AND MAIN NEUTRAL TERMINALS EXTERNALLY
T I ED TOGETHER).
VOLTAGE SHALL NEVER EXCEED 350 VOLTS.
THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE EPOXY ENCAPSULATED IN A FLAME
RETARDANT MATERIAL.
CONTINUOUS SERVICE CURRENT. 10 AMPS AT 120 VAC RMS.
THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT SHALL PROVIDE POWER TO THE TYPE 170
AND TO THE 24V POWER SUPPLY.
b. AC+ INTERCONNECT CABLE INPUTS,
EACH- REMOTE DETECTOR INPUT LINE (I F REDUI RED) AND
INTERCONNECT LINE (MINIMUM OF SIX CHANNELS) SHALL BE
PROTECTED AS I T ENTERS THE CAB I NET WITH A SURGE PROTECT _ION
DEVICE THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS,
THE UNIT SHALL BE A 3 ELECTRODE GAS TUBE TYPE OF SURGE
ARRESTER.
PA6E 13
-rS-4S
PASE lC
IS -~
I
I
I
I
I
"'1,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NE~ CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
THE STR I KING VOL T AGE SHALL BE 300- 500 VDC WITH A M I N I MUM
HOLDER OVER VOLTAGE OF 155 VDC.
THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, ONE OF WHICH SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO GROUND, THE OTHER TWO SHALL BE CONNECTED
ACROSS EACH INPUT RESPECTIVELY.
THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
I MPULSE BREAKDOWN: LESS THAN 100V I N LESS THAN .1.1
MICROSECOND AT 10 KV/MICROSECOND
IMPULSE BREAKDOWN BALANCE: 0.01 MICROSECOND lOR LESS)
DIFFERENCE AT 10 KV/MICROSECOND IMPULSE
ENERGY APPLICATION: WITHSTANDS 20 AMP AC FOR 1 SEC. APPLIED
10 TIMES AT 3 MINUTE INTERVALS ON EITHER SECTION
CURRENT RATING: 40,000 AMP (8/20 IMPULSE)
CAPACITANCE: 6 PICOFARADS, LINE TO GROUND
c. INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR INPUTS
EACH INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR CHANNEL INPUT SHALL BE PROTECTED
BY AN EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE MEETING OR EXCEEDING
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO OF WHICH SHALL
BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE SIGNAL I NPUTS OF THE DETECTOR. THE
TH I RD TERM I NAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASS I S GROUND TO
PROTECT AGAINST COMMON MODE DAMAGE.
THE UNIT SHALL INSTANTLY CLAMP DIFFERENTIAL MODE SURGES
( I NDUCED VOLTAGE ACROSS THE LOOP DETECTOR I NPUT TERM I NALS )
VIA A .SEMICONDUCTOR ARRAY. THE ARRAY SHALL BE DESIGNED TO
APPEAR AS A VERY LOW CAPACITANCE TO THE DETECTOR.
THE UN I T SHALL CLAMP COMMON MODE SURGES ( I NDUCED VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE LOOP LEADS AND GROUND) VIA SOLID STATE CLAMPING
DEVICES.
THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT (SIX TIMES)
DIFFERENTIAL MODE 400 AMPS (8X20MS)
COMMON MODE 1000 MPS (8X20MS)
ESTIMATED OCCURRENCES 500 @ 200 AMPS
RESPONSE TIME 40 NS
INPUT CAPACITANCE 35 PF TYPICAL
I
'I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'925.03 ITEM 38. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
~'. . <..
,
TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +85 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
MOUNTING NO. 10-32 X 3/8" BOLT
CLAMP VOLTAGE @400 AMPS
DIFF. MODE 30 VOLTS MAX. el000 AMPS
COMM. MODE 30 VOLTS MAX.
d. SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES (SWITCHPACKS):
EACH SWITCHPACK SOCKET LOCATION IN THE OUTPUT FILE SHALL
CONTAIN METAL OXIDE VARISTORS (MOV) WHICH ARE TIED FROM THE
, "
AC POSITIVE FIELD TERMINAL TO CHASSIS GROUND TO PROTECT
SWITCHPACKS FROM SURGES OCCURRING ON THE AC OUTPUT LINES.
THESE MOVS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE SINUSOIDAL VOLTAGE (RMS)
RAT I NG AT 50-60 HERTZ OF AT LEAST 150 VOLTS AT 25 DEGREES
CENTIGRADE.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE APPLIED DC VOLTAGE
RATING OF AT LEAST 200 VOLTS AT 25 DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
THE TRANSIENT ENERGY RATING SHALL BE AT LEAST BO JOULES FOR A
SINGLE IMPULSE OF 10/1000 MICROSECOND CURRENT WAVEFORM AT 25
DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
THE PEAK CURRENT RATING SHALL BE 6500 AMPERES FOR A SINGLE
IMPULSE OF 8/20 MICROSECOND WAVEFORM WITH THE RATED
CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE APPLIED.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM VARISTOR VOLTAGE OF 212 VOLTS
AT 1.0 MILLIAMPERE OF DC CURRENT APPLIED FOR A DURATION OF 20
MILLISECONDS TO 5 SECONDS.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLAMPING VOLTAGE OF 395 VOLTS
WITH AN APPLIED 8/20 MICROSECOND IMPULSE OF 100 AMPERES.
THE TYPICAL CAPACITANCE AT A FREQUENCY OF 0.1 TO 1.0
MEGAHERTZ SHALL BE 1600 PICOFARADS.
THE UNIT SHALL BE A TWO TERMINAL DEVICE, ONE TERMINAL SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO THE AC OUTPUT OF THE SIGNAL LOAD SW I TCH ON
THE OUTPUT FILE TERMINALS (BACKSIDE OF THE FIELD TERMINALS)
AND THE OTHER TERMINAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO AC NEUTRAL.
e. COMMUNICATIONS INPUTS
EACH LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT SHALL BE PROTECTED AS
IT ENTERS THE CABINET WITH A SOLID STATE SURGE PROTECTION
UNIT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
'ME 15
7$ - ~'7
925.03 ITEM 3B. NDN-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
THE UNIT" SHALL BE A DUAL PAIR. (FOUR WIRE) MODULE WITH A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR, DOUBLE SIDED AND GOLD PLATED
FOR RELIABILITY.
THE UNIT SHALL MATE WITH AND BE INSTALLED IN A TEN (10)
CIRCUIT BUCHANNAN CONNECTOR PNPCBIB OR EQUIVALENT.
THE UNIT SHALL BE UTILIZED AS TWO INDEPENDENT SIGNAL PAIRS.
THE DATA CIRCUITS SHALL PASS THROUGH THE PROTECTION IN A
SERIAL FASHION.
THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT 10K AMPS (BX20MS, WAVESHAPE)
OCCURRENCES AT 2000 AMPS
50 TYPICAL
RESPONSE TIME
<S NANOSECONDS
VOLTAGE CLAMP
30
SERIES RESISTANCE 24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +BS DEGREES CENTIGRADE
PRIMARY PROTECTOR THREE ELEMENT GAS TUBE 10KA, eX20 MS, PER
SIDE
SECONDARY PROTECTOR RUGGED SOLID STATE CLAMPS, I.SKW MINIMUM
THE C2 CONNECTOR OF THE 170 CONTROLLER SHALL TERMINATE ON THE
LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
THE COMMUNICATION FIELD WIRES FOR THIS LOCAL SITE SHALL
TERMINATE ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
THE GROUND TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS GROUND.
f. LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUTS
EACH LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUT CHANNEL SHALL BE PROTECTED BY AN
EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE, AS IT ENTERS THE CABINET,
MEETING OR EXCEEDING THE FOLLOWING:
THE UNIT SHALL BE A FIVE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO TERMINALS SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO THE LINE SIDE OF THE LOW VOLTAGE PAIR, TWO
TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTED SIDE OF THE LOW
VOLTAGE INPUT AREA, THE FIFTH TERMINAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO
CHASSIS GROUND.
THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT
2000 AMPS BX20US WAVESHAPE
OCCURRENCES AT PEAK CURRENT
100 TYPICAL
PAGE U
Is-~g
I
I
I
I
I
.-
01,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
Q. RED MONITOR HARNESS:
RESPONSE TIME:
5 TO 30 NANOSECONDS
SHOCK:
WIrHSTANDS 10 FOOT DROP ON CONCRETE
VOLTAGE CLAMP: 30
SERIES RESISTANCE:
24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE:
-20 DEGREES TO +B5 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
A CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL ASSEMBLY DESIGNATED AS P20 (MAGNUM
PIN 722120 OR EQUIVALENT) FOR MONITORING THE ABSENCE OF RED
SHALL BE AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE OUTPUT FILE. THE CONNECTOR
SHALL TERMINATE AND BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE CABLE AND C
CONNECTOR OF A TYPE 170 CONFLICT MONITOR UNIT (CMU), CAPABLE
OF MONITORING THE ABSENCE OF RED. THE PIN ASSIGNMENTS OF THE
P20 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL ASSEMBLY SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH
THE CAB I NET PLANS. THE P20 CONNECTOR SHALL BE PHYS I CALL Y
ALIKE TO THE CABLE AND CONNECTOR OF A TYPE 110 CMU TO
PREVENT THE ABSENCE OF RED CABLE CONNECTOR FROM BE I NG
INSERTED INTO THE P20 CONNECTOR IBO DEGREES OUT OF ALIGNMENT.
DETAILS FOR PROGRAMMING OF THE UNUSED RED CHANNELS SHALL BE
SUBJECT TO APPROVAL.
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, MODEL 33bA STRETCH
1 . . GENERAL: , TH I S SECT ION DEF I NES THE ADD I T I ONAL REQU I REMENTS
FOR MODEL 336A STRETCH CABINET ASSEMBLIES:
THE MODEL 33bA STRETCH ASSEMBLY, WITH HOUSING TYPE IB, SHALL
BE A MODEL 336A ASSEMBLY MODIFIED TO PROVIDE APPROXIMATELY
SIX (b) ADDITIONAL INCHES OF CABINET HEIGHT EXCLUSIVE OF "M"
BASE ADAPTOR. THE CABINET CAGE AND INTERNAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SHALL BE CONFIGURED 50 THAT THE ADDITIONAL HEIGHT IS ADDED TO
THE OPEN AREA AT THE BOTTOM OF THE CABINET CAGE. EACH MODEL
336A STRETCH CABINET ASSEMBLY SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH ONE "M"
BASE MOUNTING ADAPTOR, AS DEFINED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS.
EACH MODEL 33bA ASSEMBLY SHALL ALSO BE FULLY CAPABLE OF
UN I VERSAL , 5 I DE OF POLE MOUNT I NG. MODEL 336A SHALL BE
EQUIPPED WITH ISOLATORS, SWITCHPACKS AND OTHER ASSOCIATED
DEV I CES IN SUFF I C I ENT QUANT I TIES TO SUPPORT FULL B-PHASE,
DUAL RING OPERAT I ON 1 NCLUD I NG 4-PHASE PEDESTR I AN OPERAT I ON
( i . e . 4 , PEDESTR I AN PUSHBUTTON INPUTS, 6, AC,+ INTERCONNECT
INPUTS, 1, 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT, 12, SWITCHPACKS). A
DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED FOR SLOT 14 (STOP
TIME/FLASH SENSE).
75-#
PA6E 17
925.03 ITEM 3C.. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLYp MODEL 337
1. GENERAL: TH I S SECT,! ON DEF I NES THE ADD I T.t ONAL REQU I REMENTS
FOR MODEL 337 CABINET ASSEMBLIES:
MODEL 337 SHALL BE A COMPACT CABINET WITH AN OUTPUT CAPACITY
LIMITED TO FOUR VEHICLE PHASES PLUS TWO PEDESTRIAN PHASES;
THE DIMENSIONS SHALL NOT EXCEED 17"D )( 20"W X 35"H AND ITS
WEIGHT SHALL NOT EXCEED 125 LBS. THE CABINET ASSEMBLY SHALL
BE PROV I DED WITH CAPAC I TY FOR 11, TWO-CHANNEL SLOTS I N THE
INPUT FILE. THE INPUT AND. OUTPUT FILE SHALL ~E ORGANIZED AND
LABELED AS STRUCTURED SUBSETS OF THE MODEL 336 CAB I NET
ASSEMBLY. THE PIN ASStGNMENTS OF THE Cl CONNECTOR SHALL BE
COMPATIBLE WITH THE 170 CONTROLLER AS APPLICABLE ACCORDING TO
THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF INPUT/OUTPUTS. THE 337 CABINET SHALL
USE STANDARD INPUT AND OUTPUT FILE UNITS.
925.03 ITEM 3C. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, P1DDEL 337 continued
THE CABINET SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A C2 CONNECTOR HARNESS
WITH FIELD TERMINALS PROTECTED WITH SURGE PROTECTORS FOR
COMMUNICATION INPUTS AS SPECIFIED UNDER COMMUNICATIONS
INPUTS. THE CAB I NET SHALL BE DES I GNED WITH TWO FULL -S I ZE
DOORS TO ALLOW COMPLETE ACCESS FROM THE FRONT OR BACK OF THE
CABINET. THE RACK ASSEMBLY SHALL BE DESIGNED TO MOUNT IN
CAL TRANS STANDARD RAILS TO ALLOW SPACE FOR A MODEL 204
FLASHER, PROVIDE A RECEPTACLE TO ACCEPT THE PLUG IN POWER
D I STR I BUT I ON ASSEMBL Y , CARD GU I DES AND EDGE CONNECTORS FOR
THE INPUT FILE, CARD GU I DES TO SUPPORT .THE CONFL I CT MON I TOR,
AND LOAD SWITCHES AND FLASH TRANSFER RELAYS.
DUE TO THE COMPACT DESIGN OF THIS CABINET ASSEMBLY, THE STATE
MAY ACCEPT A NON-STANDARD TYPE OF POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY
(PDA) . MODEL 337 SHALL BE EQU I PPED WITH ISOLATORS,
SW I TCHPAC KS AND OTHER ASSOC I ATED DEV I CES IN SUFF I C lENT
QUANTITIES TO SUPPORT FULL 4-PHASE OPERATION INCLUDING 2-
PHASE PEDESTR I AN OPERAT I ON ( i. e. 2, PEDESTR J AN PUSHBUTTON
INPUTS; 6. AC+ INTERCONNECT INPUTS; 1, 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS
INPUT; 6, SWITCHPACKS).A DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED
FOR SLOT 14 (STOP TIME/FLASH SENSE).
925.03 ITEM 3D. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLYp MODEL 332
1. GENERAL: THIS SECTION DEFINES THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR MODEL 332 CABINET ASSEMBLIES.
THE MODEL 332 CABINET ASSEMBLY SHALL BE MODEL 332A (LOWER
INPUT PANEL) CABINET, WITH HOUSING TYPE IB, AND ALL
COMPONENTS AS DESCRIBED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS. MODEL 332
SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH ISOLATORS, 'SWITCHPACKS AND OTHER
ASSOCIATED DEVICES IN SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES TO SUPPORT FULL
B-PHASE, DUAL RING OPERATION INCLUDING 4-PHASE PEDESTRIAN
OPERAT I ON <<i. e. 4, PEDESTR I AN PUSHBUTTON I NPUTS I b, AC+
INTERCONNECT INPUTS; 1, 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT; 12,
SWITCHPACKS). A DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED FOR SLOT
14 (STOP TIME/FLASH SENSE).
PA6E 18
-rs -50
I
I
I
I
I
....1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. ,
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~;. _ r":, ._';.
925.03 NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, COMPONENTS
ITEf'I NO. 3E
A. MODEL 200 SWITCH PACK
ITEM NO. 3F
A., MODEL 242 DC ISOLATOR
ITEM NO. 36
A. MODEL 222 LOOP DETECTOR
ITEf'I NO. 3H
A. MODEL 252 AC ISOLATOR
ITEM NO. 3J
A. MODEL 210 CONFLICT MONITOR
1. GENERAL: CONFLICT MONITORS PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT
SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS
AND THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS STATED HEREIN.
2. ABSENCE OF RED MONITO,RING: THE CONFLICT MONITOR SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF MONITORING FOR THE ABSENCE OF VOLTAGE ON ALL OF
THE I NPUTS OF A CHANNEL (DEF I NED HERE AS RED, YELLOW, AND
GREEN). IF AN OUTPUT IS NOT PRESENT ON AT LEAST ONE INPUT OF
A CHANNEL AT ALL TIMES, THE UNIT SHALL BEGIN TIMING THE
DURATION OF THIS CONDITION. IF THIS CONDITION EXISTS FOR
LESS THAN 700 MILLISECONDS, THE UNIT SHALL NOT TRIGGER. IF
THIS CONDITION EXISTS FOR MORE THAN 1000 MILLISECONDS, THE
UN I T SHALL TR I GGER AS I F A CONFL I CT HAD OCCURRED, CAUS I NG
IMMEDIATE TRANSFER INTO A FLASHING MODE, AND STOP TIME TO BE
APPLIED TO THE CONTROLLER. A RED SIGNAL INPUT SHALL REQUIRE
THE PRESENCE OF A MINIMUM OF 60 (+/- 10) VOLTS AC TO SATISFY
THE REQUIREMENTS OF A RED INDICATION. THE RED INPUT SIGNALS
SH,ALL BE BROUGHT I NTO THE CONFL I CT MON I TOR THROUGH AN
AUXILIARY CONNECTOR ON THE MONITOR'S FRONT PANEL. A SIMILAR
CONNECTOR SHALL BE PROV I DED ON THE OUTPUT FILE, AND A
REMOVABLE HARNESS CONNECTING THE TWO SHALL BE PROVIDED. AN
INDICATOR ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE MONITOR SHALL BE PROVIDED
TO IDENTIFY THE TRIGGERING OF THE MONITOR IN RESPONSE TO'THE
ABSENCE OF RED CONDITION.
IS -Sf
PAGE 19
PAS{ 20
/5' -sz-
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET .
DESCRIPTION:
, .
1. THE CABINET SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF FABRICATED SHEET ALUMINUM
WITH A MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.125 INCH.. THE CABINET SHALL BE
CLEAN CUT . I N DES I GN , AND APPEARANCE. CAB I NETS WILL NOT BE
EQUIPPED WITH LOAD SWITCHES BUT WILL HAVE TERMINALS WIRED IN
FOR SAME. THE LOAD SWITCHES AND CONFLICT MONITOR WILL BE
SEPARATE ITEMS UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION. WIRING HARNESSES'
WILL BE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE CABINET OR CABINET ASSEMBLY
AND EACH HARNESS WILL HAVE A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR FOR EVERY
AVAILABLE PIN POSITION ON ALL CONNECTORS. HARNESSES
FURNISHED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL ACCOMMODATE TWELVE
CHANNEL MON I TORS. L I GHTN I NG AND SURGE PROTECT I ON SHALL BE
INCLUDED WITH AND WIRED INTO THE CABINET. THE CABINET SHALL
CONFORM TO THE FOLLOW ING MECHAN I CAL AND ELECTR I CAL
SPECIFICATIONS. ALL HINGE PINS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF
STAINLESS STEEL.
a. THE MAIN DOOR OF THE CABINET SHALL INCLUDE, AS A MINIMUM,
as;. OF THE FULL AREA OF THE FRONT OF THE CABINET. THE DOOR
SHALL BE NEOPRENE GASKETED AND PROVIDED WITH A STRONG
TUMBLER LOCK AND 2 KEYS. THE DOOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF BEING
SECURED IN THE OPEN POSITION BY DUAL NONREMOVABLE DOOR
STOPS. ONE DOOR STOP SHALL BE LOCATED AT THE BOTTOM OF THE
DOOR AND ONE AT THE TOP OF THE DOOR AND BOTH SHALL HAVE AT
LEAST TWO (2) VARIABLE STOP POSITIONS BETWEEN 90 AND 120
DEGREES. LOUVERS TO PROVIDE FOR VENTILATION OF THE CABINET
SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE DOOR. A STANDARD REMOVABLE FURNACE
FILTER WITH MINIMUM DIMENSIONS OF 12" X 16" X 1" SHALL BE
PROVIDED ON THE INSIDE OF THE DOOR TO COVER THE VENTILATION
LOUVERS. THIS FILTER SHALL BE AFFIXED TO THE DOOR IN SUCH
A WAY AS TO BE EASILY REMOVED AND REPLACED WITHOUT THE USE
OF TOOLS. ALL CABINETS FURNISHED TO GEORGIA D.O.T. SHALL
HAVE LOCKS KEYED SPECIFICALLY FOR GA. D.O.T. AS SPECIFIED
BY THE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ELECTRICAL FACILITIES OFFICE,
PLASTERS AVE., ATLANTA, GEORGIA 30324. THESE KEYS SHALL
NOT BE FURNISHED TO ANY OTHER AGENCY OR PERSON.
b. A SECOND HINGED DOOR, MOUNTED IN THE MAIN DOOR SHALL GIVE
ACCESS TO A SWITCH ON A POLICE PANEL. THIS DOOR SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH A CONVENTIONAL POLICE LOCK AND KEY. THIS
PANEL SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES: 1) SIGNAL
OFF/ON. WHEN PLACED IN THE OFF POSITION, AC POWER TO THE
LOAD SWI TCHES SHALL BE REMOVED CAUS I NG THE FIELD
INDICATIONS TO BECOME DARK. THE CONTROLLER SHALL REMAIN
ACT I VE AND SHALL CONT I NUE TO CYCLE. WHEN TH I S SW I TCH IS
RETURNED TO THE ON (RUN) POSITION, A RESTART COMMAND SHALL
BE ISSUED TO THE CONTROLLER CAUSING THE CONTROLLER TO
INITIATE ITS PREDETERMINED START UP SEQUENCE. 2)
FLASH/NORMAL SWITCH: WHEN PLACED IN THE FLASH POSITION,
THIS SWITCH SHALL CAUSE THE SIGNAL TO FLASH IN ITS
PREDETERMINED SEQUENCE AND STOP TIME TO BE APPLIED TO T~E
CONTROLLER. WHEN THIS SWITCH IS RETURNED TO THE NORMAL
POSITION, A RESTART COMMAND SHALL BE ISSUED TO THE
CONTROLLER CAUSING THE CONTROLLER TO INITIATE ITS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PREDETERMINED StART UP SEQUENCE.
_,'I.. ._
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
c. THE CABINET SHALL CONTAIN'STRONG SUPPORTS FOR HOLDING THE
NECESSARY EQUIPMENT.
d. THE CAB I NET SHALL BE OF SUFF I C lENT SIZE TO HOUSE THE
CONTROLLER AND ANY OTHER AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BY
THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, WITH AT LEAST 520 SQUARE
INCHES OF UASABLE SHELF SPACE. SHELF SPACE SHALL BE FULL
WIDTH AND SHALL BE SO LOCATED THAT IT IN NO WAY INTERFERES
WITH ACCESS TO THE BACK PANEL OR OTHER COMPONENTS IN THE
CABINET. IN THE EVENT OF A SYSTEM MASTER/LOCAL CABINET,
THE SHELF SPACE SHALL REQUIRE SUFFICIENT SPACE FOR ALL
NECESSARY AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT WITHOUT CROWDING, STACKING OR
LAY I NG COMPONENTS SIDEWAYS. ADEQUATE SPACE SHALL BE
PROVIDED IN THE CABINET TO ACCESS OR REMOVE INDIVIDUAL
COMPONENTS WITHOUT REMOV I NG THE CONTROLLER, HARNESSES OR
ANY OTHER COMPONENT FROM THE CABINET. CABINET DIMENSIONS
AS A MINIMUM SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON ATTACHED CABINET tRAWING.
BOLT LAYOUTS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON ATTACHED BOLT LAYOUT
DRAWINGS.
2. ALL CABINET WIRING SHALL BE NEATLY ARRANGED AND FIRMLY LACED
OR BUNDLED AND MECHANICALLY SECURED (NO ADHESIVE FASTENERS).
THE CABINET SHALL PROVIDE AT LEAST THE FOLLOWING:
a. CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
1) 50 AMP BREAKER FOR THE INCOMING AC SUPPLY.
2) 20,AMP BREAKER FOR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT.
3) 10 AMP BREAKER FOR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT.
4) 10 AMP BREAKER FOR SYSTEM MASTER IN MASTER CABINETS.
b. TERMINAL, UNFUSED, FOR NEUTRAL SIDE'OF INCOMING POWER
SUPPLY LINE.
c. TERMINALS AND BASES
1) TERMINALS AND BASES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR A MAXIMUM
COMPLEMENT OF SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES, OUTGOING SIGNAL
FIELD CIRCUITS AND SIGNAL FLASHERS. WHEN PREEMPTION IS
INCLUDED IN THE CABINET, A SUFFICIENT NUMBER OF
TERMINALS SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO SUPPLY AC SERVICE TO A
MINIMUM OF FOUR BLANK OUT SIGNS. CABINETS SHALL BE
WIRED TO PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING LOAD SWITCH TO FUNCTION
RELATIONSHIP, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. MEANS SHALL
BE PROVIDED TO CHANGE OVERLAPS TO PEDS AND/OR PEDS TO
OVERLAPS WITHOUT MODIFICATION TO THE BACK SIDE OF THE
CABINET BACK PANEL.
PASE 21
r5-.s-3
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CASINET continued
2) FOR 4 PHASE CONTROLLERS IN'4 PHASE CABINET FRAMES, LOAD
SWITCH BASES SHALL BE MOUNTED FOR 4 VEHICLE PHASES, 2
PEDESTRIAN PHASES AND 2 OVERLAPS.
PHASE LOAD SWITCH FUNCTION
1 1 MAIN STREET LEFT
2 2 MAIN STREET THROUGH
3 :5 SIDE STREET LEFT
4 4 SIDE STREET THROUGH
2 5 PHASE 2 CONCURRENT PED
4 b PHASE 4 CONCURRENT PED
OLC 7 OVERLAP C
OLD B OVERLAP D
3) FOR 8 PHASE CONTROLLERS IN B PHASE CABINET FRAMES, LOAD
SWITCH BASES SHALL BE MOUNTED FOR B VEHICULAR PHASES, 4
PEDESTRIAN PHASES/OVERLAPS.
QUAD LEFT PHASING
PHASE LOAD SWITCH FUNCTION
1 1 MAIN STREET LEFT
2 2 MAIN STREET THROUGH
3 3 SIDE STREET LEFT
4 4 SIDE STREET THROUGH
5 5 MAIN STREET LEFT
b b MAIN STREET THROUGH
7 7 SIDE STREET LEFT
B B SIDE STREET THROUGH
2 9 PHASE 2 CONCURRENT PED.
4 10 PHASE 4 CONCURRENT PED.
b 11 PHASE b CONCURRENT P~D.
8 12 PHASE B CONCURRENT PED.
d. A NEUTRAL BUS WIT- A MINIMUM OF 4 BLANK SPACES FOR,
ADDITIONAL FUTURE WIF.1NG. THE COMMON BUS SHALL BE Ju~oERED
TO THE NEUTRAL BUS USING A NO.6 AWG COPPER WIRE, MIN~UM.
e. PROGRAMMING OF UNUSED REDS FOR MONITOR OPERATION SHALL BE
BY A REMOVABLE PIN 1 TO 3 JUMPER PLACED IN EACH LOAD SWITCH
SOCKET FROM THE FRONT OR BY OTHER MEANS APPROVED BY GA DOT.
JUMPERS SHALL BE ONE PIECE, INSULATED UNITS, WHICH CAN BE
INSTALLED WITHOUT INSTALLER COMING INTO CONTACT WITH POWER.
f . A M I N I MUM OF TWO DETECTOR TERM I NALS PER PHASE SHALL BE
PROV I DED. EACH DETECTOR TERM I NAL SHALL CONS I ST OF 3
POSITIONS FOR SPADE CONNECTION, ONE. OF WHICH SHALL BE
CHASS I S GROUND. A S I DE PANEL FOR DETECTOR TERM I NALS IS
REQUIRED. THIS SIDE PANEL SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE SPACE FOR
ATTACHMENT OF SPADE CONNECTORS FROM FIELD LOOP LEADS SUCH
THAT CONNECTION OF ONE SET OF FIELD LEADS DOES NOT RESTRICT
ACCESS TO OTHER TERMINALS. THIS PANEL SHALL ALSO PROVIDE
SUFF I C I ENT ROOM FOR LABEL I NG OR OTHERW I SE DES I GNAT I NG
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS BY LOOP NUMBER OR PHASE.
'AS[ 22
-rs- S-rr
,I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
g. THE FOLLOWING TEST SWITCHES SHALL BE PROVIDED AT A MINIMUM:
(lONE VEHICLE DETECT PER PHASE.
(2 ONE PEDESTRIAN DETECT PER PHASE (MINIMUM OF 4).
(3 ONE PREEMPTION TEST SWITCH.
THE VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN DETECT SWI.TCHES SHALL BE
MOUNTED ON THE INSIDE OF THE CABINET DOOR. THE PREEMPT
TEST SWITCH SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE PREEMPT PANEL.
h. TERMINALS FOR ALL REQUIRED AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND
TERMINALS FnR ALL SPECIAL CIRCUITS WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED TO
PROVIDE THE OPERATIONS SHOWN ON THE ASSOCIATED SIGNAL
INSTALL~TION(S) PLAN(S).
i. HARNESSES PROVIDED FOR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT SHALL BE A
MINIMUM OF 6 FT. IN LENGTH TO ALLOW FOR EASY INSTALLATION,
INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, AND REPLACEMENT.
3. THE CONTROLLER AUX I L I ARY EQU I PMENT, SHELVES, AND TERM I NALS
SHALL BE SO ARRANGED WITHIN THE CABINET THAT THEY WILL NOT
INTERFERE WITH THE ENTRANCE AND CONNECTION OF INCOMING
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.
4. ALL FIELD TERMINALS SHALL BE SUITABLY IDENTIFIED.
5. THE OUTGOING TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUITS SHALL BE OF THE
SAME POLARITY AS THE LINE SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY; THE
COMMON RETURN OF THE SIGNAL C I RCU I T SHALL BE OF THE SAME
POLARITY AS THE GROUND SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY.
6. THE GROUND SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY SHALL BE GROUNDED TO THE
CONTROLLER CABINET GROUND BUSS IN AN APPROVED MANNER.
7. A JACK MOUNTED FLASHER RATED AT NOT LESS THAN 20 AMPERES
SHALL BE SUPPLIED. THE FLASHER SHALL FLASH AT A RATE OF 50
TO 60 FLASHES PER MINUTE. A SOLID STATE FLASHER SHALL BE
USED. A REMOTE FLASHER SW I TCH AND UN I FORM CODE FLASH
PROVISIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO CHANGE
THE FLASH SEQUENCE WITHOUT PERFORMING ANY MODIFICATIONS ON
THE BACK S I DE OF THE CAB I NET BACK PANEL. ALL CAB I NETS
FURNISHED SHALL I NCLUDE SUFFICIENT FLASH CHANGE RELAYS FOR
ALL POSSIBLE FLASH SEQUENCES.
B. SURGE PROTECTION FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE
SUPPLIED WITH ALL CONTROLLER CABINETS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST.
ALL LIGHTNING PROTECTION WIRING SHALL BE KEPT AS SHORT AND
STRAIGHT AS' PRACTICAL WITH NO SHARP BENDS. LOGIC GROUND
SHALL BE SEPARATE FROM POWER GROUND. THIS SURGE PROTECTION
SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, AS A MINIMUM.
PASt 23
7$ -55
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
a. 'EACH CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL BE F:JRNISHED WITH A SURGE
PROTECTOR ON THE AC SERVICE INPUT v.....ICH MEETS OR EXCEEDS
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
1. MAXIMUM AC LINE VOLTAGE: 140 VAC..
2. TWENTY PULSES OF PEAK CURRENT, EACH OF WHICH WILL RISE
IN B MICROSECONDS AND FALL IN 20 MICROSECONDS TO ONE-
HALF THE PEAK: 20,000 AMPERES.
3. THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE FOLLOWING
TERMINALS:
4. MAIN LINE (AC LINE FIRST STAGE TERMINAL).
s. MAIN NEUTRAL (AC NEUTRAL INPUT TERMINALS.
6. EQU I PMENT LINE OUT (AC LINE SECOND STAGE OUTPUT
TERMINAL, 10 AMPS.).
7. EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT (NEUTRAL TERMINAL TO PROTECTED
EQUIPMENT).
B. GND (EARTH CONNECTION).
9. THE MAIN AC LINE IN AND THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT
TERMINALS SHALL BE SEPARATED BY A 200 MICROHENRIE
(MINIMUM) INDUCTOR RATED TO HANDLE 10 AMP AC SERVICE.
10. THE FIRST STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN MAIN LINE AND
GROUND TERMINALS.
11. THE SECOND STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT
LINE OUT AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL.
12. THE PROTECTOR FOR THE FIRST AND SECOND STAGE CLAMP MUST
HAVE A MOV OR SIMILAR SOLID STATE DEVICE RATED AT 20 KA
AND BE OF A :OMPLETELY SOLID STAGE DESIGN (I.E. NO GAS
DISCHARGE TUBES ALLOWED).
13. THE MAIN NEUTRAL AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT SHALL BE
CONNECTED TOGETYER I NTERNALL Y AND SHALL HAVE AN MOV
SIMILAR SOLID 57ATE DEVICE OR GAS DISCHARGE TUBES RATED
AT 20 KA BETWEEN MAIN NEUTRAL AND GROUND TERMINALS .
14. PEAK CLAMP VOLTAGE: 250 VOLTS AT 20 KA. (VOLTAGE
MEASURED BETWEEN EQU I PMENT L J NE OUT AND EQU I PMENT
NEUTRAL OUT TERM I NALS. CURRENT. .APPL I ED BETWEEN MA I N
LINE AND GROUND TERMINALS WITH GROUND AND MAIN NEUTRAL
TERMINALS EXTERNALLY TIED TOGETHER).
15. VOLTAGE SHALL NEVER EXCEED 2S0 VOLTS DURING SURGE.
16. THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE EPOXY ENCAPSULATED I N A FLAME
RETARDANT .MATERIAL.
PA6E 24
-rs-s~
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
17. CONTINUOUS SERVICE CURRENT; 10 AMPS AT 120 VAC RMS.
lB. THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT SHALL PROVIDE POWER TO TH~
TYPE 170 AND TO THE 24V POWER SUPPLY.
b. EACH, AC INTERCONNECT. LINE, AS I TENTERS. THE CAB I NET ~HALL
BE FURNISHED 'WITH A SURGE PROTECTION, DEVICE THAT MEETS OR
EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
1. 'THE UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF WITHSTANDING 10,000 AMPERE
8 ~ 20 MICROSECOND STANDARD WAVEFORM SURGES (MINIMUM OF
25) .
2. THE UN I T RESPONSE T I ME SHALL BE LESS THAN 400
NANOSECONDS AT 10KV/u5 RISE.
3. THE UNIT DISCHARGE VOLTAGE SHALL BE UNDER 200 VOLTS AT
1000 AMPS.
4. THE UNIT SHALL OPERATE ON A LINE VOLTAGE OF 120 VAC RMS
SINGLE PHASE.
5. THE UNIT MUST BE EPOXY ENCAPSULATED IN FLAME RETARDANT
MATERIAL.
b. THE UNIT SHALL HAVE A MOUNTING PLATE FOR EASY REMOVAL
AND REPLACEMENT AND SHALL BE MOUNTED IN THE CONTROLLER
CABINET IN A NEAT WORKMANLIKE MANNER.
c. EACH LOOP DETECTOR SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH AN EXTERNAL
SURGE PROTECTOR WHICH MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING
REQUIREMENTS:
1. THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE. TWO OF WHICH
SHALL BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE SIGNAL INPUTS OF THE
DETECTOR. THE THIRD TERMINAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO
CHASSIS GROUND. TO PROTECT AGAINST COMMON MODE DAMAGE.
2. THE UNIT SHALL INSTANTLY CLAMP DIFFERENTIAL MODE SURGES
(INDUCED VOLTAGE ACROSS THE LOOP DETECTOR INPUT
TERMINALS) VIA A SEMI CONDUCTOR ARRAY. THE ARRAY SHALL
BE DESIGNED TO APPEAR AS A VERY LOW CAPACITANCE TO THE
DETECTOR.
3. THE UN I T SHALL CLAMP COMMON MODE SURGES (I NDUCED
VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE LOOP LEADS AND GROUND) VIA SOLID
STATE CLAMPING DEVICES. r
4. THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS.
5. PEAK SURGE CURRENT (SIX TIMES)
6. DIFFERENTIAL MODE 400 AMPS (BX20us)
PA&E 25
/S-!J7
PA6E 26
-rs-st?
I
I
I
I
I
.-
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
7. COMMON MODE 1000 AMPS (8X20us)
B. ESTIMATED OCCURRENCES 500 @ 200 AMPS
9. RESPONSE TIME 40 ns
10. INPUT CAPACITANCE 35 PF TYPICAL
11. TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +BS DEGREES CENTIGRADE
12. MOUNTING MUST FIT EITHER 7/16" OR q/16" TERMINAL STRIP
'SPACING
13. CLAMP VOLTAGE @ 400 AMPS
14. DIFF. MODE 30 VOLTS MAX. @1000 AMPS.
15. COMM. MODE 40 VOLTS MAX.
d. SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES (SWITCHPACKS):
1. EACH SWITCHPACK SOCKET LOCATION IN THE OUTPUT FILE
SHALL CONTAIN METAL OXIDE VARISTORS (MOV) WHICH ARE
TIED FROM THE AC POSITIVE FIELD TERMINAL TO CHASSIS
GROUND TO PROTECT SWITCHPACKS FROM SURGES OCCURRING ON
THE AC OUTPUT LINES. THESE MDVS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE
FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
2. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE SINUSOIDAL VOLTAGE
(RMS) RATING AT 50-60 HERTZ OF AT LEAST 150 VOLTS AT 25
DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
/
3. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE APPLIED DC VOLTAGE
RATING OF AT LEAST 200 VOLTS AT 25 DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
4. THE TRANSIENT ENERGY RATING SHALL BE AT LEAST 80 JOULES
~OR A SINGLE IMPULSE OF 10/1000 MICROSECOND
CURRENT WAVEFORM AT 2S DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
5. THE PEAK CURRENT RAT I NG SHALL BE 6500 AMPERES FOR A
SINGLE IMPULSE OF 8/20 MICROSECOND WAVEFORM WITH THE
RATED CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE APPLIED.
6. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM VARISTOR VOLTAGE OF 212
VOLTS AT 1. 0 MILLIA;~PERE OF DC CURRENT APPLIED FOR A
DURATION OF 20 MILLISECONDS TO S SECONDS.
7. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLAM~ING VOLTAGE OF 395
VOLTS WITH AN APPLIED B/20 MICROSECOND IMPULSE OF 100
AMPERES. '
B. THE TYPICAL CAPACITANCE AT A FREQUENCY OF 0.1 TO 1.0
MEGAHERTZ SHALL BE 1600 PICOFARADS.
:1
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEHA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
9. THE UNIT SHALL BE A TWO TERMINAL DEVICE; ONE TERMINAL
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE AC OUTPUT OF THE SIGNAL LOAD
SW I TCH ON THE OUTPUT FILE TERM I NAL S ( B,:.C KS I DE OF THE
FIELD TERM I NALS ) AND THE OTHER TERM I NAL SHALL BE
CONNECTED TO AC NEUTRAL.
e. COMMUNICATIONS INPUTS
1. EACH LOW ,VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT SHALL BE
PROTECTED AS IT ENTERS THE CABINET WITH A, SOLID STATE
SURGE PROTECTION UNIT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE
FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
2. THE UNIT SHALL BE A DUAL PAIR (FOUR WIRE) MODULE WITH A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR, DOUBLE SIDED AND GOLD
PLATED FOR RELIABILITY.
3. THE UNIT SHALL MATE WITH AND BE INSTALLED IN A TEN (10)
CIRCUIT BUCHANNAN CONNECTOR PNPCBIB OR EQUIVALENT.
4 . THE UNIT SHALL BE UTILIZED AS TWO I NDEPENDENT SIGNAL
PAIRS. THE DATA CIRCUITS SHALL PASS THROUGH THE
PROTECTION IN A SERIAL FASHION.
S. THE UN I T SHALL MEET THE FOLL OW I NG M I N I MUM
REQUIREMENTS:
6. PEAK SURGE CURRENT 10K AMPS (BX20MS, WAVESHAPE)
7. OCCURRENCES AT 2000 AMPS
SO TYPICAL
B. RESPONSE TIME
<S NANOSECONDS
q. VOLTAGE CLAMP
30
10. SERIES RESISTANCE 24 OHMS TOTAL
11. TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +B~ DEGREES CENTIGRADE
12. PRIMARY PROTECTOR THREE ELEMENT GAS TUBE 10KA, 8X20 MS,
PER SIDE
13. SECONDARY PROTECTOR SOLID STATE CLAMPS, I.SKW MINIMUM
14. THE C2 CONNECTOR OF THE 170 CONTROLLER SHALL TERMINATE
ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
15. THE COMMUNICATION FIELD WIRES FOR THIS LOCAL SITE SHALL
TERMINATE ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
16. THE GROUND TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS
GROUND.
PAS[ 77
75-59
PA6E 28
-rs - &0
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
f. LOW VOLlAGE DC INPUTS
1. EACH LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUT CHANNEL SHALL BE PROTECTED BY
AN EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE, AS IT ENTERS THE
CABINET, MEETING OR EXCEEDING THE FOLLOWING:
2. THE UNIT SHALL BE A FIVE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO TERMINALS
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE LINE SIDE OF THE LOW VOLTAGE
PAIR, TWO TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTED
SIDE OF THE LOW VOLTAGE INPUT AREA,. THE FIFTH TERMINAL
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS GROUND.
3. THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT: 2000 AMPS 8X20US WAVE SHAPE
OCCURRENCES AT PEAK CURRENT: 100 TYPICAL
RESPONSE TIME: 5 TO 30 NANOSECONDS
SHOCK: WITHSTANDS 10 FOOT DROP ONTO CONCRETE
VOLTAGE CLAMP: 30
SERIES RESISTANCE: 24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE: -20 DEGREES TO +BS DEGREES CENTIGRADE
9. THE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT SHALL CONSIST OF THE
FOLLOWING:
a. 20 AMPERE CIRCUIT BREAKER
b. ADJUSTABLE THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED FAN OR FANS MOUNTED
IN THE TOP OF THE CABINET TO OPERATE WHEN INTERNAL CABINET
TEMPERATURE RISES TO 90 DEGREES F. EXHAUST VENTILATION
SHAI,L BE PROV I DED I N THE 'FRONT UPPER OVERHANG OF THE
CAB I NET AND SHALL BE SCREENED TO PREVENT INSECT
INFESTATION.
c. A 20 WATT FLUORESCENT LIGHT WITH NONBREAKABLE PLASTIC COVER
MOUNTED IN THE TOP OF THE CABINET IN SUCH A MANNER THAT THE
EQUIPMENT SHELVES ARE ILLUMINATED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
POSSIBLE.
d. AC GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT OUTLET.
10. GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., SHALL BE
SUPPL I ED FOR ANCHOR I NG BASE MOUNT CAB I NETS TO THE
FOUNDATION.
11. THE POLE MOUNTED CAB I NET SHALL HAVE EXTERNAL MOUNT I NG
FIXTURES FOR BAND I NG CAB I NET TO STEEL OR CONCRETE POLES.
THIS FIXTURE SHALL BE REMOVABLE AND THE BOLT HOLES UTILIZED
FOR ATTACHMENT TO WOOD POLES.
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
12. EACH CABINET SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH DOCUMENTATION AS FOLLOWS
AS A MINIMUM:
&. ONE (1) EACH OPERATION MANUAL
b. ONE (1) EACH MAINTENANCE MANUAL WITH SCHEMATICS
c. THREE (3) EACH CABINET WIRING PRINTS
d. ONE (1) EACH OPERATION AND/OR MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR EACH
AUXILIARY ITEM
e. IN ADDITION, EACH SHIPMENT SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY TWO (2)
EACH ADDITIONAL COPIES OF ITEMS 12.a THROUGH,12.d AS LISTED
ABOVE.
f. THREE (3) EACH WIRING PRINTS FOR ALL MuXILIARY PANELS.
(PREEMPT, INTERCONNECT. COMMUNICATIONS. ETC.)
13. A SYSTEM MASTER (NON-CLOSED-LOOP) CABINET SHALL ADDITIONALLY BE
EQUIPPED WITH THE FOLLOWING:
.. SYSTEM CYCLE INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
b. SYSTEM SPLIT INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
c. SYSTEM OFFSET INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
d. SYSTEM FREE
e. SYSTEM FLASH
'f. MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH FOR EACH SYSTEM PATTERN (OFFSET, FREE,
FLASH, MIN. OF 5).
PA6E 29
7.5- ~/
(----- Dl ----->1
--> 1<----:-- 2"(min) OVERHANG
I
I
I
I
I
.~' I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
MINI: MUM CAB:I NET D:I MENS:I DNS (nts)
D
~'
----
----
----
----
1<------- w ------->\
I
,.,
,.,
-
HI
H2
v
v
1<---- D2 ----> \
W
EIGHT PHASE
CABINET 2B~' 20" 61.' 00.' 40"
FOUR PHASE
CABINET 19" 17" 49" 4B" 30"
NOTE 1: VENT WITH REMOVABLE FILTER FOR VENTILATION INTAKE SHALL
BE PROVIDED IN DOOR. AN EXHAUST VENT COVERED WITH
SCREEN SHALL BE LOCATED UNDER THE FRONT OVERHANG.
NOTE 2: DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE MINIMUMS. BOLT PATTERN FOR EIGHT
PHASE AND FOUR PHASE CABINETS ARE TO BE LOCATED AS
SHOWN ON THE CABINET BOLT LOCATIONS SKETCH.
pm 30
/"5 - 62.-
I
I
I
I
I-
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
CAEINET EOLT LOCATIONS
EIGHT PHASE CAE I NET (nts)
1<-----------
34-5/8"
---------->1
-0
o
- 0
o
r
CAEINET BOLT LOCATIONS
F-DUR PHASe: CAB 1: NET (nts)
(-------- 25"--------->
1<-12-1/2"->
1
o
^
.
.
12"
C\L
0- -
^
-0
6"
v v
,
o
PASE 31
^
18-1/2"
v
-r.$"- ~3
925.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM
1.0 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE
1.1 THIS SPECIFICATION DESCRIBES THE OPERATIONAL AND TECHNICAL
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR A DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING, TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM.
1.2 IN ADDITION, THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER MUST HAVE INSTALLED AT
LEAST ONE SYSTEM THAT HAS DEMONSTRATED AT LEAST SIX MONTHS
OF SATISFACTORY OPERATION. THIS OPERATIONAL PERIOD WILL
NOT BE SATISFIED B~ INSTALLATIONS WHICH ARE CURRENTLY UNDER
CONTRACT BUT HAVE NOT RECE I VED FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THE
EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH THIS AGENCY WITH THE
LOCATION OF THE SYSTEM AND THE PERSONS RESPONSIBLE, WHO
SHALL BE AVAILABLE FOR DISCUSSIONS AND/OR RECOMMENDATIONS.
FINAL DETERMINATION OF WHAT CONSTITUTES SATISFACTORY
OPERATION WILL BE MADE BY THE T.S.E.F. OFF)CE OF GA. D. O.
T. IF A SYSTEM OF THE TYPE BID DOES NOT EXIST IN THE STATE
OF GEORGIA THE T.S.E.F. OFFICE MAY, AT ITS DISCRETION, ALLOW
A SYSTEM TO BE SET UP AT THE T.S.E.F. OFFICE IN ATLANTA, GA.
TH I S SYSTEM SHALL CONS I ST OF, BUT NOT BE L I M I TED TO A
MASTER, A CENTRAL ASSEMBLY, AND A MINIMUM OF TWO LOCAL UNITS
WITH CABINETS. THIS SYSTEM SHALL OPERATE TO THE
SATISFACTION OF T.S.E.F. AT THIS LOCATION FOR UP TO TWENTY
WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO FIELD INSTALLATION.
1.3 THE SYSTEM SHALL FEATURE MI CROCOMPUTER STREET MASTER
CONTROLLERS WITH THE ABILITY TO SELECT TRAFFIC SIGNAL TIMING
PLANS RESPONSIVELY BASED ON ACTUAL TRAFFIC CONDITIONS. THE
MASTER SHALL ALSO MONITOR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND PROVIDE
FEEDBACK TO A CENTRAL FACILITY INDICATING THE SYSTEM'S
OPERATIONAL STATUS.
1.4 A CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY CONSISTING OF A CENTRAL PROCESSOR
AND PE:1IPHERAL EQUIPMENT SHALL MONITOR SYSTEM ACTIVITIEC;,
INCLUDING OPERATIONAL STATUS, ERROR AND MALFUNCTION
DETECTION AND DETECTOR DATA. THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL
PROVIDE FOR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE ON-STREET MASTER
AND ALL LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS TO ALLOW MANUAL
PATTERN SELECTION, UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING OF ALL DATA
BASES. ADDITIONALLY, THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL BE ABLE TO
OPERATE OFF-LINE TO ALLOW GENERATION OF CONTROLLER DATA BASE
FILES AS WELL AS ENGINEERING ANALYS~S. THE CENTRAL OFFICE
FACILITY SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING THE OPERATIONAL DATA
OF THE MASTER AND THE LOCALS I N A MENU TYPE ARRANGEMENT.
THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL HAVE THE ABILITY TO
COMPARE CURRENT UPLOADED FIELD DATA WITH STORED DATA. THE
CENTRAL OFF I CE FAC I L I TY SHALL H~VE THE. CAPAB I L I TV OF
DISPLAYING SYSTEM OPERATIONAL INFORMATION, SUCH AS CURRENT
PATTERN IN EFFECT, IN A REAL TIME DISPLAY.
A GRAPHIC SYSTEM MAP WITH REAL TIME DISPLAY.
PA6E 32
75- 6?-
I
I
I
I
I
','
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM continued
1.5 THE SYSTEM SHALL ALSO PROVIDE BACKUP CAPABILITIES T.B.C.
WHICH ALLOW THE CONTINUATION OF A SATISFACTORY LEVEL OF
SIGNAL SYSTEM OPERATION SHOULD EITHER CENTRAL COMPUTER,
MASTER CONTROLLER, OR COMMUNICATIONS LINK FAILURE OCCUR.
l.c THE PRINCIPAL SYSTEM ELEMENTS INCLUDE:
1.6.1 LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY INCLUDING
DETECTORS, COORDINATOR, TRANSCEIVER,ANDBACKUP FEATURES
l.c.2 ON-STREET MASTER CONTROLLERS WITH COMMUNICATIONS LINK
1.6.3 CENTRAL MONITORING AND DATA BASE MANAGEMENT FACILITY
1.7 THE SYSTEM SHALL FEATURE "BUILDING BLOCK" DESIGN THAT
ENABLES FUTURE SYSTEM EXPANSION TO ITS MAXIMUM CAPACITY
WITHOUT MAJOR MODIFICATIONS TO THE CENTRAL FACILITY.
ADD I T I ONALL Y, THE SYSTEM SHALL -BE STRUCTURED TO ALLOW
COORDINATED FLOW BETWEEN CROSSING ARTERIAL SYSTEMS~ PRIMARY
SYSTEM OBJECTIVES ARE SUMMARIZED AS FOLLOWS:
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM OPERATION MONITORING
MODIFICATION OF TIMING VALUES FROM A SINGLE SITE
FLEXIBILITY IN SYSTEM MODE OF OPERATION (TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE, TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK, OR MANUAL)
STAGED IMPLEMENTATION CAPABILITY
MULTILEVEL CENTRAL OPERATION
EXTENSIVE SYSTEM BACKUP
RELIABLE AND HIGHLY MAINTAINABLE SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.8 THE COMPLETE SYSTEM, I NCLUD I NG ALL LOCAL CONTROLLERS,
CABINETS, STREET MASTER CONTROLLER, AND CENTRAL MONITORING
STATION SHALL BE ASSEMBLED AND INTERCONNECTED AT THE POINT
OF MANUFACTURE UNLESS EQUIPMENT IS PURCHASED FOR STOCK AND
THIS REQUIREMENT WAVERED IN WRITING BY THE DEPARTMENT.
1 . 9 THE SYSTEM SHALL BE COMPLETEL Y PERFORMANCE TESTED AND A,
WRITTEN TEST ~EPORT SUBMITTED TO THE DEPARTMENT FOR APPROVAL
PR I OR TO SH I PMENT OF SUCH EQU-I PMENT . I N ~DD I T I ON, THE
DEPARTMENT RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AN ON SITE SYSTEM
INSPECTION AT THE POINT OF MANUFACTURE TO WITNESS THE SYSTEM
OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE TEST OF THE SYSTEM.
'.sr n
75 - ~5
PAGE 34
7S-~~
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM. continued
2.1 LOCAL iNTERSECTION CONTROLLERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT.
THE LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROL ASSEMBLY SHALL CONSIST OF THE
FOLLOWING PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS:
LOCAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER AND "AUTO-DIAL" MODEM AS REQUIRED
COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT
LOCAL AND SYSTEM LOOP DETECTOR UNITS
CABINET ASSEMBLY
NEf1A MONITOR
2.2 GENERAL:' LOCAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER. THE LOCAL TRAFFIC
SIGNAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROV I DE FOR
INTEGRAL COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEI:.:ER, COORDINATOR AND BACKUP
UNIT, AND PREEMPTOR (WHERE REQUIRED). THE CONTROLLER SHALL
HAVE A MINIMUM YELLOW CLEARANCE OF 3 SECONDS. THIS SHALL BE
'BURNED' INTO THE PROM, THUS THERE SHOULD BE NO POSSIBILITY
OF EVER HAVING LESS THAN 3 SECONDS OF YELLOW CLEARANCE. THE
CONTROLLER CONSTRUCTION SHALL HAVE A DESIGN LIFE OF
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS IN THE CIRCUIT OF NOT LESS THAN FIVE
(5) YEARS UNDER 24 HOURS PER DAY OPERATION.
2.3 TRANSCEIVER:
EACH LOCAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER WHICH WILL ALLOW THE RECEPTION OF
SYSTEM MASTER COMMANDS AND WILL ALLOW TRANSMISSION OF LOCAL
I NTERSECT I ON STATUS DATA, DATA BASE, AND SYSTEM DETECTOR
DATA TO THE MASTER.
2.3.1 AS A MINI~UM, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS SHALL BE MONITORED
AND THE STATUS OF EACH FUNCTION SHALL BE TRANSMITTED Tb
THE STREET MASTER:
LOCAL COORDINATOR OPERATIONAL STATUS
CONFLICT FLASH STATUS
MANUAL FLASH STATUS
PREEMC- STATUS
SYSTE DETECTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF,EIGHT PER INTERSECTION)
CAPABLE OF DESCRIBING VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY
LOCAL DETECTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF ONE PER PHASE)
FREE MODE
DOOR OPEN
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-"~..
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
2.3.2 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL RECEIVE COMMAND DATA
-FROM THE SYSTEM MASTER- AND SHALL CONVEY SUCH DATA TO THE
LOCAL'CONTROLLER. THIS DATA SHALL INCLUDE, AS A MINIMUM,
THE FOLLOWING:
CYCLE, SPLIT, ;ANDOFFSET COMMANDS
SPECIAL FUNCTION COMMANDS (MINIMUM OF ONE)
COORDINATED OR FREE MODE DATA
A DAILY SYSTEM WIDE SYNC (MANDATORY FOR ASSURING CLOCK
SYNC FOR BACKUP OPERATION)
REQUEST FOR LOCAL DATA RESPONSE
2.3.3 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL ALLOW
DOWNLOADING/UPLOADING OF THE ENTIRE LOCAL INTERSECTION
(CONTROLLER TIME BASED BACKUP, COORDINATION) DATA BASE
FROM/TO DISK STORAGE AT THE CENTRAL FACILITY.
2.3.4 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE MODULAR IN DESIGN
AND SHALL CONTAIN ITS OWN CONNECTOR AND CONNECTING CABLE.
THE CONNECTOR SHALL BE UN I QUE AND SHALL NOT INTERCHANGE
WITH ANY OTHER CONNECTOR IN THE LOCAL CONTROLLER CABINET.
AS A MINIMUM, THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL PROVIDE
THE FOLLOWING FEATURES:
TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING/FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
TECHNIQUES
HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS OVER ONE PAIR OF WIRES OR FULL
DUPLE X COMMUN I CA T IONS OVER TWO PA I R OF W I RES, STANDARD
BELL 3002, OR DEDICATED CABLE
PAR I TY AND ERROR CHEC KING D I AGNOST I CS TO ASSURE
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION OF VALID DATA AT 1200 BAUD
APPROPRIATE INDICATORS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
TRANSMITTING AND CARRIER RECEPTION
LOCAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT VIA KEYBOARD -
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT LEVEL ADJUSTABLE TO A MAXIMUM OF +3 DB
TRANSMITTER FREQUENCY STABILITY OF +/- 5 HZ SHALL BE
MAINTAINED OVER THE NEMA OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
RECEIVER IN-BAND SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO OF +10 DB OR
GREATER
RECEIVER INPUT COMMON MODE REJECTION OF GREATER THAN 40 DB
PA6f 35
-r.$'-~'7
PAGE 36
TS-~,f
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
925.05.2.4 LOCAL COORDINATOR
2.4.1 COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT GENERAL:
THE LOCAL COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT SHALL PROVIDE THE
CAPABILITY TO STORE AND IMPLEMENT COORDINAT'ION PATTERNS
THAT ARE COMMANDED FROM A MASTER CONTROLLER. IN ADDITION,
IT SHALL STORE AND IMPLEMENT A COMPLETE SET OF STANDBY
(T. O. D.) PROGRAMS I N THE EVENT OF A MASTER OR
COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE.
2.4.2 COORDINATOR OPERATION:
THE COORD I NATOR SHALL PROV I DE THE FOLLOW I NG M I N I MUM
REQUIREMENTS:
CYCLES: FOUR
OFFSETS PER CYCLE: THREE
SPLITS PER CYCLE: THREE
FORCE OFF SETTINGS PER SPLIT PLAN: FIVE OR A SUFFICIENT
NUMBER TO TERMINATE THE GREEN OR WALK HOLD FOR ALL NON-
COORDINATED PHASES
OFFSET CORRECTION BY DWELL, SMOOTH TRANSITION, OR ADD ONLY
SMOOTH TRANSITION
VARIABLE PERMISSIVE PERIOD FOR ALL NONCOORDINATED PHASES
OR AUTOMAT I C PERM I 5S I VE PER I ODS BASED ON CONTROLLER
SETTINGS
REMOTE MUTCD FLASH AND FREE MODE
LOCAL SPLIT SELECTION FROM QUE:.JE DETECTOR TO INITIATE A
SPLIT PLAN TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL GREEN TIME FOR THE
APPROACH
2.4.3 BACKUP OPERATION:
THE BACKUP UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF ACCEPTING SYSTEM SYNC
COMMANDS FROM THE MASTER AND ASSURE SYNCHRON I Z AT I ON OF
LOCAL CLOCKS. THE COORDINATOR AND BACKuP UNIT SHALL BE
MODULAR IN DESIGN AND SHALL BE INTERNAL TO THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER. THE BACKUP OPERATION SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE
SET OF PROGRAMS THAT MEET THE FOLLOW I NG M I N I MUM
REQUIREMENTS:
30 PROGRAMS OF ANY NUMBER OF STEPS
ONE WEEKLY SEQUENCE OF 7 DAY PROGRAMS
ONE SEASONAL WEEKLY SEQUENCE OF 7 DAY PROGRAMS TO OVERRIDE
WEEKLY SEQUENCE
'I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
50 DAY OF YEAR ENTRIES TO SELECT A PROGRAM FOR PERENNIAL
OR ONE TIME OPERATION
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME ADJUSTMENT
LEAP YEAR ADJUSTMENT
TIMING ACCURACY: WITH PRIMARY POWER - APPLIED, ACCURACY OF
LINE FREQUENCY; WITH PRIMARY POWER REMOVED, BETTER THAN 25
PPM
2.5 LOCAL AND SYSTEM LOOP DETECTOR CHANNELS:
THE LOCAL SYSTEM SUPERVISOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF MONITORING A
MINIMUM OF B SYSTEM LOOPS AT THE LOCAL INTERSECTION AND
REPORTING THE DETECTOR INFORMATION TO THE SYSTEM MASTER.
2.6 LOCAL CONTROLLER MONITORING:
THE LOCAL COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT SHALL PROVIDE ALL THE
CAPABILITIES OF A CLOSED LOOP LOCAL UNIT. THE INCLUSION OF
LOCAL SYSTEM SUPERVISOR IN A CONTROLLER UNIT SHALL PROVIDE
SYSTEM CAPABILITY AS DESCRIBED ABOVE. IN ADDITION, IT SHALL
PROVIDE ISOLATED MONITORING CAPABILITY OF CONTROLLER UNITS
WITHOUT THE USE OF A MASTER. THE LOCAL SYSTEM SUPERVISOR
SUPPLIED SHALL BE CAPABLE OF EITHER TYPE OPERATION WITHOUT
HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE MODIFICATION. TELEPHONE NUMBER ENTRY
AND/OR CHANGE SHALL BE ACCOMPL I SHED - BY KEYBOARD ENTRY
WITHOUT REMOVAL OF ANY MODULE, PROM, ETC. ISOLATED
MONITORING SHALL INCLUDE, AT A MINIMUM, THE FOLLOWING ITEMS.
TRANSMISSION OF LOCAL INTERSECTION STATUS DATA, DATA- BASE,
AND DETECTOR DATA TO THE CENTRAL ASSEMBLY.
CONFLICT FLASH STATUS
MANUAL FLASH STATUS
PREEMPT STATUS
LOCAL DETECTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF ONE PER PHASE)
DOOR OPEN
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL ALLOW DOWNLOADINGI
UPLOADING OF THE ENTIRE LOCAL INTERSECTION (CONTROLLER TIME
BASED BACKUP, COORDINATION AND ALL LOCAL INTERSECTION TIMING
PARAMETERS) DATA BASE FROM/TO DISK STORAGE AT THE CENTRAL
FACILITY.
PAGE 37
-rS-C9
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER
3 . 0 GENERAL: THE STREET MASTER CONTROLLER SHALL BE A STREET
LOCATED MICROCOMPUTER WHICH WILL GENERATE SYSTEM PATTERN
COMMANDS TO LOCAL I NTERSECT I ON CONTROLLERS WITH I NITS
CONTROL AREA IN RESPONSE TO PREVAILING TRAFFIC CONDITIONS AS
INDICATED BY SAMPLING SENSORS STRATEGICALLY PLACED IN THE
CONTROL AREA. ADD I T I ONALL Y , THE MASTER SHALL MON I TOR THE
OPERATION OF LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS, LOCAL AND
SYSTEM DETECTORS, AND SHALL INITIATE FAILURE -REPORTS IF
MALFUNCTIONS OCCUR.
3.1 OPERATING MODES: THE MASTER CONTROLLER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
OPERATING IN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING MODES:
A. TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE: PATTERN SELECTION BASED ON DYNAMIC
TRAFFIC CONDITIONS AS MEASURED BY SYSTEM DETECTORS
LOCATED IN THE SYSTEM AREA.
B. TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK: PREPROGRAMMED SELECTION OF
PATTERNS BASED ON TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK/DAY OF YEAR
WITH AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT FOR SEASONAL CHANGES.
C. MANUAL: PATTERN SELECTION, INCLUDING SYSTEM FREE.
BASED ON OPERATOR COMMAND.
D. CONTROL AREA: MINIMUM BASIC CONTROL AREA CAPACITY SHALL
BE AS FOLLOWS:
INTERSECTIONS: 24
SYSTEM DETECTORS: MINIMUM OF 8 PER INTERSECTION AND THE
CAPABILITY OF OPERATING A MINIMUM OF 16 THROUGHOUT THE
SYSTEM AT ANY GIVEN TIME.
PLANS: 36 M I N I MUM: EACH PLAN SHALL CONS I ST OF A
COMB I NAT I ON OF CYCLE, OFFSET, SPL IT, AND SPEC I AL
FUNCT I ON COMMANDS. ADD I T I ONALL Y , THE MASTER SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF . DIRECT I NG SYSTEM FREE OR FLASH OPERAT I ON.
PLANS SHALL BE SELECTABLE FROM THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM
PARAMETER RANGES.
CYCLES: MINIMUM OF FOUR
OFFSETS: MINIMUM OF THREE
SPLITS: MINIMUM OF THREE
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS: MINIMUM OF ONE
PASE 38
-rS-70
I
I
I
I
I
'.' I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I-
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
., ;.,.1.
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER continued
3.2 BASIC FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2.1 TRAFF I C RESPONS I VE OPERAT I ON: PREFERENT I AL AND/OR
HIERARCHICAL TRANSFER OF PATTERNS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED
VIA PROGRA~MABLE USER SPECIFIED THRESHOLD VALUES.
ADD I T I ONALL Y, RESPONS I VE SPL I T SELECT I ON FOR NON ARTER I AL
PHASES OF INDIVIDUAL INTERSECTIONS MAY BE BASED ON QUEUE
LENGTH, AS INDICATED BY DES I GNATEDQUEUE DETECTORS.
PATTERN SELECTION DURING ~RAFFIC RESPONSIVE OPERATION
SHALL BE BASED ON USER SELECTABLE VOLUME, OCCUPANCY, OR
CONCENTRAT I ON DATA OBTA I NED FROM SYSTEM DETECTORS TO
COMPUTE THE FOLLOWING TRAFFIC FUNCTIONS:
LEVEL OF ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
DIRECTIONALITY OF ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
RATIO OF A SET OF DETECTORS TO A SECOND SEt OF DETECTORS
FOR SPLIT SELECTION
RATIO OF SIDE STREET TO ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
3.3 TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK OPERATION:
IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO SELECT ANY SYSTEM PATTERN FROM THE
MASTER ON A PREPROGRAMMED TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK BASIS WITH
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT FOR SEASONAL CHANGES. IN ADDITION, IT
SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO SPECIFY THE FOLLOWING _ON A TIME OF
DAY/DAY OF WEEK BASIS:
SPECIAL FUNCTION SYSTEM COMMANDS (MINIMUM OF ONE)
CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION
TRAFFIC RESPONSiVE COMPUTATION PERIOD
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORT INTERVAL
3.4 SYSTEM DETECTOR PROCESSING:
SYSTEM DETECTOR DATA SHALL FORM THE BASIS FOR ALL TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE PLANS INITIATED AT THE MASTER. SYSTEM DETECTORS_
SHALL PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM FEATURES OR OPERATION:
A. SYSTEM DETECTORS SHALL PROVIDE VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY DATA
TO THE MASTER CONTROLLER.
B. EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SELECTIVE
WEIGHTING.
C. SYSTEM DETECTOR DATA SHALL BE FILTERED ON A MOVING
BASIS, UTILIZING A USER PROGRAMMABLE FACTOR.
D. SYSTEM DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS
PA6E 3"
7S-7/
925.05.3 CLO~ED LOOP ON-STREET "ASTER cDnt~nued
E. EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR SHALL BE MONITORED FOR CONSTANT
CALLS, ABSENCE OF CALLS, OR ERRATIC OUTPUT.
F . D I AGNOST I C VALUES SHALL BE USER PROGRAMMABLE FOR ALL
DETECTORS ON A - SYSTEM BASIS AND DIAGNOSTIC VALUES FOR
CONSTANT CALLS AND ABSENCE OF CALLS SHALL BE USER
PROGRAMMABLE FOR EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR.
G. DIAGNOSTICS FOR ABSENCE OF CALLS SHALL BE ELIMINATED
BASED ON A USER PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD.
H. SYSTEM DETECTORS WHICH FAIL THE DIAGNOSTIC TEST SHALL BE
AUTOMAT I CALLY DELETED FOR VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY
CALCULATIONS AND THE EVENT OF FAILURE OCCURRENCE SHALL
BE STORED FOR FAILURE REPORTING. UPON RESUMPTION OF
SATISFACTORY OPERATION, DETECTORS SHALL AUTOMATICALLY
RESUME I NPUT TO VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY CALCULAT IONS AND
THE DETECTOR SHALL BE REPORTED ON-LINE.
I. A USER PROGRAMMABLE NUMBER OF SYSTEM DETECTORS MUST
MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL STATUS IN ORDER THAT THE OUTPUT OF
A DETECTOR GROUP BE USED FOR TRAFF I C RESPONS I VE PLAN
SELECTION.
J. SYSTEM DETECTORS SHALL BE ASSIGNABLE TO DETECTOR GROUPS
FOR PURPOSES OF COMPUT I NG TRAFF I C FUNCT IONS BASED ON
HIGHEST, SECOND HIGHEST, AND AVERAGE VALUES OF VOLUME,
OCCUPANCY, AND CONCENTRATION.
K. A USER PROGRAMMABLE M I N I MUM NUMBER OF OPERAT I ONAL
DETECTORS SHALL BE REQUIRED FOR DETECTOR GROUP DATA TO
BE VALID.
L. DETECTOR GROUP OUTPUTS SHALL BE ASS I GNABLE TO ANY
APPROPRIATE TRAFFIC FUNCTION COMPJlTATION.
M. IF THERE ARE NO OPERATIONAL DETECTOR GROUPS ASSIGNED TO
A TRAFFIC FUNCTION, THE MASTER MUST REVERT TO THE TIME
OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK OPERATIONAL MODE.
3.5 PATTERN CHANGE METHODOLOGY
A. PREFERENTIAL/HIERARCHICAL TRANSFER OF PATTERNS SHALL
INCLUDE HYSTERESIS SAFEGUARDS TO AVOID "SEEKING"
PHENOMENON.
.
B. PATTERN CHANGES FOR EACH INTERSECTION IN THE SYSTEM
SHALL BE IMPLEMENTED SMOOTHLY WITH DUE REGARD FOR
MAINTENANCE OF MINIMUM VALUES.
C. PATTERN CHANGES SHALL BE CAPABLE OF BE I NG IMPLEMENTED
USING DWELL, SHORTEST PATH SMOOTH TRANSITION, OR ADD
ONLY SMOOTH TRANSITION.
PAGE 40
-rs -72-
I
I
I
I
I
"I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER continued
3.6 CROSSING ARTERY CONTROL:
PROVISION SHALL BE MADE FOR CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION
OF COORDINATED TRAFFIC FLOW THROUGH THE COMMON INTERSECTION
OF BOTH SYSTEMS WHEN ENABLED BY THE TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK
SCHEDULE OR ,WHEN ESTABLISHED PARAMETERS ARE REACHED IN THE
T.RAFF I C RESPONS I VE MODE OF _ OPERAT I ON. THE CROSS
COORDINATION SHALL OCCUR BY IMPLEM~NTATION OF COMMON CYCLE
LENGTHS BY TH~ MASTER CONTROLLERS. WHEN IN THE TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE MODE, THE CYCLE LENGTH TO BE IMPLEMENTED SHALL BE
THE HIGHEST CYCLE CURRENTLY BEING CALLED FOR BY EITHER
MASTER. CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION SHALL BE IN EFFECT
AS LONG AS THE TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK PLAN REQUIRES SUCH
SYNCHRONIZATION OR WHILE USER ESTABLISHED PARAMETERS ARE MET
IN THE TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MODE OF DPERATION. WHEN
SYNCHRONI ZATION OCCURS THERE SHALL BE A _ USER PROGRAMMABLE
MINIMUM PERIOD OF 0 TO 30 CYCLES.
3.7 LOCAL CONTROLLER MONITORING:
THE MASTER SHALL MONITOR EACH OF THE LOCAL CONTROLLERS.
ACTUAL CLOCK TIME FOR EACH LOCAL CONTROLLER WILL BE CHECKED
AT LEAST ONCE EVERY 15 MINUTES (MINIMUM). IF THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER CLOCK TIME IS FOUND TO BE INCORRECT, THE MASTER
CONTROLLER WILL DOWNLOAD CORRECT, CURRENT CLOCK TIME AND LOG
AN APPROPRIATE FAILURE MESSAGE ON THE SYSTEM FAILURE REPORT.
3.8 LOCAL DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS:
EACH LOCAL DETECTOR SHALL BE MONITORED FOR CONSTANT CALLS
AND ABSENCE OF CALLS. -DIAGNOSTIC VALUES SHALL BE THE SAME AS
THOSE SPECIFIED ON A SYSTEM BASIS FOR SYSTEM DETECTORS. THE
EVENT OF _LOCAL DETECTOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST FAILURE AND
SUBSE~UENT RECOVERY SHALL BE STORED FOR REPORTING.
3.9 STORAGE OF REPORT DATA:
THE SYSTEM MASTER SHALL STORE AND FORMAT MONITORED FUNCTION
DATA FOR EITHER IMMEDIATE OUTPUT TO A CENTRAL DEVICE OR
SHALL STORE DATA FOR FUTURE OUTPUT FOR A MINIMUM STORAGE
PERIOD OF 24 HOURS. AS A MINIMUM, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE
INCLUDED,
FAILURE REPORT: TIME, PLACE, AND MODE OF ALL MONITORED
LOCAL INTERSECTION AND MASTER FAILURE CONDITIONS.
SYSTEM STATUS REPORT: CURRENT OPERATING MODE AND PATTERN
FOR LOCAL INTERSECTION AND STREET MASTER.
PAGE 41
-rs - ?5
PAGE 42
-r5-'74
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET ~STER continued
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORT(S): VOLUM~ AND OCCUPANCY
DATA FROM ANY OF THE SYSTEM DETECTORS, TABULATED BY lS
MINUTE INTERVALS FOR. A 24 HOUR PERIOD. SIMULTANEOUS
DETECTOR REPORT SHALL BE LIMITED TO A MINIMUM OF EIGHT
DETECTORS PER 24 HOUR PERIOD. IT _SHALL ALSO BE POSSIBLE TO
PROVIDE A REPORT FOR 32 DETECTORS PER 6 HOUR PERIOD OR ANY
COMBINATION THEREOF. SPEED REPORT DATA CONSISTING OF NUMBER
OF VEHICLES IN THREE.SPEED BANDS RELATED TO NOMINAL
PROGRESSION SPEED FROM ANY OF THE SPEED DETECTORS, TABULATED
BY 15 MINUTE INTERVALS FOR A 24 HOUR PERIOD. SIMULTANEOUS
SPEED REPORT SHALL BE LIMITED TO A MINIMUM OF FOUR DETECTORS
PER 24 HOUR PERIOD AND EIGHT DETECTORS PER 6 OR 12 HOUR
PERIOD. IT SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE FOR SPEED DATA TO RESTRICT
THE NUMBER OF SYSTEM DETECTORS REPORTING EXCEPT THAT ALL
SYSTEM AND SPEED DETECTORS CAN BE SCHEDULED SIMULTANEOUSLY
ON A 6 HOUR REPORTING PERIOD.
3.10 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
DATA ENTRY: DATA ENTRY MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED AT THE MASTER
VIA AN INCLUDED KEYBOARD.
DATA DOWNLOADING: MEANS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE
DOWNLOADING OF LOCAL INTERSECTION TIMING PATTERN DATA FROM
THE MASTER SITE AS WELL AS FROM THE CENTRAL FACILITY.
NEMA STANDARDS: THE MASTER SHALL MEET ALL PROV I S IONS OF
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS AS RELATED TO ENVIRONMENTAL AND
TESTING REQUIREMENTS.
3.11 CABINET
A. THE MASTER MAY BE HOUSED IN LOCAL CONTROLLER CABINET OF
ADEQUATE SIZE OR f"lAY BE HOUSED I N A SEPARATE
WEATHERPROOF ALUMINUM CABINET OF ADEQUATE CAPACITY TO
ACCOMMODATE ALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT.
B. THE CABINET SHALL BE WIRED COMPLETE WITH MASTER
CONNECTING CABLES.
C. SPECIAL ATTENTION SHALL BE GIVEN THE PROVISION OF SURGE
ARRESTORS TO GUARD AGA I NST HIGH ENERGY TRANS lENT
SURGES. AS A MINIMUM, ALL INCOMING AND G~TGOING
COMMUNICATION LINES SHALL INCLUDE SUCH PROTECTION.
3.12 DISPLAY AND INDICATION
A. THE MASTER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING INPUT VALUES
AND OUTPUT COMMANDS FOR THE PURPOSE OF OPERATOR
MONITORING.
II
.
I
11
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP-oN~STREET MASTER c~tinued
B. AS A MINIMUM, THE DISPLAYS SHALL INCLUDE:
1) PARAMETER VALUES
2) CURRENT OPERATING STATUS
3) PATTERN COMMAND STATUS
4) SYSTEM SENSOR ACTIVITY
5) CYCLE SYNC
6) OPERATIONAL STATUS OF ALL CONTROLLERS AND DETECTORS
3.13 'MASTER COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER:
THE MASTER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
WHICH WILL ENABLE TRANSMISSION OF ALL REQUIRED PATTERN AND
COMMAND DATA TO THE LOCAL INTERSECTIONS AND WILL ALLOW
RECEPTION OF STATUS AND DETECTOR DATA FROM EACH LOCATION
CONTROLLER WITHIN THE CONTROL AREA.
THE MASTER COMMUNICATIONS MODEM SHALL HAVE THE CAPACITY TO
TRANSFER AND RECEIVE DATA FROM A MINIMUM OF 24 LOCAL
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVERS.
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE ~ODULAR IN DESIGN
AND SHALL CONTAIN ITS OWN CONNECTOR AND CONNECTING CABLE.
THE CONNECTING CABLE SHALL BE UNIQUE AND SHALL NOT
INTERCHANGE WITH ANY OTHER CONNECTOR IN THE MASTER
CONTROLLER CABINET.
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE TOTALLY
fNTERCHANGEABLE WITH ITS COUNTERPART IN THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER.
THE MASTER AND ASSOCIATED COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT SHALL
PERFORM PARITY AND ERROR CHECKING DIAGNOSTICS TO ASSURE
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION OF VALID SYSTEM DATA.
THE MASTER COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL PROVIDE THE
SAME FEATURES AS SPECIFIED FOR THE LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER.
3.14 TELEPHONE
INTERFACE WITH CENTRAL FACILITY,
TWO WAY TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF DATA BETWEEN EACH
MASTER CONTROLLER AND THE CENTRAL FAC I L I TY SHALL BE
ACCOMPLISHED BY A 1200 BAUD, "AUTO-DIAL" MODEM OPERATING
OVER A STANDARD CALL UP TELEPHONE LINE. THE MODEM SHALL BE
A HAYES SMART MODEM 1200 (MIN) OR EQUAL. THE TELEPHONE
NUMBER FOR THE MASTER SHALL BE ENTERED FROM THE KEYBOARD OF
THE MASTER. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO ENTER AND/OR CHANGE THE
TELEPHONE NUMBER WITHOUT REMOVING ANY MODULES, PROMS, ETC.
PAGr . 3
-rs -75
PAGE 44
-rs- 71;
I
I
I
I
I
"'Ir
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY
4.0 GENERAL
THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL CONSIST OF A
MICROCOMPUTER WITH A COMPLETE COMPLEMENT OF PERIPHERAL AND
COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES REQUIRED BY THIS SPECIFICATION AS
WELL AS ALL REQUIRED OPERATING SOFTWARE. THE FACILITY
SHALL HAVE THE CAPACITY TO MONITOR UP TO SIXTEEN (16)
MASTER CONTROLLERS AND RELATED CONTROL AREAS. THIS SHALL
INCLUDE TWO WAY COMMUNICATIONS WITH EACH STREET MASTER
WITHIN A TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE. THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY
SHALL ALSO HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO MONITOR ISOLATED
INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS. THIS MONITORING CAPABILITY SHALL
BE POSS I BLE FROM WITH I N THE CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM SOFTWARE
SUPPLIED. THE SOFTWARE SHALL ACCOMMODATE A MINIMUM OF 24
ISOLATED CONTROLLERS. ALL DISPLAYS, DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FUNCTIONS, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD CAPABILITIES, ETC. WHICH APPLY
TO LOCAL CONTROLLERS IN A CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM SHALL ALSO BE
AVAILABLE FOR THE ISOLATED MONITORED LOCAL CONTROLLERS.
ALL INFORMATION SHALL BE PRESENTED IN THE SAME FORMAT FOR
CLOSED LOOP LOCAL INTERSECTIONS AND ISOLATED MONITORED
INTERSECTIONS.
4.1 THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM
ACTIVITIES:
STATUS AND FAILURE REPORTS STORED ON DISKETTE FOR EACH
MASTER AND LOCAL INTERSECTION
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED DETECTOR - REPORTS STORED ON
DISKETTE
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT FOR ALL CONTROLLERS
DATA UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING FOR EACH MASTER AND LOCAL
INTERSECTION CONTROL~ER
INTERSECTION GRAPHICS DISPLAY OF ACTUAL FIELD OPERATIONS.
SYSTEM MAP GRAPHICS DISPLAY OF ACTUAL FIELD OPERATIONS.
STORED TIME OF DAY GRAPHICS IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
4.2 THE MICROCOMPUTER SYSTEM SHALL HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF
PERFORMING OFF-LINE ROUTINES, INCLUDING:
TRAFFIC SIGNAL PROGRESSION ANALYSIS UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH
AS TRANSYT 7F, AAP PASSER AND TRAF-NETSIM
SIGNAL OPERATION OPTIMIZATION ANALYSIS FOR SINGLE
INTERSECTION UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH AS SOAP
I NTERSECT I ON CAPAC I TY ANAL YS I S UT I LIZ I NG PROGRAMS SUCH AS
HIGHWAY CAPACITY SOFTWARE
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP-t~NTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.3 BASIC FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
4.3.1 TELEPHONE INTERFACE: THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY
SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECEIVING AND T~ANSMITTING DATA FROM
EACH ON SITE MASTER OVER TELEPHONE LINES UTILIZING DIAL UP
TECHNIQUES. STANDARD RS232 INTERFACE SHALL BE PROVIDED.
4.3.2 AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS REPORTS: THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY
SHALL RECEIVE SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORTS AND
INTERSECTION AND MASTER CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTIC DATA FROM
EACH STREET MASTER AND SHALL RECORD, TABULATE, FORMAT AND
OUTPUT SUCH REPORTS USING THE MINIMUM METHODOLOGY
DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING:
A. FAILURE REPORTS: REPO-RTS INDICATING OPERATING
FAILURES A1 LOCAL INTERSECTIONS OR AT MASTERS SHALL BE
INITIATED BY EACH STREET MASTER AT THE TIME OF THE
FAILURE OCCURRENCE OR WITHIN A USER PROGRAMMABLE TIME
FRAME NOT TO EXCEED A MAXIMUM INTERVAL OF 2SS MINUTES
AFTER THE OCCURRENCE OF SUCH A FAILURE WHEN THE
CENTRAL FACILITY IS IN A MONITOR MODE. IF THE CENTRAL
FACILITY IS BUSY WITH ANOTHER MASTER OR IS OFF-LINE,
THE REPORT I NG MASTER SHALL REPEATEDLY ATTEMPT TO
REPORT AFTER A USER PROGRAMMABLE RETRY INTERVAL. THE
REPORT SHALL BE STORED ON DISKETTE AND OUTPUT VIA HARD
COpy OR CRT. ADDITIONALLY, FAILURE REPORTS SHALL ALSO
BE OBTAINABLE ON DEMAND BY AN OPERATOR AT THE CENTRAL
MONITORING FACILITY.
B. SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORTS: THE CENTRAL
FACILITY SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECORDING. TABULATING,
FORMATTING, AND OUTPUTTING VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY DATA
AS OBTAINED .BY EACH STREET MASTER FROM ANY OF THE
SYSTEM DETECTORS AND SPEED DETECTORS. SUCH DATA SHALL
BE OBTAINABLE ON DEMAND OR AUTOMATICALLY OUTPUT EVERY
b, 12, OR 24 HOURS. SUCH REPORTS SHALL BE OUTPUT VIA
HARD COpy OR CRT. J
C. SYSTEM STATUS REPORTS, THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL
PROV I DE OUTPUT REPORTS AS GENERATED BY EACH STREET
MASTER INDICATING CURRENT SYSTEM OPERATING STATUS
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING DATA:
CURRENT PLAN IN EFFECT
MODE OF MASTER OPERATION (TIME OF DAY, TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE, ETC.)
TIME AND DATE PLAN TOOK EFFECT
D. REPORTING REQUIREMENTS FOR SYSTEM STATUS REPORTS SHALL
BE THE SAME AS THAT SPECIFIED FOR FAILURE REPORTS.
PA6E 45
-rs - 77
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENT~AL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.3.3 INHIBITING OF SYSTEMS REPORTS: KEYBOARD TECHNIQUES SHALL
ALLOW THE INHIBITING OR'SUSPENDING OF ALL SYSTEMS' REPORTS
WHEN DESIRED BY THE USER.
4.3.4 INTERSECTION GRAPHICS DISPLAY: THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL
DISPLAY VIA CRT ACTIVE SIGNAL MOVEMENTS AND PHASE DETECTOR
ACTUATIONS DYNAMICALLY ON AN INTERSEC~ION LAYOUT FOR EACH
LOCAL INTERSECTION IN THE SYSTEM. '>~TA TO PERMIT THIS
DISPLAY SHALL BE UPLOADED ONE INTERSECTION AT A TIME FROM
THE STREET MASTER. THE SOFTWARE SHOULD PROVIDE A METHOD
OF V I EW I NG THE GREEN BANDS CURRENTLY IN OPERAT I ON, ON A
SYSTEM MAP. THE I ND I V I DUAL I NTERSECT ION D I SPLAY SHALL
HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF DISPLAYING UP TO EIGHT PHASES, FOUR
PEDESTRIAN AND FOUR OVERLAPS. THE DISPLAY SHALL INCLUDE
THE FOLLOWING:
A. PHASE GREEN(S)
B. PEDESTRIAN (W,DW)
C. YELLOW ( S )
D . RED ( S )
E. DETECTOR STATUS (CHECK)
F. OVERLAP STATUS
G. SYSTEM STATUS AND PATTERN IN EFFECT
~.3.5 AUTOMATIC DATA BASEUPLOADING/DOWNLOADING:
AUTOMATIC UPLOADING OR DOWNLOADING OF ALL STREET MASTER
AND LOCAL CONTROLLER OPERAT I NG PARAMETERS SHALL BE
ATTAINABLE FROM THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY. SUCH
DATA SHALL BE DISK RESIDENT AT THE CENTRAL FACILITY AND
SHALL BE LOADABLE INTO THE CONTROLLER, VIA COMMUNICATIONS
LINES THROUGH SIMPLE KEYBOARD PROCEDURES.
4.3.6 DATA BASE MANAGEMENT:
THE DATA BASE FOR ALL CONTROLLERS SHALL BE STORED ON
DI5Y.ETTE. DATA SHALL BE PRESENTED IN TABULAR FORM TO
FACILITATE GENERATION AND EDITING.
4.4 BASIC CENTRAL EQUIPMENT COMPLEMENT:
THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY SHALL CONSIST, OF A FULLY
DEBUGGF- SYSTEM INCLUDING A MICROCOMPUTER, PERIPHERALS,
SOFTWAR~ AND COMMUNICATIONS MODEMS AND INTERFACE TO ENABLE
TELEPHOI"~ LINK UP TO EACH STREET MASTER. ADDITIONAL
EQU I PMENT (AND RELATED SOFTWARE) SHALL BE PROV I DED AS
REQU I RED TO ACCOMPL I SH THE OVERALL SYSTEMS OPERAT I ON
DESCRIBED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
PAGE 46
-r5-7R
I
I
I
I
I
'.' I
. ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.4.1 COMPUTER
A. 1 MB OF RAM MEMORY RESIDENT ON THE MOTHER BOARD
B. ONE 40 MB HARD DISK DRIVE (C:)
C. TWO FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVES. 'DRIVE ONE (A:) SHALL BE A
3.5" MICRODISK (1.44 MEG) DRIVE AND DRIVE TWO (B:)
SHALL BE A 5.25" (1.2 MEG) HIGH DENSITY DRIVE.
D. LONG LIFE (LITHIUM) BATTERY BACKED CLOCK/CALENDAR
E. PRINT BUFFER OF AT LEAST 2S6K.
F. TWO ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS PORTS OR CARDS
G. MATH CO-PROCESSOR CHIP INSTALLED ON THE MOTHER BOARD.
H. THE CPU SHALL BE A 386 PROCESSOR OPERATING AT 25 MHZ
MINIMUM.
I. TYPEWRITER STYLE KEYBOARD, 101 KEYS & 256 ASCII-CODES
J. 64K BYTES OF BATTERY BACKED CMOS ROM 128K BYTES OF ROM
4.4.2 COLOR DISPL~Y:
VGA COLOR GRAPHICS MONITOR, MIN. 13" DIAGONAL, 640 X 480
PIXEL RESOLUTION WITH SIXTEEN ON SCREEN COLORS FROM A
PALETTE OF 256. INTERFACE CARD AND BO COLUMN/COLOR CARD.
4.4.3 PRINTER:
THE M I N I MUM REOU I REMENTS ARE 200 CPS (M IN) I N DRAFT
QUALITY PICA PRINT WITH 96 ASCII CHARACTERS AND DESCENDERS
AND A PRINT BUFFER OF AT LEAST 32K. PRINTER SHALL
ACCOMMODA TE CONT I NUOUS FEED PAPER WIDTH FROM 4" TO 1 6.0 .
PRINTER SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH SINGLE SHEET FEEDER AND
TRACTOR FEED. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO LOAD SINGLE SHEET
PAPER WITHOUT REMOV I NG TRACTOR FEED PAPER FROM THE
PRINTER. GRAPHICS CAPABILITY, BIT IMAGE, STANDARD
HORIZONTAL DENSITY OF 60 DOTS PER INCH, DOUBLE DENSITY OF
120 DOTS PER INCH.
4.4.4 MODEM:
.. AUTO-D I AL .. MODEM, PLACED I N CONTROLLER CAB I NETS SHALL
MEET NEMA SPECIFICATIONS FOR TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY.
TELEPHONE INTERFACE WITH SUBSYSTEM STREET MASTERS OR LOCAL
INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS: TWO WAY TRANSMISSION AND
RECEPTION OF DATA BETWEEN EACH MASTER/LOCAL -SHALL BE
ACCOMPLISHED BY A 1200 BAUD, "AUTO-DIAL" MODEM OPERATING
OVER A STANDARD CALL UP TELEPHONE LINE. THE MODEM SHALL
BE A HAYES SMARTMODEM 1200 (MIN) OR EQUAL. NO INTERNAL
MODEMS WILL BE ACCEPTED.
PAGE 47
-r.5 - 79
PAGf 4~
-rS-BO
I
I
I
I
I
',' I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.5 SOFTWARE
ALL OPERATING SOFTWARE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO PROVIDE THE
FUNCTIONAL OPERATION DESCRIBED IN THIS _SPECIFICATION.
THE SYSTEM SHALL INCORPORATE "CONVERSATIONAL" SOFTWARE
TECHN I DUES I NTO THE DES I GN I N ORDER TO AFFORD OPT I MAL
OPERATING SIMPLICITY.
4.5.1 DOCUMENTATION:
MANUALS SHALL BE SUPPLIED FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
OF THE SYSTEM. THE MANUALS SUPPLIED FOR THE CENTRAL
FACILITY MICROCOMPUTER, PERIPHERALS AND MODEM SHALL BE
SUPPL I ED BY THE EQU I PMENT MANUFACTURER. THE SYSTEM
OPERA TOR'S MANUAL AND TRAFF I C CONTROL EQU I PMENT MANUALS
SHALL CONTAIN AS A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING:
A. COI"TROL SYSTEM OPERATOR'S MANUAL WHICH. INCLUDES:
STEP-BY-STEP SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
THEORY OF SYSTEM OPERATION
EXPLANATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF DATA ELEMENTS (CRT
AND GRAPHICS CRT)
RECOVERY PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED IN CASE OF SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
PROCEDURES FOR UPDATING ALL ELEMENTS OF THE DATA BASE
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS OF ALL EQUIPMENT IN THE SYSTEM
B. E~UIPMENT INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR EACH
C~NTROLLER AND AUXILIARY DEVICE WHICH INCLUDES:
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTIONS OF THE OPERATION OF EACH SYSTEM
COMPONENT
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR EACH ITEM OF EQUIPMENT
THEORY OF OPERATION DESCRIBING THE INTERACTION OF
EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS AND SIGNAL FLOW
DETAILED SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
WIRING DIAGRAMS THAT IDENTIFY WIRE TAGGING USED FOR
ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING
STAFF IN THE
MALFUNCTIONS
CONTROLLERS)
PROCEDURES TO ASSIST THE MAINTENANCE
IDENTIFICATION AND ISOLATION OF
(MASTERS AND LOCAL 1 NTERSECT I ON
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,-
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
c. THREE (3) SETS OF ~IRING DIAGRAMS FOR EACH
INTERSECTION CABINET
4.6 TRAINING:
HANDS ON OPERATIONS TRAINING SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR PERSONNEL
TO BE DESIGNATED BY THE DEPARTMENT. TRAINING SHALL BE
PROVIDED ON THE CENTRAL FACILITY MICROCOMPUTER AND
PER I PHERALS , THE MASTER, THE LOCAL CONTROLLER AND CAB I NET
EQU I PMENT, AND THE SOFTWARE BE I NG SUPPL I ED . HANDS ON
TRAINING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE PERSONNEL DESIGNATED AND
SHALL CONSIST OF THE FOLLOWING AS A MINIMUM:
A. FAMILIARITY WITH CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF CENTRAL CONTROL
FACILITY (DISCONNECT LOCATIONS, CABLE ROUTE LOCATIONS,
ETC. )
B. HOW TO LOAD PAPER, CHANGE RIBBONS, LOAD DISKS, ETC.,
INTO PERIPHERALS
C. HOW TO ENTER ON-LINE COMMANDS (SECURITY CODE, FORMATS,
ETC. )
D. OPERATION OF ALL DEVICES (MICROCOMPUTER START UP, DISK,
PRINTER, ETC.)
E. GENERATION AND EDITING OF MASTER AND LOCAL CONTROLLER
DATA BASE
F. UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING OF MASTER AND LOCAL CONTROLLER
- DATA BASE
G. PROCEDURE FOR BRINGING INTERSECTIONS UP ON CRT
H. EXPLANATION OF THE TELEMETRY SYSTEM
I. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES TO ISOLATE PROBLEMS
J. AS A MINIMUM, 24 HOURS OF TRAINING SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR
EACH CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM INSTALLED. TRAINING CLASSES
SHALL CONSIST OF NOT MORE THAN 10 INDIVIDUALS DESIGNATED
BY THE SYSTEM USER. NOT MORE THAN 6 HOURS OF INSTRUCTION
SHALL BE PROVIDED ON ANY ONE WORKING DAY.
PA6E 4'
-rS-BI
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
THE ENTIRE SYSTEM SHALL BE WARRANTED TO BE FREE FROM DEFECTS
IN WORKMANSHIP AND MATERiAL. ANY PARTS FOUND TO BE
DEFECTIVE SHALL BE REPLACED FREE OF CHARGE.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO AN APPARATUS WHICH HAS BEEN
THE SUBJECT OF MISUSE, MISAPPLICATION, NEGLIGENCE, ACCIDENT,
OR IMPROPER HANDL I NG. THE WARRANTY SHALL BECOME NULL AND
VOID IF ANY EQUIPMENT UNDER WARRANTY IS REPAIRED OR MODIFIED
BY ANYONE OTHER THAN AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE OR
A QUALIFIED D.O.T. TECHNICIAN.
EACH BIDDER SHALL ATTACH TO HIS PROPOSAL A SIGNED STATEMENT
THAT ALL MATERIALS QUOTED UPON ARE EITHER:
IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
OR
NOT IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS. IN THE
EVENT THEY ARE NOT IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS,
THE SUPPLIEP SHALL INCLUDE A LIST OF EACH DETAIL WITH WHICH
THE MATERIAL OFFERED DIFFERS FROM THE SPECIFICATIONS AND
SHALL ATTACH THIS LIST TO HIS PROPOSAL.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE WARRANTY CONDITIONS WILL VOID
THE BID UNTIL THEY HAVE BEEN COMPLIED WITH FULLY.
4.8 CLOSED LOOP DEMONSTRATION:
THE STATE WILL ALLOW A DEMONSTRATION OF ANY CLOSED LOOP
SIGNAL SYSTEM IF REQUESTED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER.
THE DEMONSTRATION WILL BE HELD IN DECEMBER, JANUARY OR
FEBRUARY. ANY 1 NTERESTED MANUFACTURER OR SUPPL I ER SHALL
PHONE THE DEPARTMENT AT 404-656-143B AND ARRANGE A
CONVENIENT TIME FOR THE DEMONSTRATION. THIS DEMONSTRATION
MAY BE USED TO QUAL I FY MATER I AL5 AND EQUI PMENT AT THE
DISCRETION OF THE DEPARTMENT.
4.9 REMOTE SECONDARY MONITORING STATION (READ ONLY):
WHEN REQUIRED, A SECONDARY MONITORING STATION SHALL BE
PROVIDED. THIS STATION SHALL BE AN OUTPUT ONLY ORIENTED
FACILITY WHICH WILL, AS A MINIMUM HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF
RECEIVING FAILURE REPORTS AS GENERATED BY THE CENTRAL OFFICE
MONITORING FACILITY (FROM THE STREET MASTER) AND OUTPUTTING
SUCH REPORTS VIA A HARD COpy PRINTER.
THE BASIC EQUIPMENT SHALL BE IDENTICAL TO THE CENTRAL OFFICE
MONITORING FACILITY WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SOFTWARE. -
LINKAGE OF THE REMOTE SECONDARY MONITORING STATION TO THE
CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL BE VIA A TELEPHONE LINE
UTILIZING A STANDARD RS232 INTERFACE.
PAGE 50
-rs - 8 Z
I
I
I
I
I
'!I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.10
4.11
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SERVICE:
MAINTENANCE DATA SHALL INCLUDE LOCATION OF SERVICE
FACILITY, SERVICES OFFERED AND EXPECTED TURN AROUND TIME.
ADDITIONALLYr IF THE OPTIMAL CENTRAL OFFICE MONITORING
FACILITY IS ELECTED, COMPLETE MAINTENANCE DATA INCLUDING
AVAILABILITY OF ANNUAL SERVICE CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COSTS
SHALL BE PROV I DED . THE CONTRACTOR WILL ONL Y SUPPL Y AND
MAINTAIN SOFTWARE IF AN EXISTING CENTRAL OFF_ICE FACILITY IS
UTILIZED. EACH BIDDING FIRM SHALL ATTACH COMPLETE DATA ON
MA I NTENANCE SERV I CES AVA I LABLE ON ALL EQU I PMENT I TEMS IN
THE SYSTEM. THE GENERAL AREAS TO BE DESCRIBED INCLUDE:
LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS AND ASSOCIATED LOCAL
EQUIPMENT
STREET MASTERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
CENTRAL OFFICE MONITORING FACILITY
DEFINITIONS:
THE FOLLOWING DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THIS DOCUMENT
AND WITH SIGNAL SYSTEMS AND MASTERS IN GENERAL:
CYCLE LENGTH: THE AMOUNT OF TIME REQUIRED TO GO THROUGH
ONE COMPLETE SEQUENCE OF PHASES AT AN INTERSECTION. IT
EQUALS THE SUM OF ALL PHASE GREENS AND CLEARANCE INTERVALS
IN A RING.
SPLIT: THE DIVISION OF THE CYCLE LENGTH INTO GREEN TIME AND
CLEARANCES FOR EACH OF THE SEPARATE PHASES AT AN
INTERSECTION.
OFFSET: THE TIME DIFFERENCE BETWEEN -THE BEGINNING OF MAIN
STREET GREEN AT AN INTERSECTION AND THE SYSTEM ZERO POINT.
IT IS USUALLY EXPRESSED IN SECONDS BUT MAY BE STATED AS A
PERCENTAGE OF THE CYCLE.
PHASE SEQUENCE: THE ORDER IN WHICH THE PHASES ARE ASSIGNED
RIGHT-OF-WAY AT AN INTERSECTION. ACTUATED CONTROLLERS HAVE
A VARIABLE SEQUENCE DICTATED BY THE ARRIVAL OF CALLS OVER
INTERSECTION DETECTORS. THE NORMAL SEQUENCE OF DISPLAYS
OCCURS WHEN THERE IS DEMAND ON ALL PHASES.
_ PROGRESSION: OPERATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNALS IN A PATTERN SUCH
THAT PLATOONS OF VEHICLES LEAVING ONE INTERSECTION RECEIVE
A GREEN INDICATION AS THEY APPROACH THE NEXT SIGNAL IN THE
SYSTEM.
PAGE 51
-rs- 83
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
RAW VOLUME: THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF VEHICLES THAT PASS OVER
THE SAMPLING DETECTORS DURING A SAMPLE PERIOD.
WE I GHTED VOLUME ( SMOOTHED) : THE RESULT OF COND I T ION I NG
THE RAW VOLUME WITH A SMOOTHING OR WEIGHTING FACTOR. RAW
VOLUMES ARE. CONDITIONED TO MINIMIZE THE EFFECT OF SHORT
FLUCTUATIONS AND TO GIVE KEY DETECTORS MORE ABILITY TO
INFLUENCE SYSTEM OPERATION.
RAW OCCUPANCY: OCCUPANCY IS DEFINED AS THE PERCENTAGE OF
TIME THAT A SAMPLING DETECTOR WAS OCCUPIED DURING THE
SAMPLING PERIOD. THIS MEASUREMENT PROVIDES INDICATION OF
THE SPEED AND DENSITY OF THE VEHICLES PASSING OVER SAMPLING
DETECTOR.
WE I GHTED OCCUPANCY: THE RESULT OF COND I T I ON I NG THE RAW
OCCUPANCY WITH SMOOTHING OR WEIGHTING FACTORS.
INTERSECTION TIMING PLAN: AN INTERSECTION PLAN NUMBER IS A
TIME OF DAY (TOD> PROGRAM THAT HAS BEEN LOADED INTO THE
LOCAL CONTROLLER AND CONSISTS OF A CYCLE, OFFSET, SPLIT AND
ANY OPTIONS AVAILABLE AS PART OF THE TOD SELECTIONS. WHEN
SELECTED BY THE MASTER, THE TOD PLAN NUMBER WILL BE USED
REGARDLESS OF THE ACTUAL T I ME. IF OPERAT I NG I N THE
INTERSECTION PLAN MODE, A LOCAL CONTROLLER USES ITS OWN
TIME CLOCK FOR SYNCHRONIZATION AND DOES NOT LOOK TO THE
MASTER FOR PATTERN SELECTION COMMANDS OR SYNCH PULSES.
ON-LINE: A CONTROLLER IS CONSIDERED TO BE ON-LINE WHEN IT
IS IN FULL COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE MASTER. EVEN IF
OPERATING IN THE FREE MODE. PROVIDED COMMUNICATIONS WITH
THE MASTER ARE FULLY FUNCTIONAL.
PAGE 52
-rs-. e q..
I
I
I
I-
I
'.'
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.06 FLASHING BEACON.. CONTROLLER UNIT ASSEMBLY
A. OPERATION: THE FLASHING BEACON CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY
SHALL BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE ON 120 VOLTS, bO HERTZ, AC.
B~ FLASHER UNIT: THE FLASHER UNIT SHALL BE SOLID STATE
CONFORMING TO CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. WHEN SPECIFIED UNIT
SHALL ALSO CONTAIN A COMPLETELY WIRED IN SOLID STATE DIGITAL
TIME CLOCK WITH BACKUP RECHARGEABLE BATTERY FOR MEMORY AND
SHALL AUTOMATICALLY ACCOMMODATE DAYLIGHT SAVINGS. UNIT
SHALL INCLUDE PHOTOCELL AND DIMMER WHEN SPECIFIED.
C. CAB I NET: THE FLASHER UN I T SHALL BE ENCLOSED I N A
WEATHERPROOF FABRICATED SHEET ALUMINUM ALLOY CABINET. THE
CAB I NET SHALL BE OF A CLEAN CUT DES I GN AND APPEARANCE AND
SHALL PROVIDE AMPLE SPACE FOR HOUSING THE FLASHING UNIT,
TERMINAL STRIP, AND OTHER AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT. A HINGED
DOOR SHALL BE PRO V I DED PERM I TT I NG COMPLETE ACCESS TO THE
INTERIOR OF THE CABINET. WHEN THE DOOR IS CLOSED, IT SHALL
BE SEALED BY NEOPRENE GASKETING MATERIAL, MAKING THE CABINET
WEATHERPROOF AND DUST TIGHT. THE DOOR SHALL BE FURNISHED
WITH A FLUSH TYPE TUMBLER LOCK. TWO KEYS SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH EACH CABINET. HARDWARE FOR MOUNTING ON EITHER A WOOD
OR STEEL POLE SHALL BE PROVIDED AS SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERED.
925.07 LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT
925.08 MASTER COORDINATION UNIT
1.0 SECTION I - PURPOSE:
A. I TIS THE I NTENT OF THESE SPEC I F I CAT IONS TO DESCR I BE THE
MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR A
COORDINATION UNIT TO COORDINATE TRAFFIC CONTROLLERS INTO A
COORDINATED SYSTEM.
2.0 SECTION II - GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. FUNCTIONAL REDUIREMENTSI
1. CYCLES: THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PROVIDE FOR (MIN.)
FOUR (4)BACKGROUND CYCLES~ ADJUSTABLE FROM 30 SECONDS TO
210 SECONDS. CYCLE LENGTHS SHALL BE EASILY CHANGED.
2. OFFSETS: THREE (3 MIN.) OFFSETS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR
EACH CYCLE.O OFFSETS SHALL BE EASILY ADJUSTABLE FROM THE
FRONT PANEL OF THE COORDINATION UNIT.
3. FREE (NONCOORDINATED) OPERATION, THE COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL BE ABLE ~O SELECT FREE (NONCOORDINATED) OPERATION
OR REMOTE FLASH.
PA6E 53
-rS-S5
925.07 & 92S.0B COORDINATION UNITS continued
4. VARIABLE PERMISSIVE YIELD'PERIOD: THE COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL PROVIDE ONE PERMISSIVE YIELD PERIOD FOR EACH CYCLE.
PERMISSIVE PERIODS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM THE FRONT
PANEL OF THE COORDINATING UNIT. THE TERMINATION OF THE
PERMISSIVE YIELD PERIOD SHALL BE-ADJUSTABLE.
s. MINOR PHASE: GREEN E.XTENSION LIMIT: MEANS SHALL BE
PROVIDED SO THAT A SEPARATE POINT FOR EACH OF THE THREE
CYCLES MAY BE SELECTED, BEYOND WHICH THE MINOR PHASES
GREEN MAY NOT BE EXTENDED.
b. INDICATORS: EACH COORDINATtON UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH INDICATIONS WHICH INDICATE THE FOLLOWING:
a) CYCLE (MIN. OF C2, C3, C4)
b) OFFSET (MIN. OF 3)
c) SPLIT (MIN. OF S2, S3)
d) HOLD (MIN. OF 3)
d) FORCE OFF (ONE PER NON COORDINATED PHASE)
e) FLASH/FREE
7. WHEN COORDINATION UNITS ARE INTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER,
THE ABOVE INDICATORS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE FACE OF THE
CONTROLLER.
8. ELECTR I CAL REQU I REMENTS: ALL I NTERCONNECT I NG CABLE
CIRCUITS OPERATING ON 115V A.C. SHALL BE POWERED FROM THE
"HOT" SIDE OF THE A.C. LINE. THE SYNCHRONIZATION LINE
SHALL BE NORMALL Y ENERG I Z ED AND SHALL BE. DE -ENERG I ZED
DURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD.
B. COORDINATION UNIT ENCLOSURE EACH EXTERNAL COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL BE ENCLOSED IN AN ALUMINUM CASE AND SHALL BE EQUIPPED
AS FOLLOWS:
1. IT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH AN "MS" TYPE PLUG SO THAT AN
"MS" TYPE SOCKET ON THE ASSOCIATED CONNECTING CABLE CAN
BE INSERTED OR REMOVED, THEREBY CONNECTING OR
DISCONNECTING THE UNIT WITHOUT DISCONNECTING OR REMOVING
ANY WIRES.
2. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO REMOVE A COORDINATION UNIT AND
REPLACE IT WITH A SIMILAR UNIT WITHOUT SHUTTING OFF THE
POWER TO THE CONTROLLER OR SIGNALS.
3. HARNESSES PROVIDED SHALL BE OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH FOR EASY
INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE.
C. COORDINATION UNIT (INTERNAL TO CONTROLLER): EACH INTERNAL
COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE SOLID STATE "SLIDE IN" TYP.E
CONSTRUCTION.
D. ALL COORDINATION UNITS SHALL INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY WIRING
HARNESSES, AND/OR TERMINAL BLOCKS.
PASE 5.
-rs -Bc:'
I
I
I
I
I
.,
-'I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.09 TIME BASED TRAFFI.C SIGNAL COORDINATION UNIT
A. GENERAL:
1. THESE S?ECIFICATIONS SET FORTH MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR
AC COORDINATION UNIT -WHICH SHALL ALLOW TRAFFIC CONTROL
EQUIPMENT TO BE COORDINATED WIT~OUT REQUI~ING THE USE OF
INTERCONNECTING EQUIPMENT. THE UNIT SHALL COORDINATE
TRAFFIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT BASED ON SIGNALS FROM A PRECISE
TIME BASE WHICH SHALL ALLOW OUTPUT CONTROL SIGNALS TO
BE CHANGED AT THE PROPER PREPROGRAMMED TIME OF DAY/DAY OF
WEEK TO ACHIEVE THE COORDINATED OPERATION OF A GROUP OF
INTERSECTIONS. THE UNIT SHALL USE THE LATEST TECHNOLOGY
SOLID STATE CIRCUITRY TO IMPLEMENT THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
THE UNIT SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS
OUTLINED IN THE CURRENT NEMASTANDARDS.
B. ENVIRONMENTAL:
1. ALL TIMING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY DIGITAL METHODS.
2. THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PERFORM ALL SPECIFIED
FUNCTIONS AT LINE VOLTAGE OF 115 VOLTS AC AND POWER LINE
FREQUENCY OF 00 HERTZ.
3. THE UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A BACKUP POWER SOURCE TO
RETAIN STORED DATA IN THE DATA MEMORY AND TO MAINTAIN THE
OPERATION OF ITS INTERNAL TIME REFERENCE OPERATION.
C. INTERFACING THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A
PLUG SO THAT A SOCKET ON THE ASSOCIATED CONNECTING CABLE CAN
BE I NSERTED OR REMOVED THEREBY CONNECT I NG OR DISCONNECT I NG
THE UNIT WITHOUT ANY WIRING CHANGES.
D. PHYSICAL D~SCRIPTION:
1. _ THE COORDINATION UNIT MAY BE ENCLOSED IN A METAL CASE, OR
IT MAY BE DESIGNED INTERNALLY TO THE CONTROLLER UNIT.
2. ALL INPUT, OUTPUTS, I NTERF ACE VOLTAGE, AND I NTERF ACE
COMMON RETURNS SHALL ENTER THE UNIT THROUGH FRONT PANEL
CONNECTORS IF COORDINATION UNIT IS EXTERNAL.
E. DISPLAY
1. THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING ANY
OF ITS STORED INFORMATION ANP HAVING THAT INFORMATION
PROGRAMMED, ALTERED, ERASED, OR REPLACEP BY OPERATION OF
THE UNITS FRONT PANEL DIGITAL INDICATORS AND CONTROLS.
THE DISPLAY MUST BE OUTDOOR VISIBLE, EASILY READABLE WHEN
SHADED FROM DIRECT SUNLIGHT.
PA6E 55
-rS-B7
:'.~~ c.
-rs- 88
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.09 TIME BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL COORDINATION UNIT continued
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
F.
1. BASIC ELEMENTS
a) THE COORDINATION UNITS SHALL HAVE A PRECISE CLOCK
BASED ON A SEVEN DAY (MINIMUM) CLOCK THAT IS EASILY
- -SET TO THE NEAREST SECOND.
b) THE CLOCK SHALL USE THE POWER LINE FREQUENCY AS A
TIME BASE WHEN POWER IS PRESENT AND A BACKUP POWER
SOURCE WHEN THE POWER IS INTERRUPTED. THE BACKUP
POWER SOURCE SHALL PROVIDE AN ACCURACY WITHIN .00Si.
OR LESS OF ACTUAL OPERATION.
c ) THE UN I T SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RET A I N I NG I TS PROGRAM
AND TIMING ACCURACY DURING POWER INTERRUPTIONS FOR A
MINIMUM OF 100 HOURS AFTER FULLY CHARGED (48 HOURS OF
NORMAL AND CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
d) TIME SETTINGS SHALL CONSIST OF DAY, HOUR, MINUTE,
SECONDS RESOLUTION. FUNCTION OMIT ON A DAY OF WEEK
BASIS, ADDITIONALLY, FUNCTION OMIT TO ALSO BE
PROVIDED ON DAY OF YEAR BASIS.
2. BASIC CAPABILITIES
a) EACH UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF CHANGING ITS INTERNAL
STATES AND OUTPUT CIRCUIT - STATES BASED ON
PREPROGRAMMED DATA ENTRIES. THESE CHANGES OF STATE.
SHALL TAKE PLACE W~EN COINCIDENCE OCCURS BETWEEN THE
UNIT'S RECORD OF TIME AND ITS PREPROGRAMMED TIME DATA
ENTRIES.
b) THE COORDINATING UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF GENERATING
A PAT.TERN OF OUTPUT SIGNALS FOR THE CONTROL OF ITS
ASSOCIATED TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER. THESE OUTPUT
SIGNALS SHALL CAUSE THE ASSOC I ATED LOCAL SIGNAL
CONTROLLER TO OPERATE IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO ACHIEVE
COORDINATED OPERATION WITH ADJACENT INTERSECTIONS.
THE UNIT SHALL HAVE A NUMBER OF OUTPUT PATTERNS IN
ORDER TO CHANGE THE SYSTEM SIGNAL PATTERN IN RESPONSE
TO PERIODIC, PREDICTABLE CHANGES IN TRAFFIC LEVELS.
c) THE UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SWITCHING INDEPENDENTLY
FROM ONE PATTERN OF OUTPUTS TO ANOTHER AT A
PRE PROGRAMMED T I ME I N ORDER TO ACH I EVE THE DES I RED
COORDINATION OF THE SIGNALS WITHIN THE SYSTEM.
3. PROGRAM PARAMETERS
&) CYCLES: THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PROVIDE A
MINIMUM OF FOUR BACKGROUND CYCLES, ADJUSTABLE FROM 30
SECONDS TO 210 SECONDS. CYCLE LENGTHS SHALL BE
EAS I L Y CHANGED FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF THE
COORDINATION UNIT.
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
925.09 ~ BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL COORDINATION UNIT
. I , ,. ,
b) OFFSETS: THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PROVIDE A
MINIMUM OF THREE OFFSETS FOR EACH CYCLE. OFFSETS
SHALL BE EAS I L Y ADJ UST ABLE FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF
THE COORDINATION UNIT.
c ) SPL I TS : THE COORD I NA T I ON UN I T SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
PROVIDING A MINIMUM OF (2) SPLITS PER CYCLE. SPLITS
SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF THE
COORDINATION UNIT.
d) THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING
AN INTERVAL SEQUENCE OF FREE (NONCOORDINATED)
OPERATION, PERMISSIVE, FORCE OFF, HOLD, PHASE OMIT,
AND PEDESTRIAN OMIT OUTPUTS. THE TIME DURATION OF
EACH INTERVAL IS TO BE PROGRAMMED DIRECTLY FROM THE
FRONT PANEL.
G. BIDDING: PRICE SID FOR THESE ITEMS SHALL BE FOR CC~RDINATION
UNIT. WIRING HARNESS, AND NECESSARY TERMINAL BLOCKS.
~2S.10 FLASHING SCHOOL _SIGNAL ASSEMBLY
1. PURPOSE: IT IS THE INTENT OF THIS SPECIFICATION TO DESCRIBE
THE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE FLASHING SCHOOL
SIGNAL ASSEMBLY. EACH ASSEMBLY SHALL CONSIST OF A FLASHING UNIT,
TIME SWITCH, CABINET, TWO B" OR 12" YELLOW-BEACONS, S-SPECIAL
(24) SIGN. AND ALL OTHER NECESSARY HARDWARE AND MATERIALS TO
EFFECT THE INSTALLATION.
2. FLASHING UNIT: A JACK MOUNTED FLASHER OF SUFFICIENT AMPERE
CAPACITY AND WITH SUFFICIENT CIRCUITS SHALL BE SUPPLIED, THE
FLASHER SHALL BE SOLID STATE AND HAVE AN ADJUSTABLE FLASHER RATE
OF 50 TO 60 FLASHES PER-MINUTE. A UNIFORM FLASH PROVISIONS SHALL
BE PROVIDED.
3. SIGNAL HEADS: THE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE STANDARD B" OR 12"
YELLOW BEACONS AS DESCRIBED UNDER TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS.
4. SIGN: THE SIGN SHALL BE AS-SPECIAL (24 X 4B) SCHOOL SIGN
AS SHOWN IN THE PLANS. THE SIGN MATERIAL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE
WITH SECTION 636 OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
S. TIME SWITCH: THE TIME SWITCH SHALL BE AS DESCRIBED IN THES~
SPECIAL PROVISIONS UNDER TIME SWITCH.
6 . CABINET: THE FLASHER CABINET SHALL BE OF CLEAN CUT DESIGN
AND APPEARANCE. IT SHALL BE MADE OF CAST OR FABRICATED ALUMINUM.
A HINGED DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED PERMITTING COMPLETE ACCESS OF THE
INTERIOR OF THE CABINET. WHEN CLOSED, THE DOOR SHALL FIT CLOSELY
TO . GASKET I NG MATER I AL, MAK I NG THE CAB I NET WEATHERPROOF AND
DUSTPROOF. THE DOOR SHALL BE PROV I OED WITH A STRONG LOCK AND
KEY. HARDWARE FOR MOUNTING ON EITHER A WOOD OR METAL POLE SHALL
BE PROVIDED AS SPECIFIED.
PAGE 57
-r.5 - 89
, ~ ~~ c ~
75- ?O
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.11 LOAD SWITCHES
LOAD SWITCHES SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION FIVE OF THE
CURRENT NEP1A STANDARDS.
925.12 ~ CONFLICT MONITOR
THIS ITEM SHALL CONSIST OF A SEPARATE EXTERNAL, PROGRAMMABLE,
SIGNAL MON I TOR I NG ' DEV ICE WH I CH SHALL DETECT CONFL I CT I NG SIGNAL
INDICATIONS AND VOLTAGE LEVEL ABOVE OR BELOW THE SATISFACTORY
OPERATING VOLTAGES OF THE CONTROLLER. A CONFLICTING INDICATION OR
UNSATISFACTORY VOLTAGE WHEN SENSED BY THE MONITOR SHALL TRIGGER A
TRANSFER OF THE SIGNALS TO FLASH. THE SIGNAL MONITOR SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEP1A STANDARDS, SPECIFICALLY SECTION SIX.
925.13 TIME SWITCH
1. TIME SWITCHES (ALSO REFERRED TO AS TIME CLOCKS) SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF CONTROLLING TIMING TRANSFERS, FLASHING OPERATION OR
FUNCTION INITIATION OR TERMINATION.
2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: THE TIME SWITCH (CLOCK) SHALL BE
COMPLETELY SELF CONTAINED, SOLID STATE/DIGITAL AND SHALL PROVIDE
FOR SEVEN DAY OPERATION AND BE EQUIPPED WITH A MINIMUM OF TEN
HOUR RESERVE POWER FOR TIME AND PROGRAM BACKUP (CELL OR BATTERY;
RECHARGEABLE), AND SHALL AUTOMATICALLY ACCOMMODATE DAYLIGHT
SAVINGS TIME.
3. THE TIME SWITCH SHALL BE EQUIPPED FOR OMITTING EACH OUTPUT
FUNCTION ON A DAILY BASIS. ALL PARTS SHALL BE READILY
ACCESSIBLE. ANY CONNECTION BETWEEN THE TIME SWITCH AND THE EACK
PANEL SHALL BE BY MEANS OF A FLEXIBLE CABLE. THE CAELE
CONDUCTORS SHALL BE TAGGED FOR IDENTIFICATION. ALL OUTPUTS SHALL
BE PROVIDED BY ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAYS. THIS SHALL INCLUDE
SINGLE CIRCUIT, 6 CIRCUIT, AND B CIRCUIT OUTPUT UNITS.
PROGRAMMING MANUAL TO BE INCLUDED.
925.14 SELF-TUNING ~ DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS
1. INDUCTION SENSOR/DETECTOR: THIS ITEM SHALL CONSIST OF
FURNISHING AN INDUCTION LOOP SINGLE OR MULTICHANNEL DIGITAL
SENSOR/DETECTOR UN IT, SHELF MOUNTED OR CARD RACK MOUNTED,
INCLUDING WIRING HARNESS, AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS WITH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.14
. . _~ t
SELF TUNING LOOP DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS continued
2. REQUIREMENTS: THE SHELF MOUNTED SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT SHALL
BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE ON 120 VOLT, 60 HERTZ, SINGLE PHASE,
ALTERNATING CURRENT. THE CARD RACK MOUNTED UNIT MAY UTILIZE
PLUG-IN VERSION 24 VDC EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY. VARIATIONS IN
VOLTAGE OF PLUS OR MINUS 20 PERCENT, OR INSIDE CABINET
TEMPERATURE CHANGES BETWEEN - -40 DEGREES F AND +180 DEGREES F
SHALL NOT AFFECT THE NORMAL OPERATION OF THE SENSING UNIT. THE
POWER SUPPLY SHALL BE AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE SENSING UNIT. A
FAIL SAFE FEATURE SHALL BE INCORPORATED IN THE DESIGN OF THE
- SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT, WHICH, IN THE ABSENCE OF POWER, SHALL PLACE
A CONTINUOUS CALL ON THE SENSING CIRCUIT. THE DETECTOR UNIT
SHALL BE CAPABLE OF OPERATING PROPERLY WHEN CONNECTED TO MORE
THAN ONE LOOP WITH TOTAL FEEDER LENGTH UP TO 500 FEET AND TOTAL
LOOP AREA UP TO 400 SQUARE FEET. THE UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
SENSING THE PASSAGE OF A VEHICLE OVER THE LOOP UP TO SPEEDS OF BO
MILES PER HOUR.
3. A MANUAL SWITCH SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE FRONT OF THE UNIT
FOR THE SELECTION OF EITHER MOTION OR PRESENCE SENSING. IN THE
PRESENCE POSITION, THE UNIT SHALL SENSE THE PRESENCE OF A VEHICLE
WITHIN THE LOOP UP TO 10 MINUTES. ANY VEHICLE IN MOTION SHALL BE
SENSED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN THE FIELD OF THE LOOP.
4. THE SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT CIRCUITRY SHALL CONSIST ENTIRELY OF
ELECTRONICS SOLID STATE DESIGN WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE OUTPUT
RELAY. ALL TRANSISTORS AND DIODES SHALL BE 100 PERCENT SILICON.
THE SENSOR/DETECTOR LOOP INDUCTANCE RANGE OF OPERATION SHALL BE
BETWEEN 50-650 MICRO-HENRIES AND SHALL RENDER RELIABLE DETECTION
WITH A MINIMUM OF 0.021. CHANGE IN INDUCTANCE. AN INDICATOR SHALL
BE PERMANENTLY MOUNTED TO THE FRONT OF THE SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT
TO SHOW EACH ACTUATION. AN MS TYPE CONNECTOR AND WIRING HARNESS
SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH EACH SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT FOR CONNECTION
TO THE EXTERNAL CIRCUITRY.
5. ALL SENSOR/DETECTOR UNITS OF THE SAME TYPE SHALL BE
INTERCHANGEABLE WITHOUT ANY WIRING OR COMPONENT CHANGES. FIELD
TUNING OF THE SENSOR/DETECTOR SHALL NOT REDUIRE A METER, CIRCUIT
CHANGES, SUBST I TUT IONS, MOD I F I CAT IONS, OR ADD I T IONS TO THE
SENSING UNIT. THE SENSOR/DETECTOR SHALL BE HOUSED IN A
NONFERROUS CASE OR SEVEN POSITION RACK. REMOVAL OF THE CASE
SHALL BE ACCOMPL I SHED BY THE USE OF SIMPLE HAND TOOLS AND ALL
COMPONENT PARTS SHALL BE READ I L Y ACCESS I BLE WITH THE CASE
REMOVED. THE DETECTOR SHALL BE NEITHER POSITION NOR ATTITUDE
SENSITIVE. DETECTORS SHALL BE OF THE AUTOMATIC SELF TUNING TYPE.
PAGE 5'
7.5-9/
925.14 SELF TUNING ~ DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS continued
I
I
I
I
I
I
-,
6. MUL T I CHANNEL DETECTOR UNJ TS SHALL I NCLUDE TWO OR FOUR
COMPLETE DETECTOR CHANNELs. EACH CHANNEL SHALL SEQUENTIALLY
ENERGIZE ITS LOOP INPUTS TO ELIMINATE CROSSTALK. SEQUENTIAL
SCANNING SHALL ALLOW TWO DETECTION CHANNELS TO OPERATE WITH FULL
PERFORMANCE US I NG A COMMON FOUR CONDUCTOR -LEAD- I N CABLE.
SEQUENTIAL SCANNING SHALL FULLY PREVENT CROSSTALK BETWEEN
CHANNELS OF A DETECTOR CONNECTED TO CLOSELY SPACED OR OVERLAPPED
LOOPS FOR DIRECTIONAL DETECTION. SEQUENTIAL SCANNING SHALL ALLOW
TWO OR MORE DETECTION CHANNELS TO BE CONNECT-ED TO A SINGLE
DETECT I ON LOOP WITH FULL OPERAT I NG PERFORMANCE, I NCLUD I NG
SEPARATE MODE AND SENSITIVITY SELECTION CAPABILITY ON EACH
CHANNEL.
7. DETECTORS W/DELAY RECOGNITION SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REOUIREMENTS ABOVE PLUS HAVE A MEANS BY WHICH A CALL IS NOT
RECOGNIZED FOR A CERTAIN NUMBER OF SECONDS WHICH WILL BE VARIABLE
FROM 0 TO 30 SECONDS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. DETECTORS W/EXTENSION TIME SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS
ABOVE PLUS HAVE A MEANS BY WHICH A CALL MAY BE EXTENDED BEYOND
THE TIME A VEHICLE IS PRESENT IN THE DETECTION AREA FROM 0 TO 7
1/2 SECONDS IN 1/2 SECOND INCREMENTS.
925.15 LOOP SEALANT
..;ENERAL:
~LL LOOP SEALANTS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF
'RANSPORTATION'S OFFICE OF MATERIALS RESEARCH, 15 KENNEDY DRIVE,
FOREST PARK, GEORGIA 30050, IF NOT LISTED ON THAT OFFICE'S
~PPROVED PRODUCTS LIST.
A. EPOXY SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO GEORGIA STANDARD
SPEC I FICA T IONS. SECT ION BB6 - EPOXY RES I N ADHES I VES, TYPE
VII.
EPOXY RESIN SYSTEMS TO BE ::lACKAGED IN GALLON INCREMENTED
CONTAINERS. MIXING RATIO MUST BE ONE PART RESIN TO ONE PART
HARDENER BY VOLUME.
COAL TAR MODIFIED EPOXY RESINS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED.
B. POLYURETHANE SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO GEORGIA STANDARD
SPEC I FICA T ION SECT I ON 833.09, POL YURET - ~NE SEALANT FOR
I NDUCT I ON LOOPS. A MANUFACTURERS CERT I 'F' I CAT I ON MUST BE
SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF MATERIALS AND RESEARCH TO OBT~IN
APPROVAL FOR THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
PAS[ 60
-TS - f'z.
I
,
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
. .
925.16 THRU 925.21 TRAFFIC ;SIGNAL HEADS.
925.16
925.17
925.18
925.19
925.20
925.21
ONE-WAY, I-SECTION, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE-WAY, 3-5ECTION, 8- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE-WAY, 3-SECTION, 12- SIGNAL HEAD-
ONE-WAY, 4-SECTION, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE-WAY, oS-SECTION, 12- S~6NAL HEAD
ONE WAY, 5-SECTIONCLUSTER, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
NOTE: LENS TYPE AND COLOR WILL BE SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS
,.
A. TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
1. SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE OF DIE CAST ALUMINUM OR POLYCARBONATE
PLASTIC SECTIONAL CONSTRUCTION THROUGHOUT. EACH LENS SHALL
HAVE A SEPARATE SECTION SO AS TO PERMIT READY
INTERCHANGEABILITY, ADDITION, OR REMOVAL OF SECTION FOR
CHANGES IN SIGNAL OPERATION AND EMERGENCY REPAIRS.
2. EACH SECT I ON SHALL BE I DENT I CAL DIE CAST ALUM I NUM OR
POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC OPEN END TYPE FOR ACCESSIBILITY BETWEEN
SECTIONS. AND BOTH OTHER END DIE CASTING SHALL BE IDENTICAL
AND SHALL BE RIBBED CONSTRUCTION WITH MOUNTING BOSS MINIMUM
S/8" THICK AT POINT OF ATTACHMENT TO MOUNTING FITTINGS, SO AS
TO PRODUCE THE STRONGEST POSSIBLE ASSEMBLY, CONSISTENT WITH
LIGHT WEIGHT. -
3. SECTIONS SHALL BE RIGIDLY AND SECURELY FASTENED TOGETHER INTO
ONE WEATHER TIGHT SIGNAL FACE OR ASSEMBLY.
B. DOORS:
DOORS SHAl,.L BE DIE CAST ALUMINUM OR POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC,
HINGED TYPE HELD BY A SCREW AND LATCH. VISORS SHALL BE THE
REMOVABLE TYPE NOT LESS THAN . O~O INCH TH I CK AND SHALL BE
STANDARD TUNNEL TYPE VISORS OF VARIOUS LENGTHS. LOUVERS FOR
VARIOUS LENGTHS OF TUNNEL VISORS SHALL BE BID UNDER THIS
ITEM.
Co OPTICAL UNITS:
I. OPTICAL UNITS, LENSES AND REFLECTORS SHALL CONFORM WITH THE
COLOR INDEX ESTABLISHED BY THE BUREAU OF STANDARDS AND SHALL
BE DOUBLE GASKETED. A SILICON OR HIGH TEMPERATURE RUBBER
LENS GASKET SHALL BE PROVIDED ENCOMPASSING THE INNER AND
OUTER SURFACES OF THE EDGE OF THE LENS.
PA6E 61
7S-1$
PAGE 62
75-9'4-
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.16 THRU 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS continued
2. REFLECTORS SHALL BE OF THE ALZAK TYPE HELD IN A SUPPORTING
HOLDER, WHICH SHALL BE HINGED TO THE SIGNAL BODY SO IT DOES
NOT OPEN WHEN THE DOOR OPENS. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE, HOWEVER,
TO SWING THE REFLECTOR OUT FOR INSPECTION OF WIRING.-
3. THE REFLECTOR HOLDER SHALL BE SPRING CUSHION MOUNTED TO
ABSORB VIBRATION AND TO PROVIDE AN EFFECTIVE SEAL AGAINST THE
SILICON LENS GASKET ALL AROUND.
4. ADJUSTABLE FOCUS SOCKETS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND THIS SOCKET
SHALL BE SUPPORTED SO AS TO ALLOW ROTATION.
D. I LLUM I NA T I ON: SIGNAL HEADS SHALL ACCOMMODATE A M I N I MUM 67
WATT (150 WATT FOR 12" SIGNALS), 120 VOLT, bOOO OR MORE HOURS
TRAFFIC SIGNAL LAMPS. (NOT INCLUDED IN THE SIGNAL HEAD.)
E. FITTING: ALL ENTRANCE FITTINGS TO BE 1.5 INCHES.
F. WIRING: ALL WIRING WILL COMPLY TO LOCAL ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS. EACH SIGNAL HEAD WILL BE PROPERLY WIRED TO A
SEPARATE TERMINAL STRIP MOUNTED IN THE TOP SECTION. TERMINAL
STRIP IS TO BE A SEPARATE COMPONENT.
G. FINISH: THE FINISH AND PAINTING SHALL CONFORM TO APPLICABLE
PORTIONS OF THE CURRENT MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL
DEVICES. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFICALLY STATED IN THE PLANS,
ALL SIGNAL HOUSING (SACK, TOP, BOTTOM, AND SIDES), AND
FITTINGS ARE TO BE PAINTED HIGHWAY YELLOW OR SHALL BE HIGHWAY
YELLOW THROUGHOUT; THE FRONT FACES (DOORS AND VISORS) SHALL
BE FLAT BLACK.
OPTICALLY PROGRAMMED, ADJUSTABLE FACE TRAFFIC SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR SIGNAL HEADS:
GENERAL:
1. THE SIGNAL SHALL PERMIT THE VISIBILITY ZONE OF THE INDICATION
TO BE DETERMINED OPTICALLY AND REQUIRE NO HOODS OR LOUVERS.
THE PROJECTED INDICATION MAY BE SELECTIVELY VISIBLE OR VEILED
-ANYWHERE WITHIN 15 DEGREES OF THE OPTICAL AXIS. NO
INDICATION SHALL RESULT FROM EXTERNAL ILLUMINATION NOR SHALL
ONE LIGHT UNIT ILLUMINATE A SECOND~ THE COMPONENTS OF THE
OPTICAL SYSTEM SHALL COMPRISE:
A. LAMP
B. LAMP COLLAR
C~ OPTICAL LIMITER-DIFFUSER
D. OBJECTIVE LENS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 3.
I
I
I
925.16 THRU 925.21
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS cDnti~ued
2.
THE LAMP SHALL BE NOMINAL 150 WATT, 120 VOLTAC, T~REE PRONG,
SEALED BEAM HAVING AN INTEGRAL REFLECTOR WITH STIPPLED COVER
AND AN AVERAGE RATED L I FE OF AT LEAST 6,000 HOURS. AN
ECUIVALENT 75 WATT LAMP SHALL BE USED WITH PEDESTRIAN
INDICATIONS. THE LAMP SHALL BE COUPLED TO THE DIFFUSING
. - ELEMENT WITH -A COLLAR INCLUDING A SPECULAR INNER SURFACE.
THE'DIFFUSING ELEMENT MAY BE DISCRETE OR INTEGRAL WITH THE
CONVEX SURFACE OF THE OPTICAL LIMITER.
3.
THE OPTICAL LIMITER SHALL PROVIDE AN ACCESSIBLE IMAGING
SURFACE AT FOCUS ON THE OPTICAL AXIS FOR OBJECTS 900 TO 1200
FEET DISTANCE, AND PERMIT AN EFFECTIVE VEILING MASK TO BE
VARIOUSLY APPLIED AS DETERMINED BY THE DESIRED VISIBILITY
ZONE. THE OPTICAL LIMITER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH POSITIVE
INDEXING MEANS AND COMPOSED OF HEAT RESISTANT GLASS.
THE OBJECTIVE LENS SHALL. BE A HIGH RESOLUTION PLANAR
INCREMENTAL LENS HERMETICALLY SEALED WITHIN A FLAT LAMINATE
OF WEATHER RESISTANT ACRYLIC OR APPROVED EQUAL. THE LENS
SHALL BE SYMMETRICAL IN OUTLINE AND MAY BE ROTATED TO ANY 90
DEGREE ORIENTATION ABOUT THE OPTICAL AXIS WITHOUT DISPLACING
THE PRIMARY IMAGE.
4.
s.
THE OPTICAL SYSTEM SHALL ACCOMMODATE PROJECTION OF DIVERSE,
SELECTED INDICATIONS TO SEPARATE PORTIONS OF THE ROADWAY SUCH
THAT ONLY ONE INDICATION WILL BE SIMUL TANEOUSL Y APPARENT TO
ANY VIEWER. THE PROJECTED INDICATION SHALL CONFORM TO ITE
TRANSMITTANCE AND CHROMATICITY STANDARDS.
CONSTRUCTION:
1 .
DIE CAST ALUMINUM PARTS SHALL CONFORM TO ITE ALLOY AND
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS AND HAVE A CHROMATE PREPARATORY
TREATMENT. THE EXTERIOR OF THE SIGNAL CASE, LAMP HOUSING AND
MOUNTING FLANGES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH A HIGH QUALITY ENAMEL
PRIME AND FINISH PAINT. THE LENS HOLDER AND INTERIOR OF THE
CASE SHALL BE OPT I CAL BLACK. _.
2.
SIGNAL CASE AND LENS HOLDER SHALL BE PREDRILLED FOR
SACKPLATES AND VISORS. HINGE AND LATCH PINS SHALL BE
STAINLESS STEEL. ALL ACCESS OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED WITH
WEATHER RESISTANT RUBBER GASKETS.
SHEET METAL PARTS INCLUDING VISORS AND BACKPLATES SHALL
CONFORM TO ITE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, AND INCLUDE A CHROMATE
PREPARATORY TREATMENT AND OPTICAL BLACK ON ALL SURFACES.
PA6E 63
T.s-?~
PAS( 64
7..5- f ~
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.16 ~ 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS continued
MOUNTING:
1. THE SIGNAL SHALL MOUNT TO STANDARD 1 1/2 INCH FITTINGS AS A
SINGLE SECTION, AS A MULTIPLE SECTION FACE, OR IN COMBINATION
WITH OTHER SIGNALS. THE SIGNAL SECT ION SHALL BE PROV I DED
WITH AN ADJUSTABLE CONNECTION THAT PERMITS INCREMENTAL
TILTING FROM 0 TO 10 DEGREES ABOVE OR BELOW THE HORI ZONTAL
WHILE MAINTAINING A COMMON VERTICAL AXIS THROUGH COUPLERS AND
MOUNTING. TERMINAL CONNECTION SHALL PERMIT EXTERNAL
ADJUSTMENT ABOUT THE MOUNTING AXIS IN 5 DEGREE INCREMENTS.
2. THE SIGNAL SHALL BE MOUNTABLE WITH ORDINARY TOOLS AND CAPABLE
OF BEING SERVICED WITH NO TOOLS. ATTACHMENTS SUCH AS VISOR,
BACKPLATES OR ADAPTERS SHALL CONFORM AND READILY FASTEN TO
EXISTING MOUNTING SURFACES WITHOUT AFFECTING WATER AND LIGHT
INTEGRITY OF THE SIGNAL.
ELECTRICAL:
LAMP FIXTURE SHALL COMPRISE A SEPARATELY ACCESSIBLE HOUSING
AND INTEGRAL LAMP SUPPORT, INDEXED CERAMIC SOCKET AND SELF
ALIGNING, QUICK RELEASE LAMP RETAINER. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
BETWEEN CASE AND LAMP HOUSING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH AN
INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY WHICH DISCONNECTS LAMP HOLDER WHEN
OPENED. EACH SIGNAL SECTION SHALL INCLUDE A COVERED TERMINAL
BLOCK FOR CLIP OR SCREW ATTACHMENT OF LEAD WIRES. CONCEALED
"18 AWG. STRANDED AND CODED W I RES SHALL I NTERCONNECT ALL
SECTIONS TO PERMIT FIELD CONNECTION WITHIN ANY SECTION.
PHOTO CONTROLS: _
1. EACH SIGNAL SHALL INCLUDE INTEGRAL MEANS FOR REGULATING ITS
INTENSITY BETWEEN LIMITS AS A FUNCTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL
BACKGROUND ILLUMINATION. LAMP INTENSITY SHALL NOT BE LESS
THAN 91~ OF UNCONTROLLED INTENSITY AT 1000 FEET-C, AND SHALL
REDUCE TO 15 + 2~ OF MAXIMUM AT LESS THAN ONE (1) FOOT-C.
RESPONSE SHALL BE PROPORTIONAL AND ESSENTIALLY INSTANTANEOUS
TO ANY DETECTABLE INCREASE OF ILLUMINATION FROM DARKNESS TO
1000 FEET-C, AND DAMPED FOR ANY DECREASE FROM 1000 FEET-C.
~. THE I NTENS I TY CONTROLLER SHALL COMPR I SE AN INTEGRATED,
DIRECT I ONAL LIGHT SENS I NG AND REGULA T I NG DEV I CE INTERPOSED
BETWEEN LAMP AND LINE WIRES. IT SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH 60
HZ INPUT AND RESPONSIVE WITHIN THE RANGE 105 TO 135 V.
OUTPUT MAY BE PHASE CONTROLLED, BUT THE DEVICE SHALL PROVIDE
A NOMINAL TERMINAL IMPEDANCE OF 1200 OHMS OPEN CIRCUIT AND A
CORRESPONDING HOLDING CURRENT.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.22 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD 'LENSES ~
925.23 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD lZ
1 . THE TYPE AND COLOR LENS SHALL BE AS SPEC I F I ED I N THE
PLANS. LENSES SHALL BE OF THE CONCAVE/CONvEX TYPE WITH THE
CONVEX S-IDE SMOOTH AND THE CONCAVE SIDE FLUTED FOR THE
PURPOSE OF PROPERLY DIRECTING THE LIGHT RAYS. THE CANDLE
POWER REQUIRED SHALL EQUAL OR EXCEED THE VALUES SHOWN ON THE
ENCLOSED CHART BETWEEN THE LIMITS 12 1/2 DEGREES ABOVE - THE
HORIZONTAL, 17 1/2 DEGREES EACH SIDE OF THE VERTICAL FOR THE
SIGNAL OPTICAL UNIT. SEE CHART *1.
DtART .1
CANDLEPOWER CHART
ANSlE Ort
HORIZONTAL
ctNTERLIIlE
I. DESREES AMBlE OFF VERTICAL CENTERLINE IN DEGREES
.27 1/2 -22 1/2 -17 1/2 12 1/2 .7 1/2 +2 1/2 -2 1/2 71/2 12 1/2 17 1/2 22 1/2 27 1/2 -
12 1/2
7 112
21/2
-2 1/2 300 700 1200 1650 - 1650 1200 700 300
-7 112 125 225 500 800 !l00 1250 U'O 1100 800 ~ 22' 125
-12 1/2 100 no 250 350 400 450 450 400 350 250 150 100
-17 1/2 50 75 100 125 175 200 200 175 125 100 75 50
NOTE:
REQUIREMENTS ABOVE HORIZONTAL CENTERLINE INDICATE MAXIMUM
CANDLEPOWER VALUES, WHEREAS REClUIRED VALUES BELOW HORIZONTAL
CENTERLINE ARE MINIMUM.
PA6E 65
75-97
925.24 BLANK-OUT SIGNS
1. CASE:
A. FORMED FROM ALUMINUM EXTRUSION Fl-6-E AND SPECIAL ALUMINUM
DOOR FRAME ANGLE. ALLOY 6063-T5 MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS .075
CORNERS AND JOINTS .080 AND THICKER. ALL WELDING FILLER ARC.
CORNER RADIUS, BOTH CASE AND DOOR APPROXIMATELY 3". BR TYPE
TAKE APART DOOR HINGE AND DRAW BOLT. ONE (1) P-15 1 1/2" HUB
FURNISHED ON TOP SURFACE. ENTIRE CASE PRIMED WITH ZINC
CHROMATE, INSIDE BAKED WITH 2 COATS NON-YELLOWING WHITE,
OUTSIDE TWO COATS OF HIGHWAY YELLOW.
2. FACE:
A. F ABR I CA TED THREE ( 3 ) SECT ION PLEX 1 GLAS LENS CLEAR WITH OR
WITHOUT LEGEND BUT ABLE TO ACCEPT SILK SCREENED LEGEND ON
FIRST SURFACE. MINIMUM THICKNESS 5/16" SHALL BE FURNISHED BY
BIDDER. (LEGEND IS TO BE SILK SCREENED AND WILL BE PROVIDED
BY OTHERS.)
..;. . ELECTR I CAL :
A. FLUORESCENT ILLUMINATION PROVIDED BY EIGHT (8) F-36-T12-CW/HO
FLUORESCENT BY-PIN LAMPS AND FIRED BY TWO (2) 4 LAMP
BALLASTS~ 90% POWER FACTOR CORRECTED~ 120 VOLT AND CAPABLE OF
PROVIDING APPROXIMATELY 25% ADDITIONAL LUMEN OUTPUT FOR H. O.
LAMPS.
B. GLASS FIBER OPTICS BLANK-OUT SIGNS SHALL MEET ALL
REQUIREMENTS SET - FORTH IN THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR LANE USE
CONTROL SIGNALS. MESSAGES AND LETTER DIMENSIONS SHALL BE
APPROVED BY THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER.
4. SUN PHANTOM SCREEN:
A. A HEAVY DUTY ALUMINUM- LOUVER TYPE SUN F'HANTOM -SCREEN THAT
COVE~S THE ENTIRE SIGN FACE SHALL BE ATTACHED TO EACH SIGN.
THE ~OUVERS SHALL BE SLANTED DOWN SO AS TO ELIMINATE THE SUN
PHANTOM AND STILL NOT OBSTRUCT THE VIEW OF THE SIGN FACE.
5. GENERAL:
A. EACH SIGN SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING CLEARLY VISIBLE AND
DEFINABLE LEGEND FOR A DISTANCE OF 500 FEET WITH AMPLE SAFETY
FACTORS.
PASt H
TS-fB
','
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
925.24 BLANK-OUT SIGNS continued
B. THE SIGN SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH MOUNTING HARDWARE TO PROVIDE
FOR MOUNTING ON STANDARD 1 1/2" PIPE BRACKETS OR FOR,
MOUNTING DIRECTLY TO SIGNAL MAST ARMS, OR FOR SPAN WIRE.
6. PAINTING:
A. ALL SIGNAL SURFACES, INSIPE AND OUT, SHALL BE PAINTED TWO
COATS OF OVEN BAKED ENAMEL IN ADDITION TO THE PRIMER COAT.
COLORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
a. BLACK OR DARK GRAY: NON-ILLUMINATED PORTIONS OF SIGNAL
FACE.
b. HIGHWAY YELLOW: ALL HOUSINGS, BRACKETS, FITTINGS.
c. HARDWARE AND FITTINGS: ALL NECESSARY FITTINGS, PIPE
BRACKETS, HANGER, HUBS, ETC. SHALL BE PAINTED HIGHWAY
YELLOW IN COLOR.
925.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL
1.
PURPOSE:
a.
IT SHALL BE THE INTENT OF THE FOLLOWING SF'ECIFICATIONS TO
DESCR I BE THE M I N I MUM FUNCT I ONAL AND DES I GN REClUI REMENTS FOR
LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNALS.
"'"
...
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
a.
OVERALL WE I GHT: THE OVERALL WE I GHT FOR EACH ONE WAY
CONFIGURATION SHALL NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING:
b. ONE COLOR ( RED .. X", YELLOW. .. X" , OR DOWNWARD GREEN ARROW)
SHALL NOT WEIGHT MORE THAN 44 LBS.
c. WHERE MORE THAN ONE WAY OR ONE COLOR OR COMBINATIONS THEREOF
ARE REOUIRED, WEIGHTS SHALL NOT EXCEED SS LBS. PER FACE.
d. ALL SIGNALS SHALL CONFORM TO CURRENT I. T. E. STANDARDS.
e. THE COLOR OF LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL INDICATIONS SHALL BE
CLEARLY VISIBLE FOR 1/4 MILE AT ALL TIMES UNDER NORMAL
ATMOSPHER I C COND I T IONS, UNLESS OTHERW I SE PHYS I CALL Y
OBSTRUCTED. THE VISIBILITY ANGLE OF THE LANE-USE CONTROL
SIGNAL SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 60 DEGREES.
f. ALL SIGNALS- SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH THE NECESSARY MOUNTING
HARDWARE, TO PROV I DE FOR MOUNT I NG AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS.
MOUNTING SHALL BE FOR ONE WAY OR TWO WAY CONFIGURATIONS.
PAS( 67
-r5 - f9.
PAGE 68
/5 - ItJO
I
I
I
I
I
I~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL continued
-' .
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES:
a.
HOUS I NG : THE HOUS I NG OF EACH SIGNAL SHALL BE A ONE PIECE
CORROSION RESISTANT ALUMINUM ALLOY DIE CASTING OR EQUAL AND
SHALL MEET CURRENT RELATED A.S.T.M. SPECIFICATIONS. BIDS FOR
ALTERNATE POLYCARBONATE HOUSINGS WILL BE CONSIDERED. A
SUBSTANTIAL DOOR HINGE WITH AT LEAST TWO -HINGE PINS SHALL BE
PROVIDED. DOORS SHOULD OPEN FROM RIGHT TO LEFT. - ALL
CONFIGURATIONS SHALL BE BALANCED TO PROVIDE A PLUMB HANGING
UNIT. ALL COMPONENTS SHALL BE READILY AND EASILY ACCESSIBLE
FROM THE OPEN DOOR.
b.
HOUSING DOOR: THE HOUSING DOOR SHALL BE ONE PIECE- CORROSION
RESISTANT ALUMINUM OR EQUAL AND SHALL MEET CURRENT RELATED
A~S.T.M. SPECIFICATIONS. TWO HINGES SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE
LEFT S I DE OF EACH SECT I ON WITH A LATCH BOSS ON THE RIGHT
SIDE.
1) ATTACHMENT OF DOOR TO HOUSING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY
STAINLESS STEEL HINGE PINS.
2) STAINLESS STEEL DUAL EYE BOLT LATCHES OR SIMILAR APPROVED
DEV~CES SHALL BE PROVIDED TO SECURELY CLOSE AND LATCH
HOUSING DOOR.
3) THE HDlIS I NG SHALL BE MOUNTED I N A CONT I NUOUS MOLDED
NEOPRENE GASKET TO RENDER THE LANE SIGNAL HOUSING
DUSTPROOF AND MOISTURE RESISTANT.
4. OPTICAL SYSTEM:
A. SYMBOLS: IN GENERAL THE SYMBOLS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
1. GREEN DOWNWARD POINTING ARROW: THIS SYMBOL SHALL CONSIST
OF A GREEN ITE DOWNWARD POINTING ARROW ON AN OPAQUE BLACK
OR DAR~~ GRAY BACKGROUND. THE SYMBOL SHALL BE "BLACKED
OUT" WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
2. YELLOW "X": THIS SYMBOL SHALL CONSIST OF A YELLOW ITE "X"
ON AND OPAQUE BACKGROUND OF BLACK OR DARK GRAY. THE
SYMBOL SHALL BE "BLACKED OUT" WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
-'.
RED "X": THIS SYMBOL SHALL CONSIST OF A RED ITE "X" ON AN
OPAQUE BACKGROUND OF BLACK OR DARK GRAY. THE SYMBOL
SHALL BE "BLACKED OUT" WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
B. GLASS FIBER OPT I CS I LLUM I NA T I NG SYSTEM. TH I S SYSTEM SHALL
CONSIST OF A LEGEND ILLUMINATED BY FIRST QUALITY GLASS FIBER
OPTIC BUNDLES TRANSMITTING LIGHT TO THE ARRANGED SIGNAL
LEGEND.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SiGNAL continued
;~" ,
1. COLOR OF LEGENDS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE MUTCD CURRENT EDITION.
2 . EACH SEPARATE COLOR I ND I CA T ION I N A SIGN FACE SHALL BE
ILLUMINATED BY AN INDEF'ENDENT PAIR OF 12 VOLT, 50 WATT,
MR-16, ENL QUARTZ HALOGEN LAMPS. AVERAGE LAMP LIFE WILL
BE 4000 HOURS. ADDITIONAL PAIRS OF 50 WATT LAMPS, AS
REQUIRED BY LEGEND SIZE, OR AT THE DISCRETION OF THE
MANUFACTURER WILL BE ALLOWED. TRANSFORMERS OF'ERATING
THESE LAMPS WILL OUTPUT 10.8 VOLTS AC WITH LOAD APPLIED.
THE GLASS FIBER BUNDLE WHICH ILLUMINATES A GIVEN COLOR
INDICATION SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED SUCH THAT ADJACENT FIBERS
IN THE BUNDLE RECEIVE THEIR LIGHT INPUT FROM SEPARATE
LAMPS OF THE PAIR USED TO ILLUMINATE THAT SPECIFIC COLOR
INDICATION.
";'. THE GREEN ARROW INDICATION SHALL NOT UTILIZE THE SAME
TERMINATION POINTS AS ANY "X" INDICATION. INDICATORS-WILL
BE PROVIDED NEAR THE BOTTOM OF EACH SIGN FACE TO INDICATE
THE STATUS OF EACH LAMP UTILIZED FOR THAT FACE. THESE
INDICATORS WILL EMIT LIGHT OF THE SAME COLOR AS THE SIGN
FACE INDICATION WHICH UTILIZES THE SAME LAMP. THESE
I ND I CA TORS_ WILL BE ANGLED DOWNWARD AT APF'RO X I MA TEL Y 30
DEGREES AND WILL BE SO PLACED AS NOT TO INTERFERE WITH THE
VISIBILITY OR DISCERNIBILITY OF THE SIGN FACE INDICATIONS.
4. TOTAL POWER REQUIRED FOR ANY SINGLE INDICATION SHALL NOT
EXCEED 250 WATTS.
5. ALL LAMPS SHALL BE CaNT A I NED BEH I ND A WATER TIGHT SIGNAL
FACE OR LENS ASSEMBLY.
6. LAMP SHALL HAVE RATED LIFE OF AT LEAST 4,000 HOURS.
7. FIRST QUALITY GLASS FIBER BUNDLES SHALL TRANSMIT LIGHT
FROM LAMP TO ILLUMINATE SIGNAL LEGEND.
8. ENTIRE OPTICAL SYSTEM SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF AND SHALL NOT
BE VULNERABLE TO EXTREMES IN TEMPERATURE OR MOISTURE.
c.
ANTI-PHANTOM SCREEN: EACH SIGNAL FACE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A
SCREEN WHICH SUBSTANTIALLY COUNTERACTS SUN PHANTOM EFFECT.
DES I RABLE METHOD SHALL BE BY MEANS OF A SPEC I AL SCREEN
SUPPORTED IN THE SIGNAL DOOR.
D.
WI RING: EACH LAMP SHALL BE SEPARA TEL Y W I RED TO A TERM I NAL
BLOCK LOCATED IN EACH HOUSING. EACH LAMP HOLDER SOCKET SHALL
BE PROVIDED WITH COLOR CODED LEADS. FOR COMBINATION SYMBOLS,
SOCKET LEADS SHALL BE SEF'ARATELY COLOR CODED TO DISTINGUISH
_BETWEEN RED "X", YELLOW "X" OR DOWNWARD ARROW SYMBOLS.
PAGE 69
TS-/t)/
PA6E 70
/s-/()Z-
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
925.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL continued
1) LEADS SHALL BE NO. 14 AWG TYPE THW, 600 VOLT, FIXTURE WIRE
WITH 90 DEGREES C THERMOPLASTIC INSULATION.
2) EACH SIGNAL HOUS I NG SHALL BE PROV I OED, WITH A COMPLETE
TERMINAL BOARD. ONE SIDE OF TERMINAL STRIP SHALL
ACCOMMODATE SOC'KET LEADS; THE OTHER SIDE SHALL ACCOMMODATE
FIELD WIRES.
3) THE TERMINAL BOARD SHALL PROVIDE TOTALLY SEPARATE WIRING
OF EACH SYMBOL.
5. VISORS: VISORS NOT LESS THAN TWELVE (12) INCHES FOR MULTIPLE
UNIT AND SEVEN (7) INCHES LONG FOR SINGLE UNIT SIGNALS SHALL
BE PRO V I DED FOR EACH SIGNAL FACE. V I SORS SHALL BE
CONSTRUCTED OF SHEET ALUM I NUM OR EQUAL AND SHALL ENCOMPASS
TOP AND SIDES OF EACH SECTION. INSIDES OF VISORS SHALL BE
PAINTED FLAT BLACK.
6 . PA I NTI NG :
a. ALL SIGNAL SURFACES~ INSIDE AND OUT~ SHALL BE PAINTED TWO
COATS OF OVER BAKED ENAMEL IN ADDITION TO THE PRIMER
COAT. COLORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
1) FLAT BLACK: INSIDES OF VISORS.
2) BLACK OR DARK GRAY: NON-ILLUMINATED PORTIONS OF SIGNAL
FACE.
3) HIGHWAY YELLOW: ALL HOUSINGS~ BRACKETS~ FITTINGS
7. HARDWARE AND FITTINGS:
ALL NECESSARY FITTINGS, PIPE BRACKETS~ HANGERS~ HUBS ETC.
SHALL BE SUPPLIED FOR THE TYPE OF Mour....TING SPECIFIED. THEY
SHALL BE PAINTED HIGHWAY YELLOW IN COLOR.
T 1S NO. 26-29
925.26 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEAD ~ INCANDESCENT
925.27 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEAD ~ 'INCANDESCENT
925.28 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEAD ~ NEON
925.29 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEAD ~ FIBER OPTICS
1. PEDESTRIAN INDICATIONS SHOULD ATTRACT THE ATTENTION OF AND BE
READABLE TO THE F'EDEST~'IAN BOTH DAY AND NIGHT ~ AND AT ALL
DISTANCES FROM 10 FEET TO THE FULL WIDTH OF THE AREAS TO p~
CROSSED.
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.226 THRU 926.29 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS continued
2. ALL PEDESTRIAN INDICATIONS SHALL BE RECTANGULAR IN SHAPE AND
SHALL CONSIST OF THE LETTERED MESSAGES WALK AND DON'T WALK OR
II HAND & MAN II SYMBOL. ONL Y I NTERNAL I LLUM I NA T I ON SHALL BE
USED.
3. WHEN ILLUMINATED, THE WALK INDICATION SHALL BE _ LUNAR WHITE
MEETING THE STANDARDS -OF THE INSTITUTE OF TRANSPORTATION
ENGINEERS. ALL EXCEF'T THE LETTERS SHALL BE OE!SCURED BY AN
OPAQUE MATERIAL.
4. _WHEN ILLUMINATED, -THE DON'-T WALK INDICATION SHALL BE PORTLAND
ORANGE MEET I NG THE STANDARDS OF THE I NST I TUTE OF
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERS WItH ALL EXCEPT THE LETTERS bBSCURED
BY AN OPA~UE MATERIAL.
5. WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED~ THE WALK AND DON'T WALK MESSAGES SHALL
NOT BE DISTINGUISHABLE BY PEDESTRIANS AT THE FAR END OF THE
CROSSWALK THEY CONTROL.
6. THE LETTERS SHALL BE AT LEAST 3 INCHES HIGH FOR CROSSING
WHERE THE DISTANCE FROM THE NEAR CURB TO -THE PEDESTRIAN
SIGNAL I~DICATION IS 60 FEET OR LESS. FOR DISTANCE~ OVER 60
FEET, THE LETTERS SHOULD BE AT LEAST 4 1/2 INCHES HIGH.
7. THE LIGHT SOURCE SHALL BE DESIGNED AND CONSTRUCTED SO THAT IN
CASE OF AN ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL FAILURE OF THE WORD
DON' T ~ THE WORD WALK OF THE DON'T WALK MESSAGE WILL ALSO
REMAIN DARK. EACH SECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A VISOR
ENCOMPASSING THE TOP AND SIDES OF THE SIGNAL FACE OF A SIZE
AND SHAPE ADEQUATE TO SHIELD THE LENS FROM EXTERNAL LIGHTED
SOURCES. THE HOUSING DOOR, DOOR LATCH~ AND HINGES SHALL BE
OF ALUMINUM~ OR APPROVED EQUAL. HINGE PINS SHALL BE
STAINLESS STEEL. THE DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A NEOPRENE
GASK~T CAPABLE OF MAKING A WEATHER RESISTANT, DUSTPROOF SEAL
WHEN CLOSED.
8. THE LAMF' ILLUMINATION SHALL BE BY INCANDESCENT (WORD MESSAGE
OR SYMBOLS) OR NEON (SYMBOLS). THE INCANDESCENT UNIT SHALL
BE COMPATIBLE WITH LOW ENERG~ LAMPS. THE NEON UNIT IS TO BE
PROVIDED WITH A TOTALLY SOLID STATE POWER SUPPLY, AND THE
TUBES AND CONNECTIONS SHALL BE A SHOCK MOUNTED, ONE PIECE,
ENCAPSULATED ASSEMBLY SEALED MODULE.
9. LAMPS ARE NOT TO BE PROVIDED FOR INCANDESCENT UNITS.
925.30 PEDESTRIAN ~ BUTTONS
1. PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS SHALL BE OF SUBSTANTIAL TAMPER PROOF
CONSTRUCTION. THEY SHALL CONSIST OF A DIRECT PUSH TYPE BUTTON
AND SINGLE MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCH IN A CAST METAL HOUSING.
OPERATING VOLTAGE FOR PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS SHALL NOT
EXCEED 24 VOLTS.
PAGE 71
r5-/IJ3
925.30 PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS continued
2. THE ASSEMBLY SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF AND SO CONSTRUCTED THAT IT
WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE TO RECEIVE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK UNDER ANY
WEATHER CONDITION.
925.31
925.32
925.33
925.34
925.35
BACKPLATE EQB. 3-SECTION. ~ SIGNAL I::fE8R.
BACKPLATE FOR 3~SECTION. ~ SIGNAL HEAD
BACKPLATE FOR 4-SECTION. IN-LINE. ~.SIGNAL HEAD
BACKPLATE FOR S-SECTION. IN-LINE. ~ SIGNAL ~
BACKPLATE FOR 5-SECTION. ~LUSTER. 1Z: SIGNAL ~
1. EACH BACKPLATE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO PROPERLY SHIELD A TRAFFIC
SIGNAL FROM BACKGROUND DISTRACT IONS FOR BETTER V I SIB I L I TY .
THE BACrF'LATE SHALL EXTEND BEYOND THE SIGNAL HEAD TO A
MINIMUM OF 6" ON ALL SIDES. CONSTRUCTION OF THE BACKPLATE
SHALL BE FROM ALUM I NUM OR SHEET METAL MATER I AL WITH A
FIN I SHED COLOR OF FLAT BLAC.~. THE BACKF'LATE SHALL BE
DESIGNED TO PROVIDE FOR SIMPLE ATTACHMENT TO THE TRAFFIC
SIGNAL WITH ALL MOUNTING HARDWARE INCLUDED AND SHALL BE
LOUVERED.
925.36 TUNNEL VISOR AND LOUVER FOR S" SIGNAL HEAD
925.37 TUNNEL VISOR AND LOUVER FOR 12" SIGNAL HEAD
REFER TO 9:5,16 THRU 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
925.38
925. .39
925.40
925.41
925.42
925.4-:;
925.44
925.45
925.46
925.47
HARDWARE FOR SPANWIRE MOUNTING
HnRDWARE FOR ~ ~ MOUNTING
HARDWARE FOR PEDESTAL MOUNTING
HARDWARE FOR BRACKET MOUNTING ~ ~
HARDWARE FOR TWO-WAY MOUNTING
HARDWARE EQB. THREE-WAY MOUNTING
HARDWARE EQR FOUR-WAY MOUNTING
BALANCE ADJUSTER
HARDWARE FOR PEDESTAL MOUNTING EQB 9" OR 12" PED ~
HARDWARE FOR BRACKET MOUNTING i: QR ~ PED ~ IQ POLE
ALL HARDWARE MATERIALS, PAINTING. 3ALVANIZATION. ETC. SHALL MEET
THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THE STANDARD AND/OR SUPPLEMENTAL
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
HARDWARE ITEMS MAY BE APPROVED UPON SUBMITTAL OF CATALOG CUTS.
PAGE 72
T5-109-
I
I
I
I
I
,-
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
924.48 FEDESTAL POLE
1. THE PEDESTAL POLES SHALL APPL Y TO PEDESTALS SUPF'ORT I NG
TRAFF I C AND PEDESTR I AN SIGNAL HEADS AND TRAFF I C SIGNAL
CONTROLLERS AND SHALL BE FURNISHED ACCORDING TO TYPE AND
OVERALL LENGTH.
2. THE PEDESTAL POLES SHALL CONSIST OF ONE UPRIGHT F'OLE -WITH
SU I TABLE BASE AND ANY 'OTHER ACCESSOR I ES - OR HARDWARE- AS
REQUIRED TO MAKE A COMPLETE INSTALLATION~
3. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
a. ALL POLES SHALL BE MADE OF ONE CONTINUOUS F'IECE FROM TOF'
TO BASE CONNECT I ON FOR THE ENT I RE HE I GHT OF THE POLE.
THE SHAFT ~ OF APF'ROF'R I ATE SHAPE - MAY OR MAY NOT BE
UNIFORML'Y TAFERED FROM BUTT TO TIP. THE CROSS SECTION AT
THE TIP SHALL HAVE A 4 1/2" OUTSIDE DIAMETER. A TENON
SHALL BE USED TO ACCOMPLISH THIS WHERE REQUIRED.
b. POLE CAPS WHEN REQUIRED SHALL BE FABRICATED OF CAST
MATERIAL AND SECURED IN PLACE WITH SET SCREWS~
,
c: . EACH POLE SHALL HAVE A ONE F' I ECE CAST ANCHOR BASE OR
PLACE BASE WELDED TO THE BUTT END. THE BASE SHALL BE OF
ADEQUATE STRENGTH~ SHAPE AND SIZE TO WITHSTAND FULL
DESIGN LEVEL. THIS BASE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO SECURE THE
POLE ASSEMBLY TO A CONCRETE FOUNDATION BY MEANS OF ANCHOR
BOL TS. A HAND HOLE SHALL BE PROV I DED I N EACH BASE.
SUITABLE GROUNDING LUG SHALL BE PROVIDED INSIDE THE BASE.
THE BASE SHALL BE FITTED WITH REMOVABLE ANCHOR BOLT
COVERS.
d. BASES SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH STEEL ANCHOR BOLTS OF
SUFF I C I ENT NUMBER ~ SIZE ~ LENGTH AND STRENGTH TO DEVELOP
THE FULL STRENGTH OF THE POLE. THE THREADED END OF EACH
ANCHOR BOLT AND THE FASTEN I NG HARDWARE (NUTS.~ LOCK
WASHERS~ FLAT WASHERS, OR OTHER) SHALL BE HOT DIPPED
GALVANIZED CONFORMING TO_ ASTM A-153.
925.49 TIMBER POLES
1. POLES SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL BE TIMBER POLES
MANUFACTURED TO MEET STANDARD SPECIFICATION SECTION 861.02
AND SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION 647.15. THE POLES SHALL MEET
THE REOUIREMENTS IN THE TABLE BELOW UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON
THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL PLANS OR LIST OF MATERIALS.
PAGE 73
75-//)5
PAGE 74
/.5-/~~
I
I
I
I
I
.,
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CLASS MINIMUM CIRCUMFERENCE LENGTH
(6' FROM BUTT END) ,
(NOMINAL)
2 38.5" 45'
2 38.5" 40'
2 38.5" 35'
.... 38.5" 30'
..:.
925.50 STEEL STRAIN POLES
1. DESCR I PT I ON: EACH POLE SHALL CONSI ST OF A STEEL SHAFT,
HARDWARE FOR SPAN WIRE ATTACHMENTS, ANCHOR BASE, AND ANCHOR
BOLTS FOR THE PURPOSE OF SUPPORTING SPAN WIRE SUSPENDED SIGNS
AND/OR SIGNALS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DESIGN: POLE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON THE BID LIST.
DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA SHOWING DESIGN OF THE POLE AND BASE
SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE VENDOR AND APPROVED BY THE GEORGIA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION BRIDGE ENGINEER.
~. MATERIALS: THE SHAFTS FOR STRAIN POLES SHALL BE FABRICATED OF
STEEL CONFORM I NG TO ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOW I NG
SPECIFICATIONS: AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS
(ASTM): A 242. A 6(16~ A 572, OR A 595; AMERICAN IRON AND
STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI): 1015 OR 1020 AND SOCIETY OF
AUTOMOT I VE ENG I NEERS (SAE): 1015. ALL STEELS SHALL BE
WELDABLE WITH NO SIGN I F I CANT CHANGE I N CHARACTER I ST I CS OR
LOSS OF STRENGTH DUE TO WELDING. THE SHAFT~ OF APPROPRIATE
SHAPE, SHALL BE OF. CONT I NUOUS T AF'ER AND, UNLESS OTHERW I SE
SPECIFIED. SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL;
FORMED FROM ONE F'I ECE WITH ONE ELECTR I CALL Y WELDED
LONGITUDINAL. JOINT AND NO INTERMEDIATE HORIZONTAL JOINTS.
THE POLE SHALL HAVE A MILL CERTIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH
OF 48.000 PSI. AFTER FORMING AND WELDING. THE SHAFT MAY BE
LONG I TUD I NALL Y COLD ROLLED UNDER SUFF I C lENT F'RESSURE TO
FLATTEi. THE WELD AND INCREASE THE PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE METAL IN THE SHAFT TO CONFORM TO THE REQUIRED YIELD
STRENGTH. A 1/2" AF'PROVED GROUND I NG CONNECTOR SHALL BE
PROVIDED IN THE SHAFT. THE TOP OF THE SHAFT SHALL BE EQUIPPED
WITH A REMOVABLE POLE CAP HELD SECURELY IN PLACE. THE SHAFT
SHALL BE HOT D I F'F'ED GAL VAN I ZED I N ACCORDANCE WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM:A 123. _A HAND HOLE ASSEMBLY~ CURVED ON
THE FRONT TO FOLLOW THE CONTOUR OF THE POLE, SHALL BE WELDED
INTO THE SHAFT NEAR THE BASE. THE HAND HOLE REINFORCING
FRAME SHALL HAVE A TAPPED HOLE TO ACCOMMODATE A GROUNDING LUG
AND THE COVER SHALL BE SECURED TO THE FRAME BY AT LEAST TWO
SCREWS.
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.51 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE STRAIN POLE
1. DESCRIPTION: THIS ITEM SHALL CONSIST OF PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
STRAIN POLES FOR OVERHEAD SIGN AND SIGNAL SUPPORT. ALL
ITEMS BID OR SUPPLIED SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 639 OF THE
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DESIGN: THE SHAFTS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 865.03
EXCEPT THAT THE POLES SHALL BE GIVEN A STEEL TROWEL -FINISH ON
THE UNFORMED SIDE PLUS ANY REQUIRED POINTING TO ELIMINATE AIR
AND WATER HOLES LEFT BY THE STEEL FORMS. THE CONCRETE SHALL.
HAVE A 28 DAY STRENGTH OF 6, (lOO F'S I (M I N I MUM) . THE
I DENT I FY I NG CLASS AND HE I GHT OF POLE SHALL BE AF'PL I ED BY A
MARKING TOOL OR CAST WITH A DIE IN THE FRONT OF THE POLE SO
AS TO PRODUCE LETTERS AND NUMBERS AT LEAST :" IN BOTH HEIGHT
AND WIDTH. FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRAIN POLES, DRAWINGS
AND OTHER DATA INDICATING THE POLE DIMENSIONS AND DESIGN
SHALL BE PREF'ARED AND SUBM I TTED TO THE DEPARTMENT FOR
APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR SHIPMENT. ROUND EQUIVALENT
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE POLES ARE ACCEF'TABLE. ALL CONCRETE
STRAIN POLES WILL INCLUDE HARDWARE FOR SPANWIRE ATTACHMENTS.
THE OPENING AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF POLE SHALL BE SUFFICIENTLY
LARGE ENOUGH TO ALLOW ALL WIRING INTO AND OUT OF POLE. NO
CONDUIT SHALL BE STRAPPED TO STRAIN POLE BECAUSE OF
INSUFFICIENT OPENING ALLOWANCES.
3. MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE:
A. STEEL MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR FABRICATION OF OTHER STRUCTURAL
COMF'ONENTS SHALL BE OF A QUAL I TV CONFORM I NG PHYS I CALL Y AND
CHEMICALLY TO THE APPLICABLE ASTM SPECIFICATION.
B. NUTS, BOLTS, AND SCREWS.
1. LESS THAN 1/2.' DIAMETER SHALL BE PASSIVATED STAINLESS
STEEL MEET I NG THE REOU I REMENTS OF A I S I 300, COMMERC I AL
GRADE.
2. 1/2" DIAMETER AND LARGER MAY CONFORM TO ANY ASTM PHYSICAL
AND CHEM I CAL QUAL I F I CAT IONS WH I CH WILL I NSURE THAT
STRENGTH COMMENSURATE WITH THE PARTS BEING CONNECTED.
THIS HARDWARE SHALL BE GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
ASTM: A 153.
C. LIFTING EYES OR LOOF'S ARE TO BE LEFT FOR HANDLING AND
ERECTION.
PAS[ 75
-r.5~/07
925.52 TRAFFIC SIGNAL PULL-.AND JUNCTION BOX
1. TRAFFIC SIGNAL PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES DESIGN SHALL BE BASED
ON THE (AASHTO) STANDARD SPECIFICATION~ H20 LOADING~ 20~BOO
LB. LOAD OVER A 10" X 20" AREA. PRECAST CONCRETE BOXES SHALL
BE CONSTRUCTED OF CLASS A CONCRETE MEET I NG THE _ -AF'PL I CABLE
REQU I REMENTS OF SECT I ON 500 ~ OF THE DEF'ARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, CURRENT EDITION.
POLYMER CONCRETE OR HIGH DENSITY PLASTIC CONSTRUCTION WILL BE
ACCEPTABLE IF LOADING QUALIFICATIONS ARE MET. CAST IRON OR
STEEL COVERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH EACH PULL OR JUNCTION
BOX. COVERS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH LOGO~ "TRAFFIC SIGNAL".
925.53 LAMPS
1 . LAMF'S SHALL HAVE AN 8000 HOUR L I FE
925.54 PREFAB CONTROLLER CABINET ~
1. PREFAB CONTROLLER CABINET BASE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND
WIND LOADING OF 1(10 MPH WITH FOUR PHASE OR EIGHT PHASE
CABINET MOUNTED. BASES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR A BURIAL DEPTH
FROM 12" TO 18". THE BASE DESIGN SHALL PROVIDE FOR A MINIMUM
HEIGHT OF 6" ABOVE GROUND. BOLT PATTERNS SHALL MEET CABINET-
BOLT LOCATIONS AS SHOWN ON THE- CABINET BOLT LOCATIONS SKETCH.
ALL BASES BID SHALL BE APPRO'v'ED BY GEORG I A DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION~ TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ELECTRICAL FACILITIES~
PRIOR TO PURCHASE AN~/OR USE ON THE STATE HIGHWAY SYSTEM.
PAst n
15- /0{3
I
I
I
I
I
..
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
CAE I.NET . BOLT .LOCAT IONS
EIGHT ,PHASE BASE (nts)
<----------- 34-5/B" ------------)
^
o
o
^
. I
I
.
I
IB-l/2"
40" (min)
v
o
o
v
1<----------------------- 5S" (min) --------------------->1
75- If}?
PASE n
CASINET SOLT LOCATIONS
FOUR PHAS.E BASe: (nts)
<--------- 25"--------->
1<-12-1/2"->
^
- 0
---
^
12"
o
C\L
24 " (MIN)
o
^
6" :
v v
o
v
1<-------------
30"
(min) --------->/
92~.55 MISCELLANEOUS
CATALOG CUTS~ MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND/OR GUARANTEE~ ETC. WILL
APPL Y AS SPEC I F I CAT IONS FOR THESE ITEMS. THE APPROPR I ATE
SECTIONS OF THE STANDARD AND/OR SUF'PLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE DEPARTMENT SHALL BE MET IN ALL CASES.
925.80 WIRE A~-~ CABLE
ALL WIRE AND CABLE WILL MEET THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS OF THE DEPARTMENT OR THE INTERNATIONAL
MUNICIPAL SIGNAL ASSOCIATION (IMSA).
Q2S.81 LOOP LEAD-IN (FEEDER) CABLE
A. LOOP DETECTOR LEAD- I N CABLE, 14 AI"'G ~ STRANDED. 2-
CONDUCTOR SHIELDED CABLE MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION
.50-2-1984.
PA&E 78
IS-I/O
I
I
I
I
I
..
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--I
925.81 LOOP LEAD-IN (FEEDER) CABLE continued
B. LOOF' DETECTOR LEAD- I N CABLE, 18. AWG, STRANDED, 6-
CONDUCTOR, THREE TWISTED PAIRS WITH SHIELD FOR EACH PAIR,
MUST MEET CAROL #C6047 OR BELDEN #9773.
925.82 ENCASED ~ DETECTOR WIRE
ENCASED LOOP WIRE, 14 AWG, STRANDED, SINGLE CONDUCTOR, WITH
PVC/NYLON TUBE JACKET MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION #51-5-1984.
925.83 AERIAL (LASHED) ~ DUCT SIGNAL CABLE
A. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 14 AWG, STRANDED,
4-CONDUCTOR, WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET AND 600
VOLT RATING MUSt MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION #20-1-1984. THE
CONDUCTORS MUST BE STRAIGHT, NOT TWISTED PAIRS.
B. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 14 AWG, STRANDED,
1-CONDUCTOR, WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET AND 600
VOLT RATING MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION #20-1-1984. THE
CONDUCTORS MUST BE STRAIGHT, NOT TWISTED PAIRS.
C. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 14 AWG, STRANDED,
13-CONDUCTOR
, WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET AND 600 VOLT RATING
MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION #20-1-1984. THE CONDUCTORS
MUST BE STRAIGHT, NOT TWISTED PAIRS.
D. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 19 AWG, STRANDED,
6-CONDUCTOR. 600 VOLT RATING MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION
#20-2-1984. - CONDUCTORS M0sT BE TWISTED PAIRS. SHIELD TO
BE COPPER TAPE UNDER WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET.
925.84 SELF-SUPPORTING AERIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
SELF-SUPF'ORTING (FIGURE 8) AERIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, 19
AWG, STRANDED 6-PAIR CONDUCTORS SHALL BE RATED AT 600 VOLTS AND
MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION #20-4-1984. THE CONDUCTORS SHALL BE
TWISTED PAIRS WITH COPPER TAPE SHIELD UNDER A BLACK PE JACKET.
MESSENGER STRAND SHALL 83 1/4" 1-STRANDAND SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM
A 475 EXTRA HIGH-STRENGTH GRADE WITH A TYPE A COATING.
PA6E 79
15- III
925.85 DIRECT EARTH BURIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
DIRECT EARTH BURIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, 19 AWG,
STRANDED, 6-PAIR CONDUCTORS SHALL BE RATED AT 600 VOLTS AND MEET
IMSA SPECIFICATION ~20-6-1984. THE CONDUCTORS SHALL BE TWISTED
PAIRS WITH COPPER TAPE SHIELD UNDER A BLACK PE JACKET.
925.B6 UNDERGROUND FEEDER CABLE ~ TYPE UE
UNDERGROUND FEEDER CABLE, TYF'E UF W/GROUND SHALL - HAVE TWO (2)
CONDUCTORS WITH PVC/NYLON JACKET AND A MINIMUM 600 VOLT RATING
PER UL ~4 93 . THE FOLLOW I NG AMER I CAN WIRE GAUGES ( AWG ) MAYBE
USED.
A. TWO CONDUCTOR, 12 AWG
B. TWO CONDUCTOR, 10 AWG
C. TWO CONDUCTOR, 8 AWG
D. TWO CONDUCTOR, 6 AWG
925.87 BUILDING WIRE ~ TYPE THHN
BUILDING WIRE - TYPE THHN SHALL BE STRANDED COPPER, SINGLE
CONDUCTOR WITH PVC/NYLON JACKET AND RATED AT 600 VOLTS PER UL #83
(ALL COLORS). THE FOLLOWING AMERICAN WIRE GAUGES (AWG) MAY BE
USED.
A. 14 AWG
B. 1"" AWG
~
C. 10 AWG
D. 8 AWG
E. 6 AWG
F. 4 AWG
G. "" AWG
,L
PAGE 80
T.5-//Z-
I
I
I
I
I
"-
I.
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
II
m....
II
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
o
Ii.
I!
II
IJ
~
II
tiI
1\
I.
II
I
I
I".
..
II
I
1-
925.88 M~5SENGER i egySTRAND (SPANWIRE)
ALL MESSENGER & GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE) SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A 475
EXTRA HIGH-STRENGTH GRADE, 7-WIRE SPANWIRE WITH TYPE A COATING.
925.88.1 MESSENGER & GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE) 1/4" MAY BE USED TO
SUPPORT INTERCONNECT CA-BLE OR' AS TETHER SPANS ~
925.88.2 MESSENGER 1]( GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE) 5/16" MAY BE USED
ONLY WHERE IT IS ESSENTIAL TO MATCH AN EXISTING 5/16" SPANWIRE
THAT WILL NOT BE REPLACED; AS PART OF A NEW INSTALLATION.
925.88.3 MESSENGER I]~ GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE) 3/8" SHALL BE THE
MINIMUM SIZE ALLOWED FOR ALL SPANWIRE FOR SIGNAL HEADS~ BLANKOUT
SIGNS~ OPTICALLY PROGRAMMED HEADS~ LANE CONTROL SIGNS~ STANDARDp
AERIAL OR SIDEWALK GUYS.
925.90 WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES
THE SUPPLIERS SHALL PROVIDE ALL MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES OR
GUARANTEES FOR ALL SIGNAL EQUIPMENT ITEMS LISTED IN THIS DOCUMENT
AS WELL AS ANY SIGNAL EQUIPMENT LISTED IN THE PLANS, EXCEPT FOR
STATE SUF'PLIED EQUIPMENT. WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES SHALL BE
CONSISTENT WITH THOSE FROVIDED AS CUSTOMARY TRADE PRACTICES; OR
AS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. IN. THE PLANS, STANDARD' SPECIFICATIONSp
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OR SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
MANUFACTURER'S AND SUPPLIER'S WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES SHALL BE
TRANSFERABLE TO THE AGE~CY OR USER THAT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR
TRAFFIC SIGNAL MAINTENANCE~ ~HALL BE CONTINUOUS THROUGHOUT THEIR
DURATION AND THEY SHALL'STATE THAT THEY ARE SUBJECT TO SUCH
TRANSFER.
GENERAL OFFICE OF TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
illiG{ 01
75-//3